A81936-3 Trans Mountain Appendix A Part 2 of 7 Condition 26 - A5J1X3

Burnaby Mountain Tunnel Option
Trans Mountain Pipeline ULC Design, Construction, and Operation

Trans Mountain Expansion Project
Appendix 1: Specifications and Drawings:
Specification for Precast Concrete Tunnel Lining (PCTL) TMEP-TU-1500 – 31 74 16.
Specification for PCTL Concrete Accessories TMEP-TU-2900 – 03 15 00.
Specification for Concrete Reinforcement for PCTL TMEP-TU-3000 – 03-20-00.1
Specification Concrete for PCTL TMEP-TU-3100 – 03 30 00.1.
Specification for PCTL Handling, Storage and Delivery TMEP-TU-3300 – 31 74 16.1.
Specification for Tunnel Annular Grouting TMEP-TU-1600 – 31 73 13.
Specification for Tunnel Backfill TMEP-TU-2500 – 31 73 14
Drawing M002-XD12100
Specification for Site Preparation TMEP-TU-1000 – 31 10 00.
Specification for Diversion and Care of Water TMEP-TU-1100 – 01 57 23.
Specification for Portal Area Development TMEP-TU-1210 – 31-71-03.
Specification for Secant Pile Wall TMEP-TU-2600 – 31 57 00.
Specification for Concrete Reinforcement TMEP-TU-2700 – 03 20 00.
Specification for Ground Anchors TMEP-TU-2800 – 31 51 00
Specification for Site Restoration TMEP-TU-2510 - 31 23 23.
Specification for Tunneling By TBM TMEP-TU-1310 – 31 71 20.
Specification for Pipeline Installation in Tunnel TMEP-TU-2000 – 23 11 00
McNally Burnaby Mountain Tunnel Work Plan 007 Appendix A Kelley Calculations and Drawings.
3-15
40 m 0 1:3000 160 m
20 m 0 1:2000 100 m
– 2m 0 1:250 10 m
’
40 mm 0 1:5 200 mm
0.4 m 0 1:50 2m
50 m 0 1:5000 250 m
NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION

TRANS MOUNTAIN PIPELINE L.P.
EXPANSION PROJECT SPECIFICATION
TMEP-TU-1000 Revision 0 June 1, 2016 Page 1 of 8
31 10 00 Site Preparation
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 2
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 2
1.2 Scope of Work ........................................................................................... 4
1.3 Related Work Specified Elsewhere ............................................................ 5
1.4 Glossary and Abbreviations ....................................................................... 5
1.5 Regulations, Codes, Specifications, Standards ......................................... 6
1.6 Quality Control and Quality Assurance ...................................................... 6
1.7 Submittals .................................................................................................. 6
1.8 Protection................................................................................................... 6
1.9 Site Conditions ........................................................................................... 7
2.0 PRODUCTS ......................................................................................................... 7

2.1 Materials .................................................................................................... 7
3.0 EXECUTION......................................................................................................... 8
3.1 Preparation ................................................................................................ 8
3.2 Stripping and Stockpiling of Topsoil ........................................................... 8
334890-TU-210-S0-0033
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 This Specification was prepared in collaboration with McNally Construction

Inc. (the Contractor) as part of the Early Contractor Involvement (ECI) Pre-
Construction Services (Phase 1) as described in the Memorandum of
Understanding for Early Contractor Involvement, Contract Number TMEP-
PC-001.
1.1.2 This Specification is customized to the Contractor’s construction plans and

preferences, as described in the Construction Execution Plans, produced
as part of the ECI Phase 1.
1.1.3 This Specifications forms part of the Contract Documents and is to be

read, interpreted and coordinated with all other parts, including the
following:
1.1.3.1 Bidding requirements, bid forms, pricing and baseline schedule

milestones by Trans Mountain
1.1.3.2 General Conditions by Trans Mountain
1.1.3.3 Special Conditions and/or Division 1 Technical Specifications by

Trans Mountain
1.1.3.4 Environmental and Permit Conditions by Trans Mountain
1.1.3.5 Construction Execution Work Plans prepared by McNally and

reviewed by HMM and Trans Mountain
1.1.3.6 Contract Drawings
1.1.3.7 Contract Geotechnical Reports
1.1.3.8 Various other Trans Mountain and TMEP standards including

TMEP Pipeline Construction Damage Prevention Plan, and the
following Technical Specifications including:
A. 1000 Site Preparation
B. 1100 Diversion and Care of Water
C. 1210 Portal Area Development
334890-TU-210-S0-0033
D. 1310 Tunnelling by TBM
E. 1500 Precast Concrete Tunnel Lining (PCTL)
F. 1600 Tunnel Annular Grouting
G. 1610 Pre-Excavation Grouting
H. 1620 Shotcrete
I. 2000 Pipeline Installation in Tunnel
J. 2200 Probe Hole Drilling ahead of TBM
K. 2300 Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring
L. 2400 Cast-In-Place Concrete
M. 2500 Tunnel Backfill
N. 2510 Site Restoration
O. 2600 Secant Pile Wall
P. 2700 Concrete Reinforcement
Q. 2800 Ground Anchors
R. 2900 PCTL Concrete Accessories
S. 3000 Concrete Reinforcement for PCTL
T. 3100 Concrete for PCTL
U. TMEP-CIV102 Engineering Survey – B.C.
V. TMEP-CIV301 Blasting
W. TMEP-CIV400 Clearing Specification for British Columbia
X. TMEP-GC3105 FBE Plant Applied Coating
Y. TMEP-GC3300 FBE Field Applied Coating
Z. TMEP-GC3302 Two-Part Liquid Field Applied Coating
AA. TMEP-GC3306 Two-Part Liquid Shop Applied Coating
334890-TU-210-S0-0033
BB. TMEP-MP1200 Steel Fittings
CC. TMEP-MP2212 Steel Flanges
DD. TMEP-MP2217 Bends
EE. TMEP-MP2300 Pipeline Valves
FF. TMEP-MP3120 Pipeline Construction
GG. TMEP-MP3903 Non Destructive Testing
HH. TMEP-MP3904 SMAW and Mechanized Welding
II. TMEP-MP4121 Hydrostatic Testing
JJ. TMEP-MP4500 Pipeline Cleaning
KK. TMEP-MP4501 Pipeline Drying
LL. TMEP-MP4502 Post Construction Caliper Pigging
MM. TMEP-42EF0009 Piling Installation
NN. TMEP-42EF0016 Structural Steel Fabrication and Erection
OO. TMEP-45ES0012 Pipeline Above Ground Painting
1.1.4 Trans Mountain Expansion Project (TMEP) site considerations and

requirements are described in Section TMEP-CIV400 - Clearing
Specification for British Columbia. Where specifications may identify
conflicting requirements, assume that the more stringent requirement
applies, unless otherwise specified herein.
1.1.5 The Work will occur on and/or in the vicinity of the existing right-of-way,
next to the existing Trans Mountain pipeline and other pipelines which will
remain in service throughout construction. All Work shall be performed in
accordance with the TMEP Pipeline Construction Damage Prevention
Plan.
1.2 Scope of Work
1.2.1 This section of the Specifications is for site preparation at the Burnaby and
Westridge Terminal work sites.
334890-TU-210-S0-0033
1.2.2 The Work excludes tree clearing, brush removal, and grubbing within the
clearing limits shown on the Drawings. Clearing and grubbing will be
carried out by the Owner as part of the Early Works.
1.2.3 Environmental and archaeological surveys will be completed by the

Owner.
1.3 Related Work Specified Elsewhere
1.3.1 01 57 23 Diversion and Care of Water
1.3.2 31 71 03 Portal Area Development
1.4 Glossary and Abbreviations
1.4.1 Clearing: Consists of cutting designated trees, and handling of felled trees
and disposing of debris.
1.4.2 Embankment: Material derived from usable excavation and placed above
original ground or stripped surface elevation.
1.4.3 Grading: altering the ground surface to a desired grade or contour by

cutting, filling, levelling, and/or smoothing.
1.4.4 Grubbing: Consists of excavation and disposal of stumps and roots.
1.4.5 Stripping: Consists of excavating and disposal of topsoil and unsuitable

material.
1.4.6 Topsoil: Material capable of supporting good vegetative growth and

suitable for use in top dressing, landscaping and seeding.
1.4.7 Unsuitable Materials:
1.4.7.1 Weak and/or compressible materials under excavated areas.
1.4.7.2 Materials containing excessive organics or other deleterious

materials as determined by the Owner.
1.4.7.3 Frost susceptible materials under excavated areas.
1.4.8 Waste Material: Excavated material unsuitable for use in Work or surplus
to requirements.
334890-TU-210-S0-0033
1.5 Regulations, Codes, Specifications, Standards
1.5.1 All Work shall be performed in accordance with all applicable federal,
provincial, and municipal regulations, codes, and standards.
1.6 Quality Control and Quality Assurance
1.6.1 Execution of the site preparation shall be performed under the supervision
of a qualified environmental professional.
1.6.2 Each new major activity shall be preceded by a kickoff meeting with the
Contractor, Owner, Engineer and Construction Manager.
1.7 Submittals
1.7.1 General
1.7.1.1 All submissions shall be provided to the Owner for review in

accordance with the Contractor Shop Drawings requirements
provided in the General and Special Conditions of the
Construction Contract.
1.7.2 Submit a detailed site preparation plan that includes site grading, site
access and diversion of the existing stream flow(s) for approval by the
Owner fifteen days in advance of commencing site preparation Works.
Submittal shall specify pipe culvert material types, connections, and pipe
culvert inlets and outlets.
1.7.3 All materials and equipment used in the Work shall be the subject of or
included as part of a submittal to the Owner.
1.8 Protection
1.8.1 Prevent damage to existing access roads, buildings, fencing, monitoring

wells, existing utilities and drainage systems, stream channel(s), walking
trails, ditches and root systems of trees which are to remain.
1.8.1.1 Repair any damaged property to the satisfaction of the Owner.
1.8.1.2 Compensate the Owner for property damage, where repair or

equivalent replacement is considered by the Owner to be
impractical.
1.8.2 Valuation for damage and replacement shall be at the sole discretion of
the Owner.
334890-TU-210-S0-0033
1.8.3 Valuation of tree damage will be based on the methods prescribed by the
Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers. Be responsible for the cost of
this valuation, including the Owner’s cost in preparing the valuation.
1.8.4 Ensure the complete diversion and conveyance of the existing stream
flows that pass through the Westridge Terminal as shown on the
Drawings. Be responsible for designing and constructing temporary pipe
culverts that convey and isolate all flows from the stream bed through the
Westridge tunnel portal area. Ditching of the existing stream flows are not
acceptable. Submit the design to the Owner for approval fifteen days prior
to commencing with Works.
1.8.5 The use of the existing access roads and haulage equipment shall be in
accordance with the Special Conditions of the Contract Documents.
1.8.6 Prevention and treatment of surface run-off water shall be in accordance

with 01 57 23 Diversion and Care of Water.
1.9 Site Conditions
1.9.1 Known underground and surface utility lines, buried objects and drainage
systems are indicated on the Drawings.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Topsoil / Unsuitable Material: All topsoil / unsuitable material to be

transported and stockpiled offsite or onsite within the limits of the
designated disposal area. Topsoil shall be stockpiled separately.
2.1.2 Unless determined to be unsuitable by the Owner, soils and earth

materials obtained from required excavations or soils and earth materials
from approved borrow sites may be used for fill.
2.1.3 Pipe culverts, connections, and pipe culvert inlets and outlets: Supply
temporary pipe culverts, connections, and pipe culvert inlets and outlets
as required for approval by the Owner.
334890-TU-210-S0-0033
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Preparation
3.1.1 Inspect the Worksite and confirm with the Owner items designated to
remain and any restrictions within or adjacent to the specified limits of the
site development prior to commencing the Work.
3.1.2 Field locate the existing utility lines, underground services and drainages
in the vicinity of the construction limits prior to commencing the Work.
3.1.3 Install pipe supports and other protective measures prior to

commencement of Work to preserve in operating condition existing
pipelines within the Worksites:
3.1.3.1 NPS 24 crude oil line to Westridge, Chevron NPS 24 and Shell
NPS 24 jet fuel lines within the Burnaby Site
3.1.3.2 NPS 24 crude oil line to dock at the Westridge Site within the
Westridge Site.
3.1.4 Preserve, temporarily bypass or relocate the existing NPS 12 Fire Water
line within the Worksite at the Westridge Terminal as shown on the
Drawings.
3.1.5 Preserve or relocate other existing utilities including the potable water
lines, telecommunication cables within the Worksite(s).
3.2 Stripping and Stockpiling of Topsoil
3.2.1 Remove topsoil before any construction procedures commence to avoid

compaction of topsoil and contamination of subgrade.
3.2.2 Strip topsoil as directed by the Owner. Avoid mixing topsoil with subsoil.
3.2.3 Pile topsoil on site as directed by the Owner. Stockpile height not to
exceed 2.5 meters, unless otherwise directed by the Owner.
3.2.4 Protect stockpiles from contamination, compaction and erosion.
(END OF SECTION)
334890-TU-210-S0-0033
01 57 23 Diversion and Care of Water
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 2
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 2
1.2 Scope of Work ........................................................................................... 4
1.7 Submittals .................................................................................................. 7
1.8 Design Criteria and Requirements ............................................................. 9
2.0 PRODUCTS ....................................................................................................... 11

2.1 General .................................................................................................... 11
2.2 Materials .................................................................................................. 11
3.0 EXECUTION....................................................................................................... 11

3.1 General .................................................................................................... 11
3.2 Water and Treatment Disposal ................................................................ 12
3.3 Erosion and Sediment Control ................................................................. 13
334890-TU-210-S0-0034
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction

PC-001.

1.1.3 This Specification forms part of the Contract Documents and is to be read,
interpreted and coordinated with all other parts, including the following:


Trans Mountain


334890-TU-210-S0-0034
H. 1620 Shotcrete
334890-TU-210-S0-0034
Plan.
1.2 Scope of Work
1.2.1 This section specifies requirements for the following:
1.2.1.1 Design, procurement, installation, operation, and removal on

completion of all temporary facilities required for the control and
treatment of groundwater inflows and construction water
discharges from the tunnel.
1.2.1.2 Treatment of groundwater and construction water prior to its

discharge from the site to ensure its compliance with all
regulatory requirements.
334890-TU-210-S0-0034
1.2.1.3 Control, diversion, treatment (if required), testing and disposal of

surface runoff precipitation and onto and away from within the
Contractor’s Worksite as shown on the Drawings.
1.2.1.4 Control, treatment (if required), testing and disposal of water

removed from the dewatering activities for portal area
development.
1.2.1.5 Control of erosion and sedimentation resulting from construction

activities, groundwater inflows, surface precipitation, and care of
water.
1.2.1.6 Removal of all accumulated silt and temporary measures used

to control runoff and sedimentation upon completion of the
Work.
1.2.1.7 Requirements for diversion and conveyance of the existing

stream that passes the Contractor’s worksite area at the
Westridge Terminal as shown on the Drawings.
1.2.2 Additional dewatering and water control of groundwater inflows and

construction water required to be pumped from all underground
excavations is covered separately in 31 71 20 Tunnelling by TBM.
1.3.2 31 71 20 TBM by Tunnelling
1.3.3 31 23 23 Site Restoration
1.4.1 Construction Water:
1.4.1.1 Water piped or otherwise brought into the tunnel for use with
activities including dust suppression, probe hole drilling, pre-
excavation grouting, and tunnel cleaning. Construction water will
often ultimately be mixed, pumped, treated and discharged with
groundwater inflows.
1.4.2 Groundwater Inflows: Water originating from overburden or bedrock by

processes including the following:
334890-TU-210-S0-0034
1.4.2.1 Flowing, dripping or seeping directly from the groundmass into

the tunnel, excavated surfaces, probe holes, or by other means.
1.4.2.2 Pumping from or draining of overburden or bedrock adjacent to

tunnel or a tunnel portal area using submerged pumps in deep
wells, well points, horizontal drainage, weep holes, blanket
drains, or any combination of these methods.
1.4.2.3 Surface precipitation falling directly into the tunnel portal shall
be considered to form part of the total groundwater inflows.
1.4.3 Surface Run-off Water: Water derived from the following processes
including but not limited to the following:
1.4.3.1 Precipitation falling within the Limits for Contractors Worksite on

surface, as shown in the Drawings.
1.4.3.2 Surface run-off originating from outside the contract Limits of

Construction, which flows into the Limits for Contractors
Worksite through natural processes or diversions.
1.5.1 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with all applicable
laws, the Contractor’s policies and procedures including the Contractor’s
Quality, Health, Safety and Environmental Manual, and Environmental
Requirements in the Construction Contract.
1.5.2 The discharge from construction sites of all groundwater inflows,

construction water and surface run-off shall be in accordance with the
applicable acts, regulations and bylaws including the following authorities
and governing agencies. In the event of conflict, the more stringent
applies:
1.5.2.1 Department of Fisheries and Oceans (DFO) of Canada.
1.5.2.2 Port Metro Vancouver.
1.5.2.3 Metro Vancouver Regional District.
1.5.2.4 City of Burnaby.
1.5.3 Comply with applicable discharge water quality standards and the
following minimum standards:
334890-TU-210-S0-0034
1.5.3.1 Water disposed into Burrard Inlet shall comply at a minimum, to

the British Columbia Approved and Working Water Quality
Guidelines for Marine Aquatic Life (BC AWWQG 2015).
1.5.3.2 Water disposed into Eagle Creek shall comply at a minimum to

British Columbia Approved and Working Water Quality
Guidelines for Fresh Aquatic Life (BC AWWQG 2015).
1.5.4 Obtain all necessary permits for discharging water from the worksites
1.6.1 Records: Keep daily records of the measurements of the quantity and
quality of the treated discharge water.
1.6.2 Shop Drawings shall be prepared, stamped and signed by a Professional

Engineer registered in the Province of British Columbia that is experienced
in the preparation of water handling and treatment facilities.
1.6.3 Provide an independent certified testing laboratory to perform any required

testing.
1.6.4 Demonstrate the adequacy of the treatment facilities to handle, treat, and
discharge the expected flows prior to performing excavation.
1.7 Submittals
1.7.1 General

1.7.2 Submit details 60 days prior to use of water treatment systems to be used
at the Burnaby and Westridge sites. The submittal shall include all
necessary facilities/structures, equipment, materials, operating
procedures, maintenance, cleaning, mobilization, demobilization, and
include the following:
1.7.2.1 Shop Drawings for the handling, treating, measuring and

disposing of groundwater in the tunnel heading, along the
334890-TU-210-S0-0034
excavated tunnel, conveyance from the portal and work areas to

treatment facilities. Include details pertaining to drainage
facilities, holding basins, and a schedule for installation of the
facilities.
1.7.2.2 Set forth the methods and equipment proposed for keeping
groundwater inflows from either damaging works in progress or
impacting the efficiency with which the Work is performed;
treating, measuring and disposing of inflow groundwater, and
removing the facilities when they are no longer needed. Details
shall include:
A. Location, depth, and size of dams, retention basins and

treatment ponds.
B. Location, size, capacity, and details of treatment plants.
C. Sizes, locations including location of discharge points and

types of discharge lines, ditches, sumps, energy dispersion and
flow measuring devices.
D. Types, capacities and numbers of pumps, generators and

standby units.
E. Design and construction of all electrical installations.
F. Detailed method statements for the collection of water inflows

in the tunnel, conveying of water from the tunnel to the
treatment point, treatment of the water, and discharge of the
water from the site.
G. Methods of measuring the quantities of tunnel inflows.
H. Methods of monitoring water quality to check its compliance

with all regulatory requirements prior to its discharge from the
site.
I. Methods to demonstrate ability of the automatic paging

facilities, power transfer facilities, and warning of approaching
non-compliance of treatment facilities effluent to function
effectively.
J. Methods for providing a draft daily groundwater inflow report in

a digital format approved by the Owner.
334890-TU-210-S0-0034
K. Product data sheets and material safety data sheets for all
products and additives used for water quality treatment.
1.7.2.3 The submittal shall include reference to the following

qualifications:
A. Engineer licensed in the Province of British Columbia who will

prepare the Shop Drawings for water handling and treatment
facilities with appropriate certificates.
B. Specialty firm proposed to design, furnish, install, operate, and

maintain water handling and treatment facilities.
C. Proposed testing laboratory that will perform required analytical

testing.
1.7.3 Submit grading details for any runoff control and drainage rerouting for the
Owner’s review.
1.7.4 Provide two copies to the Owner of all necessary approvals from
regulatory authorities and governing agencies for the discharge of
groundwater and construction water from the site.
1.7.5 Submit grading details and pipe culvert details for all runoff control and
drainage rerouting, for the Owner’s review.
1.7.6 Provide copies of all Quality Control tests and monitoring data (electronic
and paper copy) on discharge quantity and quality daily to the Owner
within 48 hours of receiving results.
1.8 Design Criteria and Requirements
1.8.1 Retain the services of a specialty firm to design, furnish, install, maintain,
and operate the required treatment and pumping facilities.
1.8.2 The design shall address the pumping, measurement, monitoring and
treatment of groundwater inflows and construction water to reduce
contaminants to the levels specified by the applicable Act, Regulation or
Bylaw.
334890-TU-210-S0-0034
1.8.3 The design shall consider the use of such features as plate clarifiers,
reverse osmosis, and the requirement for storage capacity for treated
water that does not comply with discharge requirements.
1.8.4 The complete system of dewatering treatment and discharge shall be

capable of treating the water quality described in the Contract
Geotechnical Reports, surface run-off and construction wastewater
streams from all contemplated construction activities at variable flow rates
from minimum flows up to and including the maximum baseline flows
described in the Geotechnical Reports.
1.8.5 The Contract Geotechnical Reports describe the groundwater conditions

that the Contractor should expect for the Work including portal area
development and tunnelling. The volumes and flows discussed in the
Contract Geotechnical Reports do not include construction water
introduced into the tunnel and other excavations as a result of construction
activities. Allow for these flows and be prepared to remove water and/or
prevent water from entering open excavations and the tunnel.
1.8.6 Provide drainage in tunnels, portals, trenches or excavations, from any

water source entering the excavation. Excavation drainage may include
placement of drainage materials, such as crushed stone, together with
sump pumping. Size sumps and pumps for the combined inflow rate of the
expected groundwater inflows as discussed in the Contract Geotechnical
Reports and construction water usage.
1.8.7 Provide standby pumps for immediate replacement of failed pumping

equipment, and backup power for emergency use, capable of providing
sufficient power for continuous running of the dewatering system and
treatment plant during grid outages.
1.8.8 Water shall not be permitted to stand in working areas and shall not be
above the rail along the tunnel.
1.8.9 Treatment:
1.8.9.1 Provide, operate, and maintain temporary drainage facilities of

adequate size and capacity, to collect and dispose of all water
that enters the tunnel and portal areas.
1.8.9.2 Prior to discharge, demonstrate that the method of treatment

has removed or reduced all substances or materials of toxic or
deleterious nature to concentrations or quantities allowable to
the relevant permit, and regulatory limits.
334890-TU-210-S0-0034
1.8.10 Discharge:
1.8.10.1 Design and construct temporary connections to existing

drainage system for post-treatment disposal. Size the
connection to allow for the combined discharge of the
construction water and groundwater inflows.
1.8.10.2 The connections to the existing drainage system shall include

appropriate hydraulic flow energy diffusers and discharge pipe
outlet configurations to limit flow drop heights below the
discharge pipe outlet, to avoid existing drainage flow disruption,
and to protect the existing drainage system including sewer
lining and manhole structures against damage.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 General
2.1.1 The Contractor is responsible for selecting equipment and materials as

necessary to achieve desired results, unless specified otherwise in the
Contract Documents.
2.1.2 Maintain all equipment in good repair and operating order.
2.1.3 Provide temporary pipes, hoses, flumes, or channels for the transport of
discharge water to the discharge location. Provide a means of observing
turbidity in the discharge water.
2.1.4 Provide all necessary treatment and disposal equipment, earthen basins,
or other facilities to comply with requirements of the Contract Documents,
permits and all governing regulations.
2.2 Materials
2.2.1 Silt fence fabric, posts and anchor plates shall be in accordance with
Environmental Requirements.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 General
3.1.1 Provide, operate and maintain all ditches, basins, sumps, culverts, site
grading and pumping facilities to divert, collect, treat and remove water
from the Limits for Contractors Worksite.
334890-TU-210-S0-0034
3.1.2 Provide all facilities required to divert, collect, control and remove water
from all construction work areas and excavations. Water shall generally be
conducted away from the Contractors Worksite or to drainage features
within the Limits for Contractors Worksite. Drainage features shall have
sufficient capacity so that flooding of the Contractors Worksite will be
avoided.
3.1.3 Re-grade all temporary ditches, basins, sumps, culverts, site grading and
pumping facilities to the final grades shown on the Drawings upon
completion of the project and as specified in 31 23 23 Site Restoration.
3.1.4 Flows from the existing stream shall be entirely conveyed around the
Westridge Contractors Worksite within a pipe culvert system throughout
the course of the Work, which is to be designed by the Contractor.
Temporary diversion works shown on the Drawings are conceptual only.
3.2 Water and Treatment Disposal
3.2.1 Prior to discharge to the receiving watercourse runoff water and water
from the excavations shall meet the contract requirements.
3.2.2 All hydrocarbons shall be removed from the discharged water.
3.2.3 Contaminant levels in the discharged water shall be below levels that shall
cause deleterious effects on the fish in the receiving waters.
3.2.4 The majority of the construction water will be treated within the work sites
and discharged into existing channels as identified on the Drawings as
Discharge to Environment. The channels and their downstream flow
path(s) have been designed and assessed by others to accommodate all
anticipated discharge flows based the site drainage requirements.
3.2.5 Discharge of construction water at the Burnaby site into the existing storm
water retaining pond will be allowed.
3.2.6 An existing channel connected to the Burrard Inlet has been identified as
the discharge location for water originating from the Westridge site and
tunnel excavations as shown on the Drawings.
3.2.7 The Westridge discharge channel and all potential downstream flow
channels will be inspected and maintained as required by others. The
Contractor shall not be responsible for maintaining any Works
downstream of the Discharge to Environment location shown on the
drawings.
334890-TU-210-S0-0034
3.3 Erosion and Sediment Control
3.3.1 The Owner will monitor the Contractor’s care of water, erosion and
sediment control measures. Should environmental degradation occur such
as silting, contamination or induced erosion, in the Owner’s opinion; the
Contractor is to take all reasonable steps consistent with the requirements
herein to provide the additional facilities to alleviate the cause of
degradation and to rehabilitate the affected area.
3.3.2 Intercept and divert precipitation and surface water away from excavations
through the use of dikes, ditches, drains, pipes, sumps, or other methods
as required. Provide positive measures to prevent erosion, piping of fines,
or flooding of the excavations and to protect adjoining properties from
surface drainage caused by construction operations.
3.3.3 Divert surface and seepage water into sumps as may be necessary. Pump
to drainage channels and settling basins. Treat and dispose in accordance
with the requirements set forth herein, approved regulatory agency plans
and applicable permits. Sumps are to be lined or otherwise protected
from degradation, shall be periodically inspected, maintained and cleaned
when required to maintain normal pump operations.
3.3.4 The Contractor shall promptly and continuously control water inflows and
dispose of all water from any source that may accumulate in the tunnel or
excavation. This shall include all necessary pumping, bailing, draining,
and sedimentation controls required prior to discharge.
3.3.5 Install and maintain erosion/sedimentation control devices at the point of

discharge.
3.3.6 Use sediment-trapping methods, such as silt fences along the edge and
within the construction areas as to trap sediment and minimize soil
erosion.
3.3.7 Carry out construction in a manner that will minimize exposure of

excavated or graded surfaces.
3.3.8 Control rainfall runoff within the limits for Contractor’s worksite
3.3.9 Stabilize disturbed areas promptly.
3.3.10 Maintain erosion and sediment control measures during the construction
period.
334890-TU-210-S0-0034
3.3.11 Energy dissipation devices or riprap shall be used where required to

prevent erosion from occurring.
3.3.12 Spoils stockpiled from the underground excavation shall not be permitted
to cause blockage of natural drainage.
3.3.13 Excavation, loading and trucking of stockpiled material to the disposal site
shall be carried out in a manner which will avoid erosion.
3.3.14 Access roads and haul roads shall be graded and maintained in good
condition by the Contractor throughout completion of the Work. Controls
including spraying the access and haul roads with are to be used water to
prevent dust generation.
3.3.15 Remove all accumulated silt and temporary sediment-trapping measures

upon completion of the project.
(END OF SECTION)
334890-TU-210-S0-0034
31 71 03 Portal Area Development
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 2
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 2
1.2 Scope of Work ........................................................................................... 4
1.7 Submittals .................................................................................................. 6
2.0 PRODUCTS ....................................................................................................... 10

2.1 Materials .................................................................................................. 10
2.2 Equipment................................................................................................ 10
2.3 Dewatering System .................................................................................. 10
3.0 EXECUTION....................................................................................................... 10

3.1 General .................................................................................................... 10
3.2 Construction Waste Water Control .......................................................... 11
3.3 Disposal of Excavated Materials .............................................................. 11
3.4 Portal Excavation ..................................................................................... 12
3.5 Portal Area Dewatering ............................................................................ 12
334890-TU-210-S0-0036
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction

PC-001.


following:


Trans Mountain


334890-TU-210-S0-0036
H. 1620 Shotcrete
334890-TU-210-S0-0036
Plan.
1.2 Scope of Work
1.2.1 The Work in this Section includes:
1.2.1.1 Requirements for excavation and trenching for surface Works

throughout the project site. Work includes but is not limited to
excavation and shoring for tunnel portal development, pipe
culverts and access roads.
334890-TU-210-S0-0036
1.2.1.2 Performance of dewatering required for lowering and controlling

ground water table levels and hydrostatic pressures to permit
portal excavation, tunnel and pipeline construction activities,
backfilling operations, and to ensure the stability of the shoring
structures for the duration of the Project. The Work to be
completed by the Contractor includes, but is not limited to the
following:
A. Design, install, operate, monitor, maintain and decommission a

temporary dewatering system.
B. Removal of water accumulating in temporary excavations

during the Work. Allowing all works to be completed in the dry
and to provide fully drained loading conditions on the shoring
structures.
1.2.2 Requirements for Protection and Support of the Existing Utilities situated
near the portal excavations and which will be required to remain in
operation during construction of the Project are specified in 31 10 00 Site
Preparation.
1.2.3 Control of surface water and water disposal are specified in 01 57 23

Diversion and Care of Water.
1.3.2 31 09 13 Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring
1.3.3 31 10 00 Site Preparation
1.3.5 31 51 00 Ground Anchors
1.3.6 31 57 00 Secant Pile Wall
1.3.7 31 71 20 Tunnelling by TBM
1.3.8 31 74 19 Shotcrete
1.4.1 Excavation Support Systems: Elements for support of portal excavations.
334890-TU-210-S0-0036
1.4.2 Contract Geotechnical Reports: These include the Geotechnical Baseline

Report (GBR) and the Site Investigation Data Reports (SIDRs).
1.5.1 All work shall be performed in accordance with all applicable federal,
provincial, and local regulations, codes, and standards.
1.6.1 Contractor’s Qualifications:
1.6.1.1 The Contractor shall employ a specialized dewatering sub-

contractor to provide dewatering services. The Contractor is to
have experience in the type of dewatering to be performed and
to have personnel who are familiar with the dewatering
equipment to be used.
1.6.2 Personnel Qualifications:
1.6.2.1 During portal and shaft excavations, or the installation of

excavation support, provide on-site at all times a supervisor with
previous experience installing similar excavation support
systems on at least two projects.
1.6.2.2 Provide dedicated personnel with experience on similar projects

to install, set-up, operate and monitor the temporary dewatering
system.
1.6.2.3 The dewatering system design shall be prepared, signed, and

sealed by a qualified engineer or geoscientist licensed in the
Province of British Columbia.
1.7 Submittals
1.7.1 General

334890-TU-210-S0-0036
1.7.2 At least 60 days prior to commencing portal excavation activities, submit

the following:
1.7.2.1 A detailed Excavation Staging Plan and schedule clearly

illustrating the method and sequence by which the Contractor
proposes to stage the excavation, and shoring Works in
accordance with the Drawings and this Specification.
1.7.2.2 A detailed Water Control Plan and schedule clearly illustrating

the method and sequence by which the Contractor proposes to
handle dewatering the excavation, groundwater
depressurization and maintaining the water levels such that the
Work can be done in the dry for the duration of the project in
accordance with the Drawings and Specification.
1.7.2.3 Shop Drawings for site development including:
A. Protection, support, and relocation of existing utilities
B. Site grading
C. Site drainage and erosion control provisions
D. Site development details
E. Cut and fill slopes details
F. Layout for fencing and gates
G. Locations of trailers, shops, manufacturing and batching plants
H. Locations of first aid equipment and muster points
I. Locations of lay down areas and temporary muck stockpile

areas
J. Plans for settling and containment basins
K. Discharge provisions for water
L. Parking areas, access routes, and traffic control
M. Locations of lighting, and utilities
1.7.2.4 Detailed work plans for each tunnel portal including:
334890-TU-210-S0-0036
A. Excavation methods, excavation stability monitoring plans, and

data on all equipment to be used.
B. Excavation plan including proposed sequence of excavation, lift

heights and support.
C. Sequence and timing of typical advance length.
D. Details of excavating overburden and bedrock material.
E. Methods for controlling line and grade.
1.7.2.5 Detailed work plans for dewatering of each tunnel portal

including:
A. The proposed type of dewatering system.
B. Arrangement, location, depths and diameters of the dewatering

system components.
C. Types and sizes of filters.
D. Proposed methods for drilling wells and installing the

dewatering systems, including provisions for handling water
and disposal of drill cuttings.
E. Capacities and product specifications for components of the

dewatering system including pumps and standby units, well
pipes, slotted pipes, monitoring equipment, installed materials
including bentonite and sand, and drilling equipment.
F. Design calculations proving the adequacy of the proposed

system and selected equipment. The dewatering system shall
be designed using accepted and professional methods of
design and engineering consistent with the current best
practices. The dewatering system shall include the deep wells,
provisions for diverting shallow aquifers into ditches, well
points, and other equipment, appurtenances, and related
earthwork necessary to the performance of the dewatering
system.
G. Detailed description of dewatering procedures, sequencing with

excavations, monitoring and maintenance methods.
334890-TU-210-S0-0036
H. Plan outlining control procedures to be adopted if dewatering

system performance problems arise.
1.7.2.6 Survey Control details including:
A. Survey personnel qualifications.
B. Type and location of horizontal and vertical control monuments

to be set.
C. Survey procedures and equipment.
D. Design and location of theodolite instrument platform mounting

bracket, bracing support hardware, method of attachment,
including brass mounting screws and standing platform
underneath instrument mounting bracket.
E. Survey data collection equipment and software, including

traverse reduction and adjustment software.
F. Survey equipment certification of adjustment and calibration

including results for electronic distance measuring instruments
(EDMI's) and prisms.
G. Survey portal areas at maximum intervals of 10 meters.
1.7.2.7 Field Personnel Qualifications:
A. Qualifications of the excavation and support system installation

supervisor.
B. Qualifications of dewatering system installation supervisor
1.7.2.8 Spill Mitigation Plans, including:
A. Procedures for testing, treatment, handling and disposal of

contaminated surface water runoff.
B. Details for site drainage, sump construction, and temporary

working slab construction.
C. Description of equipment and procedures required for clean-up

of accidental fluid spills.
D. Plans for the safe handling and storage of fuel, lubricants, and
other materials likely to cause site soil contamination.
334890-TU-210-S0-0036
E. Details for handling and the temporary stockpiling of

contaminated materials and tunnel muck shall be included.
Indicate the safe height limitation in temporary stockpiles.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Erosion-Control Matting: Erosion-control matting shall be a 3-dimensional

geo-matrix of bonded nylon or polyvinyl monofilament, designed to curb
erosion while encouraging vegetation growth.
2.2 Equipment
2.2.1 Equipment shall be suitable for the expected conditions described in the
Contract Geotechnical Reports and other minimum technical requirements
specified elsewhere.
2.2.2 Equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Owner. All equipment
shall be maintained in proper working order.
2.3 Dewatering System
2.3.1 Dewatering and monitoring wells are to be designed, constructed in

accordance with the BC Water Act, and are to include identification plates,
and a means for preventing the entry of foreign matter.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 General
3.1.1 All portal construction work, including shoring, dewatering systems,

excavation, temporary facilities, erosion control measures, materials
storage, and all other construction activities shall be conducted within the
construction worksite limits indicated on the Drawings.
3.1.2 Lights, fences, gates and signs as necessary shall be installed around the
portal sites to ensure the safety and health of the workforce. Protective
measures shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of
WorkSafeBC, Federal, Provincial, and Municipal regulations.
334890-TU-210-S0-0036
3.1.3 Dust and noise control shall be provided in accordance with permit
requirements.
3.1.4 Install and maintain excavation support systems to retain portal

excavations, minimize loss of ground, and control ground movements and
deformations of supports. Damaged support system elements shall be
repaired to the Owner’s approval or replaced.
3.1.5 Excavation support systems shall be monitored in accordance with the

Drawings and 31 09 13 Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring.
3.1.6 Site Preparation including stripping and stockpiling of topsoil shall conform
to the requirements of 31 10 00 Site Preparation.
3.1.7 Existing utilities shall be relocated or protected in accordance with TMEP

Pipeline Protection Procedures.
3.2 Construction Waste Water Control
3.2.1 Divert surface water around portal areas prior to beginning excavation.
3.2.2 Temporary drainage facilities and containment basins of adequate size to

manage construction waste water which enters portal excavations shall be
installed and maintained in accordance with 01 57 23 Diversion and Care
of Water.
3.2.3 Water shall not be permitted to stand in working areas or to escape the
Limits for Contractors Worksite. Water removed from excavations shall be
tested, treated, managed, and disposed of in accordance with 01 57 23
Diversion and Care of Water.
3.2.4 All unshored cut slopes shall be covered with secured polyethylene
sheeting or other measures to prevent erosion.
3.3 Disposal of Excavated Materials
3.3.1 Excavated materials and muck from the tunnel shall be stockpiled in
designated areas as approved by the Owner and shown on the submittals
required in 31 71 20 Tunnelling by TBM. Temporary stockpiling shall not
exceed the safe height limitation in accordance with the Shop Drawings.
Cover temporary stockpiles or provide other protection as necessary to
prevent erosion and control dust from stockpiled materials.
334890-TU-210-S0-0036
3.3.2 Take all precautions necessary to prevent a dust nuisance to adjacent

properties. Provide drainage, erosion and sediment control and prevent
transportation of soil to adjacent properties. Any damage caused by dust,
erosion, or haulage of soil or excavated materials and muck shall be
corrected or repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to Owner.
3.3.3 Removal of material from the temporary stockpile site, and final disposal
of the excavated material in designated disposal sites shall be performed
in accordance with the muck disposal plans required in 31 71 20
Tunnelling by TBM.
3.4 Portal Excavation
3.4.1 Complete any clearing and excavation above the wall area.
3.4.2 Portal construction slopes shall be excavated and stabilized employing

methods shown on the Drawings.
3.4.3 Temporary cut slopes in native soil, weak or weathered rock shall not be
constructed at an angle steeper than two horizontal to one vertical, unless
stabilized with shoring, rock reinforcement, surface treatment, or
combinations thereof, as approved by the Owner. Surface treatment
methods shall include shotcrete, wire mesh anchored to slope faces, or
combinations thereof as required to prevent slope ravelling, erosion, or
deterioration.
3.4.4 Protection of exposed cut slopes shall be provided as necessary for

erosion prevention.
3.4.5 Excavation and support of ground shall be in accordance with the

Drawings and related specifications.
3.4.6 Immediately following construction of the portal walls, surface control

points shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and monitored in
accordance with 31 09 13 Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring.
3.5 Portal Area Dewatering
3.5.1 Installation
3.5.1.1 Install a dewatering system to lower and control ground surface

water in order to permit excavation, and the construction of
retaining structures, to be performed under dry conditions.
3.5.1.2 The dewatering system shall be adequate to pre-drain the
334890-TU-210-S0-0036
water-bearing strata above and below the bottom of excavations

to provide fully drained loading conditions on the shoring
structures;
3.5.1.3 The dewatering system shall be capable of maintaining water

levels within work area at least 1 meter below the base
temporary grade for the project duration. Prior to any excavation
below the ground water table, place the dewatering system into
operation to lower water table in advance as required by the
excavation support system.
3.5.1.4 Dewatering wells are to be located no closer than1.5 meters

from the theoretical outer diameter of the excavating TBM.
3.5.2 Operation
3.5.2.1 Operate the dewatering system continuously 24 hours a day, 7

days a week until pipeline utilities and structures have been
satisfactorily constructed (including the placement of backfill
materials) and dewatering is no longer required.
3.5.2.2 Provide a continuous 24 hours a day, 7 days a week monitoring

of the system functionality by use on water level and or pressure
measurement. Remote electronic monitoring with an emergency
notification system may be used.
3.5.2.3 Water is to be discharged into adjacent ditch structures in a

manner such as to control erosion and potential damage to
nearby ground support.
3.5.2.4 Prevent loss of fines, surface seepages, boils, quick conditions

or softening of foundation strata.
3.5.2.5 Maintain the stability of the excavation sides and base.
3.5.2.6 Construction operations are to be performed in the dry. Control

of surface and subsurface water is required. Maintain adequate
control of water inflows such that:
A. Erosion is controlled.
B. Flooding of excavations or damage to structures does not

occur.
C. Surface water drains away from excavations.
334890-TU-210-S0-0036
D. Excavations are protected from becoming wet from surface

water, or ensure excavations are dry before additional work is
undertaken.
E. Water does not bypass control structures.
3.5.3 Standby Equipment
3.5.3.1 Provide complete standby equipment, installed and available for

immediate operation, as may be required to adequately
maintain the required levels of dewatering on a continuous
basis, in the event that all or any part of the system including
power supply may become inadequate or fail.
3.5.4 Corrective Actions
3.5.4.1 If dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy

or failure of the dewatering system and instabilities form in the
slopes, or damage to retaining structures occurs; perform work
necessary for reinstatement of the slopes and damaged
structures or damages to work in place resulting from such
inadequacy or failure by Contractor, at no additional cost to the
Owner.
3.5.5 Decommissioning
3.5.5.1 Discontinue and backfill the dewatering system in accordance

with the B.C. Water Act, and Section 01 57 23 Diversion and
Care of Water.
3.5.6 Restoration
3.5.6.1 Well boxes and surface infrastructure are to be removed and

the original ground surface restored in accordance with Section
31 23 23 Site Restoration.
3.5.6.2 All excavations required to complete the Work or made for the
Contractor's convenience shall be backfilled with the materials
and to the grades shown on the Drawings and in accordance
with Section 31 23 23 Site Restoration.
(END OF SECTION)
334890-TU-210-S0-0036
31 71 20 Tunnelling by TBM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 3
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 3
1.2 Scope of Work ........................................................................................... 6
1.4 Definitions, Glossary and Abbreviations .................................................... 7
1.5 Regulations, Codes, Specifications, and Standards .................................. 9
1.7 Safety....................................................................................................... 12
1.8 Submittals ................................................................................................ 13
1.9 Surveys .................................................................................................... 25
1.10 Tolerances ............................................................................................... 27
2.0 PRODUCTS ....................................................................................................... 28

2.1 General .................................................................................................... 28
2.2 Tunnel Boring Machine (TBM) ................................................................. 28
2.3 Tunnel Support ........................................................................................ 51
3.0 EXECUTION....................................................................................................... 52

3.1 General Requirements ............................................................................. 52
3.2 Ventilation ................................................................................................ 53
3.3 Additional Safety Requirements ............................................................... 54
3.4 Tunnel Boring Machine and Tunnelling ................................................... 54
3.5 Existing Conditions .................................................................................. 64
3.6 Execution of the Work .............................................................................. 64
3.7 Underground Access ............................................................................... 64
3.8 Communication Systems ......................................................................... 64
3.9 Water Control ........................................................................................... 65
3.10 Restoration .............................................................................................. 65
APPENDIX A – DATA SHEET ..................................................................................... 67
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction

Understanding for Early Contractor Involvement Provision of Tunnel
Boring Machine and Tunnel Construction, Contract Number TMEP-PC-
001.
1.1.2 The ECI Pre-Construction Services (Phase 1) indicated that the Tunnel
Boring Machine (TBM) shall be pressurized face type with capability to
work in open mode with primary belt muck removal.The Contractor
selected an Earth Pressure Balanced TBM (EPM) with a continuous
precast concrete tunnel lining (PCTL) for construction of the Burnaby
Mountain Tunnel.

1.1.4 This Specification forms part of the Contract Documents and is to be read,
interpreted and coordinated with all other parts, including the following:


Trans Mountain


334890-TU-210-S0-0042
H. 1620 Shotcrete
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
1.1.5 The TBM tunnel diameter shall be determined by the Contractor based on
the construction requirements for installing three NPS 30 pipelines. The
minimum allowable excavated diameter is 4.0 meters and the maximum
allowable excavated diameter is 5.5 meters.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
1.1.6 The Contractor shall select and utilize tunnelling methods and equipment
compatible with the tunnel depth and grade as shown on the Drawings,
the selected dimensions of the tunnel, and compatible with the anticipated
geologic conditions described in the Contract Geotechnical Reports. The
Contractor shall coordinate tunnelling work with all other work for the
project. Minimum requirements for the TBM are specified herein. The
Contractor shall ensure that the TBM is designed and equipped as
necessary to undertake the Work safely within the specified schedule.
1.2 Scope of Work
1.2.1 The Work specified in this Specification consists of:
1.2.1.1 Minimum requirements for the Tunnel Boring Machine (TBM),

ancillary systems and trailing gear, as specified herein, are to be
supplied by the Contractor for excavation of the Burnaby
Mountain Tunnel. The Contractor is responsible for the
performance of the TBM and is free to upgrade to a higher
standard than these minimum requirements.
1.2.1.2 Manufacturing and preliminary reviews, TBM acceptance testing

at the TBM Manufacturer’s facilities.
1.2.1.3 Mobilisation and demobilisation of the TBM and the trailing gear.
1.2.1.4 Site assembly and commissioning of the TBM including TBM

Manufacturer assistance during the initial 300 meters of
tunnelling and when transitioning from soil to rock for additional
300 meters of TBM excavation.
1.2.1.5 Supply of critical spares and other spare components.
1.2.1.6 TBM operation and maintenance.
1.2.1.7 General requirements for tunnel excavation including but not

limited to primary tunnel support and ground stabilization
compatible with the tunnel depth and grade as shown on
drawings and the selected dimensions of the tunnel, and
compatible with the anticipated geologic conditions described in
the Contract Geotechnical Reports, tunnel safety, measurement
and control of groundwater, disposal of muck, ventilation, survey
and carrier pipe installation and commissioning.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
1.3.2 02 32 13 Probe Hole Drilling ahead of TBM
1.3.5 31 73 13 Tunnel Annulus Grouting
1.3.7 31 73 15 Pre-Excavation Grouting
1.3.8 31 74 16 Precast Concrete Tunnel Lining (PCTL)
1.4 Definitions, Glossary and Abbreviations
1.4.1 CCTV: Closed-Circuit Television.
1.4.2 CEC: Canadian Electric Code.
1.4.3 Closed Mode: Operation of the EPBM with active face support pressures
being utilized at all times to control excavation at the tunnel face.
1.4.4 Commissioning: On-load and operational set-up and testing of the TBM
and all associated systems including the driving of the tunnel, during the
first 300 meters of drive, or until issuance of the final acceptance
certificate, whichever is the sooner.
1.4.5 Conditioners: Conditioners are foam and/or polymers used to modify soil
behaviour for tunnel face stability, reduce abrasion, reduce cutterhead
torque, control water, and ensure control of the spoil passing through the
screw conveyor.
1.4.6 Cutting Tools: The Cutting Tools on the TBM cutterhead may include the
following:
1.4.6.1 Scrapers: Cutterhead tools used for directing excavated

material into the Cutterhead openings.
1.4.6.2 Rippers: Cutterhead tools used to excavate the ground in front

of the Cutterhead. Rippers are to be of tensile steel,
impregnated with beak style tungsten carbide inserts and
protected with abrasion resistant plating on the leading faces.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
1.4.6.3 Disc Cutters: Cutterhead tools that are able to cut rock or rock
boulders and reduce these to rock fragment sizes that can pass
through the Muck removal system.
1.4.7 EPB: Earth Pressure Balance.
1.4.8 EPB Mode: The operation of a TBM with a filled, pressurized plenum
chamber and Tunnel Spoil removal by means of a Screw Conveyor.
1.4.9 EPBM: Earth Pressure Balance Machine, including trailing gear and
support equipment required for performing Tunnel Excavation in EPB
mode. An EPBM is a fully shielded tunnel boring machine, which utilizes a
full-diameter rotating cutter head equipped with the Cutting Tools, and
which advances using hydraulic rams that thrust against the tunnel initial
support erected as a ring within the trailing shield. The machine operates
with an active face support system equipped with a screw conveyor,
ground conditioning system, and other equipment. The tunnel face
support is provided by a highly viscous soil paste formed by the excavated
material mixed with Conditioners.
1.4.10 L10 Fatigue Life: L10 life, used interchangeably with B10 life, is a term
used to describe expected bearing life. It is used to indicate the lifespan
by which 10 percent of identical sets of bearings, operating under
controlled conditions, can be expected to fail.
1.4.11 MoU: Memorandum of Understanding for Early Contractor Involvement

Provision of Tunnel Boring Machine and Tunnel Construction, Contract
Number TMEP-PC-001.
1.4.12 Muck: The soil or rock materials generated in excavating portals, and
tunnels. Included with these materials are by-products of the excavation
operation such as waste cement and inert non-hazardous materials.
1.4.13 NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association.
1.4.14 Open Mode: Operation of the TBM, without pressurizing the excavated
ground in the Excavation Chamber. In this mode, the Excavation
Chamber is only partially filled. The Open Mode of operation is permitted
on this project in some areas.
1.4.15 Over-excavation: Excavation of overburden or bedrock beyond the

theoretical excavation line.
1.4.16 PLC: Programmable Logic Controller.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
1.4.17 Probe Hole: An exploratory hole drilled in advance of tunnel excavation to

explore rock and groundwater conditions.
1.4.18 Theoretical Excavation Line: Theoretical line of excavation inside of which

no overburden or bedrock shall protrude.
1.4.19 TBM: Tunnel Boring Machine.
1.4.20 Tunnel Construction Water: All water, whatever the source, removed from
the tunnel excavations.
1.4.21 Tunnel Excavation: Excavation of the tunnel to the line and grade as
indicated on Contract Documents within specified tolerances, using a
tunnel boring machine (TBM).
1.4.22 Tunnel Line and Grade: The designed alignment and the grade of the
TBM tunnel.
1.4.23 Tunnel Support: Tunnel Support includes pre-cast segments as shown on

the Drawings.
1.4.24 VFD: Variable Frequency Drive.
1.5 Regulations, Codes, Specifications, and Standards
1.5.2 All underground Work activities shall be carried out in accordance with the
regulations of the Workers Compensation Board of British Columbia
(WorkSafeBC).
1.6.1 All work shall be performed in accordance with current applicable

government and local authority regulations and codes. In the event of a
conflict, comply with the most stringent requirements.
1.6.2.1 The Work shall be performed under the direct supervision of a

qualified tunnelling superintendent and shift supervisor having
the required provincial underground supervisor certificate.
1.6.2.2 The Contractor shall provide and use supervisory personnel,
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
TBM operators, mechanics, electricians and erector operators

with a minimum experience in constructing tunnels of similar
size and in similar ground conditions, during the last ten years,
with specific qualification required listed below:
A. Tunnelling Superintendent: shall have at least 10 years of

tunnelling experience with at least 5 years in responsible
charge of overall underground excavation operations for
projects using an EPBM (or Slurry TBM if selected) in soil and
a Shielded TBM in rock.
B. Shift Supervisors: shall have at least seven years of tunnelling

experience with at least three years in responsible charge of an
underground excavation shift using an EPBM (or Slurry TBM if
selected) in soil and a Shielded TBM in rock.
C. Manager/Foreman: at least ten years of experience as a

Manager/Foreman responsible for TBM assembly and
operation.
D. Mechanic/Hydraulic Technician/Hydraulics Specialist: at least

five years of experience working on hydraulic systems for
TBMs.
E. Electrician/Mechanic Specialist: at least five years of

experience working on electrical or mechanical systems for
TBMs.
F. Electrical Technician/Electrical/Electronic Specialist: at least

five years of experience working on electrical systems for
TBMs.
G. PLC Technician: at least five years of experience working on

programmable logic control systems for TBMs.
H. TBM Operator/TBM Operator Specialist: at least five years of

experience operating an EPBM (or Slurry TBM if selected) and
at least five years of experience operating an open face
Shielded TBM in rock.
I. Conditioning System Specialist: at least five years of

experience in the operation of conditioning systems for EPBMs.
This specialist can be the TBM Operator.
J. Tunnel Surveyor: at least ten years of experience in surveying
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
and minimum of five years of tunnel surveying experience.
1.6.3 TBM Manufacturer and TBM Rebuilder Qualifications
1.6.3.1 If the Contractor supplied TBM is new, the obligations set herein
are that for the TBM Manufacturer. If the TBM has been re-built/
refurbished, the same obligations apply to the TBM Rebuilder.
For conciseness, the TBM Manufacture term is used to
represent both possibilities.
1.6.3.2 TBM Manufacturer shall be an established TBM manufacturer

with at least twenty years of experience manufacturing TBMs.
1.6.3.3 The TBM Manufacturer’s organization and manufacturing facility

shall be certified ISO 9001:2000 Registered.
1.6.3.4 The TBM Manufacturer shall appoint, by name, the Project

Engineer and Principal Design Engineer (two persons) who will
be assigned to this project. Both persons shall have a minimum
of 10 years’ experience with EPB (or Slurry if selected), shielded
rock and multi-mode TBMs, for tunnel diameters of minimum 4.0
meters.
1.6.4 TBM Design, Assembly and Inspection: Allow for two review meetings,
one at the design completion and a second one at the beginning of major
components assembly. Provide by-weekly design and manufacturing
updates to include technical solutions adopted, drawings and pictures.
Completely assemble and inspect the TBM prior to mobilization of the
TBM to site. Perform factory acceptance testing of the TBM and allow
access for the Owner and their representatives. Provide 45 days’ notice in
advance of assembly for visit and inspection.
1.6.5 Field Service: The TBM Manufacturer shall retain an experienced Field
Service Technician who is an employee of the TBM Manufacturer at the
site for the first 300 meters of TBM excavation at launching and at the
transition from soft ground to rock mining.
1.6.6 Training:
1.6.6.1 The Contractor shall provide evidence that key equipment

personnel operating and maintaining the TBM, including the
guidance system, have received appropriate training.
1.6.6.2 The Contractor shall conduct a five day training course run by
the TBM Manufacturer and guidance system manufacturer. All
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
TBM operators, mechanics and electricians shall participate in

this training and receive certification from the TBM
Manufacturer. Allow for up to three attendees from the Owner’s
team.
1.7 Safety
1.7.1 Methods of construction shall be such as to ensure the safety of the Work,
project participants, the public, third parties, and adjacent property,
whether public or private. All work shall conform to the requirements of all
federal, provincial, and municipal codes, laws, regulations and ordinances.
The Contractor is solely responsible for maintaining safe working
conditions at the jobsite at all times.
1.7.2 No statement in these Specifications shall be considered to relieve the

Contractor from sole responsibility for the safety of the excavation. The
Contractor shall bear sole liability for injuries, death of persons or damage
to property.
1.7.3 Works shall be conducted 24 hours a day continuously whenever there is

a condition which endangers the excavation, or surrounding structures
until the hazardous condition is eliminated and the safety of the Work is
restored.
1.7.4 Tunnel Support, including but not limited to temporary tunnel utilities, shall
be made of such materials and maintained in such a manner so as not to
impair production or expose workers to safety hazards due to deterioration
of the components or support equipment resulting from exposure to the
contaminants listed in the Contract Documents. Equipment and utilities
within the tunnel shall also be so designed, fabricated, maintained and
operated in such a manner to avoid accidents due to explosion or fire
resultant from the equipment operation in an explosive atmosphere.
1.7.5 Based on geotechnical investigations concluded to date, the entire length

of the tunnel is classified as a “non-gassy underground working”. The
Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of Work Safe BC
Regulations Part 22. Critical TBM components shall be certified CEC
Class 1 Zone 2. TBM auxiliary equipment including tunnel ventilation
fans, dewatering pumps, hazardous gas and oxygen monitoring
equipment and other equipment required by the Contractor shall be
capable to operate independent of TBM power and shall be certified for
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
CEC Class 1 Zone 2. The gas monitoring system shall automatically shut
down TBM power supply at detection of explosive gas concentrations.
1.8 Submittals
1.8.1 General:
1.8.1.1 All submittals shall be provided to Owner for review in

provided in the General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
1.8.2 Contractor Qualifications:
1.8.2.1 The Contractor shall keep proper records showing the names,
trades and addresses of all workers employed by or through the
Contractor, the wages paid, and the time worked by each such
worker. The Contractor shall employ only competent and skilled
workers, in sufficient numbers to complete the Work in
accordance with the Construction Schedule. Failure of the
Contractor to provide adequate numbers of workers with proper
qualifications shall constitute a material default by the
Contractor of its obligations under the Contract, for which Owner
may terminate the Contract for cause.
1.8.3.1 Provide written documentation of the personnel’s experience

with EPB (or Slurry if selected) used in soil and shielded TBM
tunnelling in rock. Include relevant experience of tunnel work at
similar diameters, at similar depths, with similar equipment and
in similar ground conditions. The summary shall include Owner
references names, addresses and telephone numbers.
1.8.3.2 For personnel substitutions: any substitutions of the pre-

approved personnel are subject to review and approval by the
Owner.
1.8.4 Initial TBM Submittal: Within four weeks of executing the MoU, the
Contractor shall submit for each TBM proposal:
1.8.4.1 Preliminary general arrangement drawings, with dimensions

shown.
1.8.4.2 Detailed general arrangement drawings of the tail seal, including

interface details with the Tunnel Support.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
1.8.4.3 Performance specifications of the TBM, back up plant and

equipment, with main dimensions shown (monthly submittals
update thereafter).
1.8.4.4 Loads assumed, together with actual loads used, for design
purposes for the main components.
1.8.4.5 TBM Manufacturer Quality Control Plan.
1.8.4.6 TBM Manufacturer Quality Assurance Plan.
1.8.4.7 Completed Technical Design Data Worksheet (Refer to

Appendix A of this specification).
1.8.4.8 Manufacturing Schedule with key milestone dates. The

Contractor shall update progress on a weekly basis and
comment on future necessary action to maintain delivery date.
1.8.4.9 TBM Manufacturer Qualifications.
1.8.4.10 TBM Manufacturer ISO 9001:2000 Registration information
1.8.4.11 TBM Manufacturer Project Engineer and Principal Design

Engineer (two persons) who will be assigned to this project.
1.8.5 Detailed TBM Tunnelling Submittal: The Contractor shall at least three
months before commencement of tunnelling operation for review by the
Owner the following:
1.8.5.1 Shop drawings:
A. Working drawings for tunnel access provisions at the launch

and extraction locations. The Site access plan shall include:
i. Location of Tunnel Support storage areas
ii. Site offices
iii. Site parking
iv. Batch plants
v. Generators or power sources
vi. Ventilation fans
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
vii. Storage facilities and hazardous waste storage areas
viii. Wheel wash areas
ix. Site surface drainage and water settlement facilities.
B. Working drawings for Tunnel Spoil handling including:
i. Location of tunnel spoil stockpiles at the Work Sites
ii. Haul routes from the Work Sites to offsite disposal sites
iii. Locations of offsite disposal sites
iv. Temporary Works shop drawings.
C. TBM cutter drawings which shall include:
i. Configuration (including types and locations) proposed for

launch
ii. Gauge cutter settings for launch and general excavation
iii. Expected excavation diameter
iv. Any cutterhead armoring modifications.
1.8.5.2 Method Statements: All method statements and work

descriptions shall comply with WorkSafeBC requirements.
Method statements are to address particular processes to follow
due to freezing or cold working conditions.
A. Generalized normal tunnel construction cycle and associated

logistics, including:
i. Shift organization and control
ii. Logistic supply
iii. Routine shutdown and start-up of the operation
iv. Material handling logistics
v. Tunnel Construction Water drainage.
B. TBM operation covering all intended machine parameters and
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
interlocks to be used along tunnel route taking account of the

ground conditions expected to be encountered including:
i. Face pressure calculations and proposed method of

monitoring the face pressure required to maintain face
stability and prevent surface heave, and the means and
methods for changing the pressure as a function of tunnel
depth, ground water level, surface settlement, ground
conditions and type of ground.
ii. EPB target pressure ranges for each EPB cell.
iii. Procedure for TBM operation with minimum EPB cells

working and repair of malfunctioning EPB cells.
iv. Cutterhead rotation speed and torque.
v. Screw conveyor operation and volumetric control of screw

conveyor discharge to maintain target EPB pressures.
vi. TBM thrust.
vii. Steering and alignment recovery procedure.
viii. Rates of advance for soil and rock sections.
ix. Ground conditioning equipment, materials and specific

mix designs, including when specific conditioner mixes will
be used and how they are selected, planned quantities
and injection rates to be used and for which ground
conditions and environmental acceptance testing regime.
x. Routine shutdowns and start-up of the tunnelling

operations.
xi. Construction water supply system for the TBM activities.
xii. Temporary drainage, power lighting and ventilation

systems.
xiii. Temporary communication systems.
xiv. Layout and description of proposed gas monitoring

systems for TBM and the tunnel.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
xv. Response to activation of gas detectors alarms.
xvi. Emergency evacuation drill for individuals and entire

underground crew.
xvii. TBM Planned maintenance schedule.
xviii. TBM interventions plan for tunnelling mode changing
xix. TBM interventions plan for tool changing
C. TBM Launching Plan, including:
i. Launching TBM in immediate Earth Pressure Balance

(EPB) mode including EPB re-start after plenum
interventions.
ii. Portal wall details covering proposed measures to prevent

loss of ground at launch of TBM including temporary face
and crown support, along with sealing arrangement to
prevent annular grout and ground loss at the portal wall.
iii. Details of TBM launching sequence thrust frame or other

launching configuration and invert slab or skid plate
details.
D. Documentation for the operation of TBM guidance system,

including:
i. Configuration of the proposed laser guidance system,

including supporting laser theodolite in tunnel,
coordinating its advance with that of TBM,
communications between theodolite, guidance system
and surface; and location of targets.
ii. Operation of the laser guidance system including format,

translation, and input of design alignment data into
guidance system.
iii. Design alignment data.
E. Details of Tunnel Spoil conveying and removal system and

disposal including:
i. Screw Conveyor general arrangement and maintenance
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
procedure.
ii. Belt Conveyor general arrangement and maintenance

procedure.
iii. Haulage systems and methods for conveying and

removing tunnel spoil on the tunnel grade shown on the
Drawings, including maintenance requirements.
iv. Excavated materials handling systems within the portal

area, location(s) of temporary stockpile site(s), means and
methods of conveyance, handling, loading, transporting
and disposal of excavated materials at the surface,
including environmental controls.
v. Excavated Materials Management Plan with detailed

procedures for sampling excavated materials for the
presence of contamination and tracking of the handling,
transport and disposal of excavated materials in such a
manner that excavated materials containing contamination
may be identified and disposed of in accordance with all
applicable federal, state and municipal laws and
regulations.
vi. Any proposed methods to remove water and conditioners

from the tunnel spoils
vii. List of trucking firms to be utilized
viii. Description of trucks to be utilized
ix. An estimated number of trips per day
x. Proposed hours of hauling.
1.8.5.3 Work Plan for TBM Removal and Demobilisation including:
A. Procedures for disassemble and demobilization of the TBM

from the site.
1.8.5.4 Work Plan covering access to excavated face and cutterhead

maintenance including:
A. Cutterhead entry procedure including measures to replace

cutters under pressure.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
B. Procedure for inspections and replacement of cutting tools.
C. Handling of cutting tools from within the TBM.
1.8.5.5 Tail seal maintenance and changing procedure.
1.8.5.6 Probe hole drilling plan: Refer to 02 32 13 Probe Hole Drilling

ahead of TBM.
1.8.5.7 Tunnel Support installation plan including:
A. Method of removing a damaged Tunnel Support from the

erected position.
B. Interface between the thrust rams and the segments.
1.8.5.8 Tunnel Surveying Plan, including:
A. Proposed tunnel survey equipment.
B. Details of survey equipment, including methods and

procedures proposed for alignment and grade control within the
specified tolerances. The initial submittal shall detail the
Contractor’s complete procedures for the operation of the
guidance system, frequency of setups on tangents and curves,
bringing the line and grade into the tunnel, and independent
verification measures to check the accuracy of the surveys.
C. Verification of control line monuments and coordinates

established by the Owner as being correct and suitable for
setting out the Work.
D. Back-up survey of motorized laser theodolite coordinates and

tunnel bench marks including frequency and methodology to
achieve specified accuracy.
1.8.5.9 Water Control Plan:
A. Submit temporary drainage provisions and details for control

and disposal of construction water, surface water, and ground
water in accordance with 01 57 23 Diversion and Care of
Water. Baseline estimates of ground water inflows are
contained in the Contract Geotechnical Reports.
B. Submit details of water treatment provisions to remove
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
sediments, oil, grease, and other contaminants prior to disposal

in accordance with 01 57 23 Diversion and Care of Water
C. Provide details to prevent flooding and accumulations of water

in the tunnel.
1.8.5.10 Contingency Plans, including:
A. Machine entrapment.
B. Jammed cutting head.
C. Sudden high flush groundwater inflows.
D. Replacing of the main bearing and seals underground.
E. Settlement and Subsidence
i. Survey measurements indicate deformations exceed

allowable limits.
ii. Over excavation is identified or suspected.
iii. Face pressures and/or torque on head decrease suddenly

and significantly.
F. Voids are created by over-excavation that may not be

detectable by survey measurements.
G. Segments are damaged or are found to be out of compliance

with specifications
i. Before installation
ii. During, or after installation
H. Ground Conditioning Problems
1.8.5.11 TBM Product Data:
A. Drawings of TBM showing the overall design, dimensions,

method of operation, cutterhead, cutter type, size and
arrangement of cutting tools, excavation chamber, pressure
bulkhead, screw conveyor, belt conveyor, propulsion system,
articulation provisions, tunnel support systems, trailing gear,
and alignment control system.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
B. Description of the supplied tunnelling equipment features which

are designed or selected to ensure compatibility with the
anticipated ground and groundwater conditions including:
operating face pressure; cutterhead horsepower and drive
system details; torque, rotation speed, and reversibility;
machine thrust; thrust per cutter; propulsion system, including
thrusting mechanisms; and provisions to install and partially
expand Tunnel Support within shield; and total weight.
C. The TBM Manufacturer’s product information, model number,

machine details and working arrangement drawings,
specifications, operating procedures, and other data pertinent
to the performance of the TBM for the anticipated ground
including soil, rock mass and ground water conditions.
D. Descriptions, drawings and details of the trailing equipment,

articulation features, tunnel spoil handling system, lighting and
ventilation systems, probe drilling systems and proposed water
control and monitoring provisions.
E. Description and drawings for arrangement of the dust control

system, continuous gas monitoring system, safety systems, air
quality monitoring system, communications and other ancillary
equipment.
F. Descriptions and drawings of the temporary and backup power

systems.
G. Description, location access and drawings of the TBM mounted

refuge chamber capable of satisfying the requirements of
WorkSafeBC Part 22.50 and ITA’s “guidelines for the provision
of refuge chambers under construction”.
H. A full list of critical spare components including main bearing,

gearboxes, pumps, motors with location and estimated transit
time to site, list of spare parts to be maintained onsite, and
other information requested by the Owner.
I. All components used in the TBM shall be in new condition.
1.8.5.12 For refurbished machines only, the Contractor shall submit the
following:
A. Certification in writing that the TBM has been refurbished and

reconditioned to meet the requirements of the specifications.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
This shall include but not be limited to motors, jacks,

hydraulics, mechanical components, bearings other than the
main bearing, seals, electrical, electronic and other major
components of the TBM and back-up equipment.
B. Full TBM warranty for the duration of the project or 720 days
from the date of site testing acceptance whichever comes first.
C. A certification from the TBM Manufacturer or Rebuilder that the

main bearing is new, unused and suitable to perform the work
without failure.
D. The year originally fabricated and released for operation and

the name of current Owner, with location, phone number, and
contact person.
E. Records of use for the proposed TBM including the project

names, excavated diameter, total operated hours, hours on the
current main bearing, utilization, and rebuild records of major
components.
F. TBM Manufacturer or re-builder certifications and test results

for the TBM components such as motors, pumps, bearings,
hydraulic motors, pumps and cylinders, electrical components
and materials including raw material certificates.
G. The TBM manufacturer or rebuilder shall provide manufacturing

certificates and inspection records for all TBM components
such as cutterhead, shields and other structural components
together with the Finite Element Analysis (FEA) report;
H. The TBM manufacturer or rebuilder shall provide all supplier

certificates for drive train components, including motors,
clutches, gear boxes, pinion gears, bull gear and other
components; main bearing and main bearing seals; hydraulic
system, including pumps, pistons, cylinders, seals, and other
components; electrical system; and muck removal system
components.
I. Main Drive Bearing replacement from inside the TBM

methodology.
J. TBM conversion methodology (primary screw conveyor to

primary belt and reverse).
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
1.8.5.13 Other Pre-construction Submittals:
A. Details of the tunnel lighting systems.
B. Details of the ventilation system including type, size and

location of all fans, supply and exhaust ducts, scrubbers, noise
attenuation devices and other ventilation system components.
C. Details and procedures of tunnel safety provisions including:

water, gas and air quality monitoring equipment,
communication equipment, emergency evacuation and rescue
response, and other safety related information as may be
requested by the Owner.
D. Details of noise control or mitigation measures including

hearing protection requirements.
E. Details of the system for transport of materials, equipment and

personnel, in the tunnel on the tunnel grade shown on the
Drawings including: type and number of locomotives or soft
wheel vehicles, muck cars, personnel transport cars, Tunnel
Support delivery equipment and other equipment and
machinery to be used including emergency breaking and
signalling systems to prevent a runaway train. Drawings of the
track configuration and layout, including location of permanent
and portable switches, and train passes; as well as cross
section drawings illustrating locations for utilities, conveyors
systems and any other equipment within the tunnel areas
allowing adequate clearance for passing trains; the proposed
train operation and signal configuration shall be provided.
F. A description of any enlargements of tunnel openings proposed

for the Contractor’s convenience not shown on the Contract
Drawings (e.g. sump pits, passing bays, mucking bays or
refuge niches).
G. Drawings illustrating the above as necessary.
1.8.6 Reports and Records: Formats of the following reports and records shall
be provided for approval by the Owner at least three months before
commencement of tunnelling operation
1.8.6.1 General Shift Report: Prepare a shift report of tunnel

construction work for each shift worked, and provide the Owner
with one copy of the shift report on the following work day. The
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
following information shall be included in these reports:
A. Time and location of tunnel face(s) by station at start and end

of each work shift.
B. Tunnel Support installation record.
C. Record of operating face pressure, ground conditioning

volumes, mixing ratios of foam expansion ratio (FER) and foam
injection ratio (FIR), grout injection volumes and mixing ratios.
D. Initial Support system measurements, including records of any

observed deformation.
E. Survey records of tunnel excavation including the offset from

design line-and-grade, including corrective steering course for
line and grade deviations, guidance system reports for each
ring installed.
F. Description of the ground conditions and ground behaviour.
G. Location and estimate of volume of ground water inflows,

including method of estimation.
H. Crew size and employee classification.
I. Record of any downtime including the causes of the downtime,

notes regarding occurrences of work delays, including
downtime for daily maintenance and details of equipment
malfunction. The station or location and time of each
occurrence shall be documented.
J. Air quality monitoring and ventilation records.
1.8.6.2 TBM Shift Report: Prepare a TBM shift report for each shift in
which the TBM was operating, which shall further contain the
following information:
A. TBM performance information, including the stations for each

advance of the TBM, the TBM clock time at the start and end of
each shift, the thrust pressure for each thrust cycle and each
thrust ram, time at the beginning and end of each cycle, TBM
operating horsepower, and an identification of all TBM
downtime, including classification and duration. Categories of
downtime identified shall include as a minimum TBM repair,
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
cutter changes, installation of precast concrete tunnel lining,

ground water inflow, gas inflow, power outages and electrical
repair, trailing gear difficulties, muck disposal delays, hydraulics
repair, thrusting problems, alignment survey, and routine
maintenance.
B. TBM’s clock record of utilization, penetration rates, and

operating hydraulic pressures.
C. Number and location of Cutting Tools changed and specific

reasons for the change. Each Cutting Tool is to be uniquely
identified to accurately track Cutting Tool changes e.g.
distinguishing between new cutters and refurbished hubs with
new cutting rings. The Cutting Tool change information shall
clearly identify the position of the Cutting Tool, the reason for
the change, the tunnel stationing and date each Cutting Tool
was initially installed and when it was replaced.
1.8.6.3 TBM Cutterhead Maintenance Report, including: Sample

cutting head condition report covering position of replaced
cutting tools, degree of wear on replaced items, and existing
condition of all remaining tools.
1.8.6.4 Probe Hole Reports – refer to 02 32 13 Probe Hole Drilling

ahead of TBM.
1.8.6.5 Groundwater inflow recordings: Submit electronic files

containing flow recordings for each measurement location as
per 01 57 23 - Diversion and Care of Water. Submit files daily
unless otherwise agreed with the Owner.
1.8.6.6 Daily reports of tests for dust, toxic and hazardous gases and
other atmospheric impurities which may be found in the working
environment during construction.
1.8.6.7 Comply with all applicable health and safety reporting

requirements, provide reports as required by public authorities,
and provide a copy of each report prepared to the Owner within
24 hours following preparation.
1.8.7 All materials and equipment used in the Work shall be the included as part
of the above submittals or the subject of a submittal to the Owner.
1.9 Surveys
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
1.9.1 Submit 30 days prior to start of tunnelling:
1.9.1.1 Survey results confirming that control line monuments

established by the Owner are correct and satisfactory for
accurately laying out the tunnel and site.
1.9.1.2 Copies of translated alignment and control line information from

Contract Drawings into TBM guidance information.
1.9.2 Prior to as-built surveying, submit Tunnel Surveying Plan as outlined in

Section 1.8.5.8.
1.9.3 As-built tunnel survey: Within 30 days following the tunnel hole-through,
submit:
1.9.3.1 A complete record, in tabular and drawing form, of closed

traverse survey showing following information at all instrument
stations; adjusted observations, coordinates and geodetic
elevations.
1.9.4 Provide an adjusted table of tangent offsets where horizontal survey is

affected by adjusted alignment or a horizontal curve is created as a result
of the adjusted alignment. Submit adjusted table to the Owner for
approval.
1.9.5 Provide reports as required by public authorities, and provide a copy of

each report prepared to the Owner within 24 hours following preparation.
1.9.6 Submit a schematic design of the remote computer data logging system,
including sample screen displays.
1.9.7 Submit as-built information and shop drawings on all installed initial
support, the tunnel line and grade and other underground facilities
(including junctions, chambers, and instrumentation and control systems
for facilities operation).
1.9.8 Prior to excavation, demonstrate that TBM guidance equipment is capable

of continuously monitoring and recording the position and attitude of the
TBM.
1.9.9 If monuments provided by the Owner are damaged or moved, re-establish

same and notify the Owner promptly.
1.9.10 During the execution of the Work, submit to the Owner all survey layout
data. The Owner reserves the option to check any or all of these
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
measurements. Whether the Owner exercises this option or not, the

Contractor’s responsibility for accuracy will not be waived. Refer to
additional survey requirements in this Specification.
1.9.11 Tunnel Station Markers
1.9.11.1 Maintain station markers throughout the tunnel construction.
1.9.11.2 Temporary tunnel station markers shall have a minimum

lettering of 200 mm and shall be a colour to contrast with
background.
1.9.11.3 Markers shall be located on the same side of the wall

throughout the tunnel length and shall be with respect to the
centreline of the tunnel.
1.9.11.4 Maximum spacing between markers shall be 5 meters. Markers

shall be placed at approximate eye level near the spring line
and away from utilities.
1.9.11.5 Markers shall also be provided at each change in horizontal and

vertical direction including point of tangency (PT) and point of
curvature (PC).
1.9.11.6 Permanent Station Markers: Permanent station markers are not

required.
1.10 Tolerances
1.10.1 Variations from designed alignment:
1.10.1.1 Tunnel Excavation: plus or minus 300 mm horizontally

maximum variation is allowed.
1.10.1.2 Variations from design grade: Tunnel Excavation: plus or minus

75 mm vertically is allowed. Do not allow ponding of water.
1.10.2 When the excavation is off line and grade, return to plan line and grade at
a rate not to exceed 10 mm per 5 meters of tunnel length.
1.10.3 Survey the invert of the tunnel excavation at 15 meter intervals to confirm
the alignment is within the tolerances specified. Survey results are to be
provided to the Owner bi-weekly.
1.10.4 In the event that tolerances are exceeded, the additional excavation and
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
associated work necessary to bring the alignment of the tunnel within the
stated tolerances shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.10.5 Tunnel Support tolerances shall be in accordance with 31 74 16 Precast

Contrete Tunnel Lining (PCTL).
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 General
2.1.1 The Contractor shall use only such products, including spare parts and
consumables, as supplied by, or approved by, or are compatible with
products supplied and previously approved by the TBM Manufacturer for
this project.
2.2 Tunnel Boring Machine (TBM)
2.2.1 The TBM shall be a Pressurised Face type TBM (EPBM or Slurry) having
the capability to convert to open mode with muck removal by primary belt
conveyor. The TBM shall be built or rebuilt by an established TBM
Manufacturer with at least twenty years of experience manufacturing and
proven record in rebuilding TBMs.
2.2.2 The Contractor shall solicit TBM proposals from various TBM suppliers
including new and rebuilt TBMs. At least two new TBM proposals
(quotations) shall be obtained and at least one rebuilt TBM proposal
(quotation) shall be obtained. Proposals for both new and rebuilt TBMs
and both new and rebuilt trailing gear and long conveyor systems shall be
considered.
2.2.3 A slurry convertible TBM, if proposed by Contractor, shall be subject to the

approval of the Owner.
2.2.4 The TBM shall be designed to excavate in pressurized mode at a

maximum pressure of 5.5 bar. The TBM shall also be capable of
withstanding a hydrostatic pressure of 8.5 bar while the cutterhead is not
turning. The contractor is responsible for applying adequate factors of
safety, subject to the Owner’s approval.
2.2.5 Cutterhead
2.2.5.1 Design and Loads: The Cutterhead structure shall be robust

and capable of excavating efficiently and safely through the
range of ground types described in the Contract Geotechnical
Reports. The Cutterhead structure, face apertures and
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
gathering Scraper arrays shall be configured so as to allow for

the efficient transfer of excavated material from the face into the
excavation chamber to achieve the maximum excavation rate.
The Cutterhead shall be designed and constructed to withstand
all loads and pressures likely to be encountered during
tunnelling operations and at the maximum rate of advance.
2.2.5.2 Cutting Tools: The Cutterhead shall incorporate durable Cutting

Tools to excavate the varying strata described in the Contract
Geotechnical Reports in both wet and dry conditions. It shall be
designed to accept Cutting tools as described in Section 2.2.5,
interchangeable and removable from inside the plenum. The
excavated diameter shall be adjustable up to plus 50 mm per
radius from nominal overcut, by provisions of copy cutters. This
may be provided by a remote electro-hydraulic facility controlled
from the TBM operator’s cabin, or by a direct mechanical
adjustment located immediately to the rear of the gauge
peripheral cutters or by the use of ‘copy cutters. Facilities for the
sufficient control of gauge/excavated diameter shall be provided
so as to allow the satisfactory maintenance of alignment.
2.2.5.3 The Cutting Tools shall be replaceable from the rear of the
Cutterhead, with the exception of the cutters obstructed by
Cutterhead inner structure or centre cutter obstructed by the
rotary fluid joint (RFJ). A minimum of two adjustable gauge
cutters shall be provided in the cutterhead. Clear access shall
be provided for both personnel and materials to the cutting tools
rear mounting locations. Provision shall be made to isolate and
lock the Cutterhead drive to ensure the safety of personnel
entering the excavation chamber. A key and lock shall be
provided for this purpose. Means and methods of cutters
replacement together with cutters transportation and hoisting
inside the Cutterhead plenum shall be provided by the TBM
Manufacturer.
2.2.5.4 Direction of Rotation and Cutting: The Cutterhead shall be

capable of rotating and cutting in both directions with equal
speed and force.
2.2.5.5 Speed of Rotation: The speed of rotation of the Cutterhead

shall be variable to match the required penetration rate and the
ground conditions as described in the Contract Geotechnical
Reports. The maximum speed of rotation should be not less
than 6 rpm.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
2.2.5.6 Inching: The Cutterhead shall be fitted with a low speed inching
facility and position indicator capable of rotating the Cutterhead
under fine control (1 degree) in order to obtain accurate
positioning for the purpose of face inspection, cutting tool
maintenance or probing.
2.2.5.7 Drive Motors: The Cutterhead drive system shall be electric or

hydraulic, with all functions arranged to fail-safe. Electric drive
motors shall be water-cooled and variable speed capable as
provided by variable frequency drives (VFD) for electric drives
with the capacity to start the Cutterhead with not less than 1.5
times rated full load torque.
2.2.5.8 Power: The TBM shall have sufficient power such that the
Cutterhead develops sufficient torque to enable it to advance at
the designed rate for ground materials or conditions described
in the Contract Geotechnical Reports. The system shall include
for starting ‘off load’ prior to commencement of excavation.
Continuous monitoring of cutting torque values and main drive
motor temperatures shall be provided with an interlock to a pre-
set initial warning and second stage limit shutdown. The TBM
shall be designed to protect the drive against Cutterhead lock
up.
2.2.5.9 Conditioning Ports: The Cutterhead shall incorporate not less

than 5 ports spaced proportionately to the swept area for
injection of conditioning agents to the face. The ports closest to
the centre of the Cutterhead shall have an extra high delivery
pressure to assist in the prevention of spoil build-up around the
centre of the Cutterhead. The ports shall be protected to
minimize plugging and damage.
2.2.5.10 Openings: The Cutterhead openings shall be sized or grizzly

bars installed to protect the conveyor against jamming by
oversize rock particles as defined in the Contract Geotechnical
Reports. Maximum size allowed shall be less than 80 percent of
the screw conveyor clearance.
2.2.5.11 Open Face Area: The Cutterhead shall be provided with a

minimum of 25 percent open face area after the fitting of any
grizzly bars. The TBM Manufacturer shall submit an analysis of
face opening for optimization of mining in both soil and rock,
before design phase completion, for Owner review.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
2.2.5.12 Wear protection: The project alignment lies in soil and rock
materials of varying abrasivity, as described in the Contract
Geotechnical Reports. The Cutterhead should be well protected
on its face and periphery with adequate wear resistance plating.
The tools should be positioned such that they cut the ground
and leave clearances such that the wear of the face of the
Cutterhead is minimized. The TBM Manufacturer will select the
type and thickness of materials to be used for wear protection.
The Cutterhead plenum protection is required to protect all
bolting connections (recessed bolting), piping and hoses.
2.2.5.13 Hydraulic supply to the plenum chamber: Any hydraulic system

supplying hydraulic power beyond the main bulkhead should be
separate, in order to prevent contamination of the main
hydraulic systems.
2.2.6 Cutting Tools
2.2.6.1 General: The TBM shall be supplied complete with a full

dressing of Scraper and Ripper cutting tools, and with a full set
of Disc Cutters. The TBM Manufacturer shall also provide all
ancillary components required to convert the cutting tool
dressing into a combination of both ripper/scraper tools and disc
cutters or from full ripper face to full disc cutter face. The TBM
Manufacturer shall provide all lifting/handling equipment, lifting
points in the excavation chamber, and specialist hand tools
(including wear gauges) for maintaining and changing all types
of cutting tools. The Contractor shall purchase and keep enough
inventory of tools to ensure no downtime for cutting tools.
2.2.6.2 Type: Both Scraper and Ripper cutting tools and Disc Cutters
provided shall be suitable to excavate the anticipated ground
conditions, treated ground and unreinforced or fiberglass
reinforced concrete or shotcrete walls.
2.2.6.3 Durability: The tools on the Cutterhead shall be of robust

design and suitably durable construction in order to ensure
minimum replacement during the drive. Scrapers and Ripper
type cutter tools shall have tungsten carbide inserts and have
their exposed bodies wear protected with abrasion resistant
plating. Disc Cutters shall be of a type that will revolve freely in
soil to avoid flats being worn on the cutting tire due to the Disc
Cutter becoming stuck in one position within the housing.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
2.2.7 Main Bearing and Transmission
2.2.7.1 General: The Cutterhead main bearing, drive source and

transmission components shall be robust and capable of
completing the contract drive lengths without major overhaul.
2.2.7.2 Type: The main bearing shall be of the triple roller type.
2.2.7.3 Design: The main bearing shall be designed by numerical

computer analytical methods, including finite element analysis to
resist all axial, radial and eccentric loads and the calculations,
including load cases and duty cycles, must be available for
inspection. The bearing should have an L10 life of not less than
10,000 hours.
2.2.7.4 Seal Type: The Cutterhead main bearing and transmission

shaft shall be protected by a grease-filled labyrinth and
multistage lip seal array capable of ensuring internal lubricant
integrity while protecting against the ingress of water and
excavated fines. The system feed lines, measuring valves and
distribution control shall be sized to ensure compatibility with the
range of oils, grease and flushing mediums that are required to
be utilized through the drive. The rate of flow of the grease shall
be adjustable to compensate for wear. The TBM should be
designed with interlocks to eliminate the possibility of rotating
the head if the seal lubricants are not being pumped.
2.2.7.5 Monitoring of Seal and Labyrinth: The TBM shall incorporate a

system to permit regular monitoring of the lubricants in the main
bearing, the main bearing seals, the labyrinth and the drive
transmission shaft. The lubricant circuits shall have the facility to
take samples, drain, and purge and refill should they become
contaminated. A continual ‘real time’ monitoring of all strategic
functions for the seal shall be provided for the TBM operator via
the Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) system.
2.2.7.6 Overpressure: The thrust ram hydraulics shall be controlled

such that they cannot create an overpressure in the excavation
chamber, above the pressure for which the seals have been
designed.
2.2.8 Excavation Chamber
2.2.8.1 Design: The Excavation Chamber and Cutterhead shall be

capable of thoroughly mixing the excavated ground and
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
groundwater with injected conditioners and designed to facilitate

a smooth flow of material from the face to the screw conveyor or
belt conveyor in open mode.
2.2.8.2 Conditioning Ports: In addition to the Cutterhead conditioning

ports described in Section 2.2.4.10, a minimum of two
independently operated conditioning ports shall be located in
the excavation chamber on the pressure bulkhead and two ports
shall be located in the screw conveyor. The ports shall be
designed so as to minimize damage or plugging of the injection
lines.
2.2.8.3 Earth Pressure Cells: A pressure monitoring system utilizing six

earth pressure cells, including at least two as near as possible
to the crown and one on each side of the chamber at the
horizontal centreline, shall be designed and installed in the
Excavation Chamber to monitor earth pressures. One of the six
EPB cells should be located on the Screw Conveyor. The
pressure cells shall be vertically evenly spaced and shall be
located so as to measure the variation in pressure in the
Excavation Chamber. The pressure cells shall be capable of
operating and providing output continuously to the TBM
operator and the data logger. Pressure cells shall have an
accuracy of plus or minus 7 kPa (0.07 bar) and an operating
range of 0 to 500 kPa (0 to 5 bar). Pressure cells shall be
capable of recalibration. The TBM Manufacturer shall provide
one set of earth pressure cell calibration equipment suitable for
use in a site workshop facility. Damaged pressure cells shall be
replaceable from the rear of the pressure bulkhead. Isolation
valves shall be provided so that replacement can take place
while the excavation chamber is pressurized. The pressure cell
ports shall be designed so as to minimize damage or plugging.
2.2.8.4 The pressure monitoring system shall be designed to be

capable of controlling the earth pressure in the excavation
chamber to within plus or minus 30 kPa (0.3 bar) of the selected
pressure within the design operating pressure range at all times
with this level of accuracy.
2.2.9 Pressure Bulkhead
2.2.9.1 Location: The Pressure Bulkhead shall be designed and

constructed to mount the Cutterhead support bearing and drive
mechanisms. Distortion of the pressure bulkhead shall be
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
limited to prevent damage to, or loss of performance of

components mounted on the pressure bulkhead.
2.2.9.2 Access: Bulkhead door shall be provided to the Excavation

Chamber for personnel and material access for maintenance
purposes.
2.2.9.3 Primary Belt Conveyor Hatch: The bulkhead shall accommodate

space for the Primary Belt Conveyor Hatch for mining in open
mode. The hatch location shall be at just above the spring line.
On the forward side of the hatch (excavation chamber)
provisions for the installation of a muck collecting ring shall be
made available.
2.2.9.4 Central Rotary Coupling (also known as Rotary Fluid Joint): A

central rotary coupling shall be provided for foam, bentonite and
polymer injection through the Cutterhead and any hydraulic
connections to adjustable tools, if provided.
2.2.9.5 Penetrations: Electrical, hydraulic, mechanical, welding, water,

drainage, compressed air and communications penetrations
shall be provided through the Pressure Bulkhead. One of the
compressed air penetrations shall be as close as possible to the
crown for the injecting of air in preparation for a personnel
intervention into the Excavation Chamber.
2.2.9.6 Probe drill ports: Minimum two ports 100 mm ID shall be

provided for probe drilling ahead.
2.2.10 Screw Conveyor
2.2.10.1 Type: The TBM shall be equipped with a central shaft Screw
Conveyor.
2.2.10.2 Purpose: The TBM shall be equipped with a Screw Conveyor to

meter conditioned muck out of the Cutterhead chamber, to
control ground and hydrostatic loads at the faces and to deposit
muck onto the TBM belt conveyor.
2.2.10.3 Design: The Screw Conveyor for the TBM shall be designed
with sufficient length, pitch of flights and angle of inclination to
dissipate hydrostatic and earth pressures as stated above.
2.2.10.4 Capacity: The conveyor shall be capable of transporting

abrasive soils and rock with and without a high water content as
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
well as all ground and groundwater conditions as described in

the Contract Geotechnical Reports.
2.2.10.5 Size and Speed of Rotation: The capacity, torque and speed of
rotation of the Screw Conveyor shall match the maximum
excavation capacity of the TBM.
2.2.10.6 Direction of Rotation: The Screw Conveyor drive shall have the
capability to reverse rotation when needed.
2.2.10.7 Location: The Screw Conveyor intake shall be located below

spring line as close as practicable to the bottom of the
Excavation Chamber.
2.2.10.8 Screw Conveyor Isolation System: The TBM shall have a

system for maintaining positive earth pressure within the
Excavation Chamber when the Screw Conveyor is withdrawn for
any reason. The Screw Conveyor Isolation System shall be
capable of translating from an excavation mode to fully
sealed/isolated mode in under five minutes.
2.2.10.9 Discharge Guillotine Gates: The TBM Manufacturer shall

provide a hydraulically operated guillotine gate at the discharge
end of the Screw Conveyor capable of assisting with pressure
control and this shall have an interlocked auto close feature
when face pressures fall significantly below the lowest design
operating pressure.
2.2.10.10 Conditioning Ports: The casing of the Screw Conveyor shall

incorporate a minimum of two independently operated injection
ports for the addition of conditioning agents along its length.
One port shall be located at the intake and one port shall be
located at the midpoint of the Screw Conveyor.
2.2.10.11 Monitoring: The TBM Manufacturer shall provide pressure cells

at the spoil intake and at the midpoint of the Screw Conveyor for
the purpose of accurately monitoring the muck pressure along
the length of each conveyor.
2.2.10.12 Wear Detectors and Resistance: The Screw Conveyor shall be

designed and constructed so as to carry out the entire project
drive without major overhaul. The Screw Conveyor shall be
protected against excessive wear and deterioration caused by
abrasive excavated materials. Anti-wear protection shall be
provided by proven abrasion resistant materials. The Screw
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
Conveyor shall be provided with suitable means of access to

allow for regular monitoring of wear to the screw and the screw
casing at atmospheric pressure. Anti-wear plates shall be
provided on the full inside of the casing (tube) and the back and
the outside edge of all the flights for the entire length, except the
replaceable tip, of each screw section. The Screw conveyor tip
shall be protected by wear plates on all surfaces. A replaceable
tip section shall be readily available for the Screw Conveyor.
2.2.10.13 Travel: The Screw Conveyor shall be capable of being moved

forward in the Excavation Chamber and retracted from the
Excavation Chamber when required.
2.2.10.14 Access, Removal and Maintenance: The screw shall be

capable of being removed from the casing within the TBM and
replaced within the TBM during a mid-drive incident. Access
hatches shall be provided to enable regular maintenance and
repair of the screw.
2.2.11 Conditioning
2.2.11.1 Types: The TBM shall be equipped with all necessary metering,
monitoring and interlock equipment, supplies and storage for
conditioning using foam, polymers, bentonite, water, and
compressed air. Foam generators, which are part of the supply,
should have the flexibility to suit the varying ground conditions
by way of being able to vary expansion ratios, injection ratios
and dosage rates.
2.2.11.2 Capacities: The conditioning equipment shall have sufficient

capacity to match the rate of advance of the TBM(s) and the
geotechnical conditions.
2.2.11.3 Location: The conditioning equipment shall be located as close

to the point of injection as possible.
2.2.11.4 Ports: The system will allow separate injection and control into
each port, and should have the flexibility to inject any
combination of agents.
2.2.11.5 Method: The system will allow for injecting simultaneously at

different pressures through the various ports.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
2.2.12 TBM Belt Conveyor
2.2.12.1 Purpose: The TBM Manufacturer shall provide a belt conveyor

system capable of receiving spoils directly from inside the
cutterhead in open mode and from the Screw Conveyor
discharge in EPB mode.
2.2.12.2 Type: A belt conveyor with variable speed, reversible feature

and automatic tensioning shall be provided. The belt conveyor
shall have belt cleansers that deposit the spoils into the system.
The main rollers shall be fitted with heavy duty, waterproof
bearing systems and integral lubrication systems.
2.2.12.3 Capacity: The conveyor shall be capable of transporting

abrasive soils and rock with and without a high water content as
well as all ground and groundwater conditions as described in
the Contract Geotechnical Reports. The capacity of the
conveyor shall equal the maximum required excavation capacity
of the TBM cutterhead plus bulking.
2.2.12.4 Measurement: The TBM Manufacturer shall install a minimum

of two belt scales of different type each mounted on the TBM
conveyor. The TBM conveyor shall be designed to be
compatible with accurate use of the belt scales. Two of each
type of belt scales shall be provided.
2.2.12.5 Directional Plates: At the discharge of the cutterhead,

directional plates which direct the tunnel muck onto the belt
conveyor, and contain and prevent spillage shall be installed.
2.2.12.6 Sump: A sump under the discharge point of the conveyor belt
and at the discharge into the muck cars or tunnel long conveyor
belt shall be provided to gather water spilled during transfer
from the cutterhead, and be provided with facilities for pumping
such water away from the working area.
2.2.12.7 Interlocks: Interlocks will be provided such that the TBM

conveyor must be operating before the TBM can start the
excavation cycle. The status of the conveyor should be capable
of being monitored by closed circuit television (CCTV) by the
TBM operator and recorded by the data logger. Warning
devices should indicate belt slippage and overheating at drive
locations.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
2.2.12.8 Angle: The TBM belt conveyor shall be designed to run at such
an angle as to permit the conveyance of wet material.
2.2.13 TBM Shield
2.2.13.1 Design: The TBM shield shall be designed and constructed to

withstand all loads and pressures likely to be encountered
during the tunnelling operations without excessive deflection.
Finite element analysis of the structure at maximum extreme
loads shall be provided by the TBM Manufacturer. The TBM
shield shall consist of a front shield and tail shield.
2.2.13.2 Abrasion Resistance: All metal work shall be suitably protected

where necessary to avoid deterioration due to abrasive ground
conditions.
2.2.13.3 Length: The shields shall have sufficient length to give an

adequate overlap on the last cycle of lining built and allow
negotiating the designed tunnel alignment curves
2.2.13.4 Stabilizer Pads: The front shield shall be equipped with

minimum two stabilizer pads for rock mining mode.
2.2.13.5 Articulation Joint Seal: The articulation joint between shields

shall be designed to seal over the full range of grout injection
pressures and ground and hydrostatic pressures and to prevent
a build-up or ingress of material at the minimum curve radius of
the alignment
2.2.13.6 Injection Points: The TBM shall incorporate injection points for
bentonite and polymers around the perimeter of the front shield
as far forward as practicable. The injection points shall be
positioned immediately to the rear face of the pressure bulkhead
spaced at a maximum spacing of 0.5 meter around the
periphery, shall be fitted with valves, and shall be suitable for a
range of fluids. Additional injection ports, at the same spacing,
shall be provided at the rear of the TBM before the tail seal
brushes. These ports should be usable while segmental lining
has been erected inside the shield.
2.2.13.7 Taper: The TBM shield body shall be tapered from front to rear
by a maximum of 12 mm on radius. This may be achieved by
step changes at suitable joints along the body.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
2.2.13.8 Probe drill ports: The TBM shield shall be equipped with ports
for probe and grout hole drilling at 15-degree intervals around
the shield perimeter, over a 360-degree arc, centred on the
vertical axis of the TBM at the tunnel crown. Ports shall be of
sufficient diameter to permit insertion of packers for grouting.
Refer to Drawings and 02 32 13 Probe Hole Drilling ahead of
TBM, and 31 73 15 Tunnel Annular Grouting for details.
2.2.14 Tail Seal
2.2.14.1 Type: The TBM shall be equipped with a tail seal comprising a
system of grease fed wire brushes to seal against maximum
face pressure, hydrostatic and annular grout pressure.
2.2.14.2 Compatibility: The tail seal shall be compatible with the precast
concrete lining and annular grout as described in 31 74 16
Precast Concrete Tunnel Lining and 31 73 13 Annular Grouting.
2.2.14.3 Quantity: The TBM Manufacturer shall provide a minimum of

four seals, the chambers of which are continuously fed with
fibrous grease whenever the TBM advances. The seals shall be
effective over the full range of grout injection and face pressures
to be used. An interlock shall prevent the TBM moving forward if
the grease is not being fed to the tail seals. Excessive use of
grease shall be an indicator of tail seal failure. Replacement:
Tail skin seals other than the rear seal shall be replaceable
during TBM operation from within the TBM. Tooling for pushing
the TBM to expose the first 3 rows of seals shall be provided by
the TBM Manufacturer.
2.2.14.4 Grease: Tail skin seal grease shall be compatible with the
precast concrete lining gaskets and materials and shall be non-
toxic and biodegradable.
2.2.14.5 Spring Steel Seal (Grout Excluder): The TBM shall be equipped
with an outward facing spring steel seal, to seal between the
shield and the excavated profile, and to minimize the forward
flow of grout over the shield. This seal should cover the upper
270 degrees of the shield.
2.2.15 Annular Grouting
2.2.15.1 Method: Provision shall be made for constant and continuous

pressure grouting around the annulus of the tunnel lining
through pipes to the rear of the tail seals or through the
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
segments ports as the TBM advances.
2.2.15.2 Grout Pipes (for grouting through the tail skin): A minimum of
eight circular grout pipes (four active and four passive) shall be
provided in pairs evenly spaced around the inside of the tail
shield to provide complete redundancy in the event of blockage.
The internal diameter of the pipes shall be a minimum of 37
mm. The delivery system including all pipes shall be designed
and provided with the means to be rapidly cleaned in-situ or
replaceable. Grout pipes shall be accessible for cleaning or
replacing.
2.2.15.3 Grout Type (for grouting through the tail skin) : A two-
component grout shall be used, comprising a stabilizer and an
activator added at the point of injection. A separate set of pipes
shall be provided for the injection of the activator. These pipes
will be of small diameter, i.e. approximately 12 mm. The point of
injection of the activator into the main grout pipes will be
approximately 150 mm before the end of the tail skin.
2.2.15.4 Capacity: The annular grouting equipment shall have sufficient

capacity to match the maximum TBM advance rate and
segment erection rate. The grouting equipment shall be
sufficient to grout a minimum of two complete rings without
interruption. Grouting will be pressure controlled with volume
measurement and must be continuous throughout the
excavation cycle. An interlock should be provided to prevent the
TBM from advancing unless grout is being injected.
2.2.15.5 Pressure: Pressure gauges shall be provided at pumps and

points of injection. The pressure to which the grout is pumped
and the pressure developed behind the ring shall be controllable
and an automatic pressure cut-off valve installed to limit
pressure surges.
2.2.15.6 Measurement and Accuracy: Grouting equipment shall include

an accurate automatic measuring and recording device capable
of measuring volume of grout injected in cubic meters to nearest
one-tenth of a cubic meter, including the amount of grout per
ring and the cumulative total. The measuring device shall
measure the grout take for each ring and shall compare this
measurement to the running average trend over the previous
five rings thereby indicating any sudden change to normal take.
This shall be carried out on a continual real time basis by the
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
automatic measuring device and transmitted to the

TBM/grouting equipment operator and the remote monitoring
system and logged. Measures shall be incorporated to enable
control of the volume of grout injected.
2.2.15.7 Non-return valves shall be used on the grouting equipment.
2.2.16 Thrust Rams
2.2.16.1 Purpose: Thrust rams are to provide thrust reaction from the
installed lining while the excavation is carried out and as an aid
to the erection of the lining. The rams will have two modes,
“excavate” and “build”. In “excavate” mode the rams should be
divided into at least four groups to enable steering by the use of
different hydraulic pressures in each of the ram groups. In
“build” mode, each ram will be capable of independent operation
at reduced pressures to avoid damage to the lining. The TBM
shall be provided with a method of propulsion capable of
developing sufficient thrust to cope with the range of ground
types described the Contract Geotechnical Reports. The thrust
ram operation shall be monitored and controlled so as to protect
against inadvertent damage to the installed lining.
2.2.16.2 Thrust: The TBM shall be capable of exerting and maintaining

sufficient forward thrust. The TBM thrust shall be capable of
overcoming:
A. The backward resistance of the earth and hydrostatic pressure.
B. The friction around the TBM shield.
C. Resistance between the shield and initial support or lining.
D. The pull needed for the trailing gear.
E. The force needed to enable the cutting tools to penetrate the

ground, ground treatment, and temporary support at entry and
exit points.
F. An extra allowance for steering the TBM.
2.2.16.3 Shoes: Thrust ram shoes are to be designed and constructed

to self-align and to distribute loading onto the tunnel initial
support or lining evenly and without causing damage. The
shoes in the upper portion of the shield shall include safety
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
features to support the upper segments during the build cycle,

or there should be dedicated rams in the upper portion to
provide the same safety function.
2.2.16.4 Arrangement: The TBM Manufacturer shall provide thrust rams

arranged symmetrically. Individual and synchronized thrust
rams actuation shall be possible. It shall be possible to limit the
maximum force each thrust ram will exert. Thrust rams shall not
exert forces when idle, but shall resist displacements. Retraction
of the thrust rams must be sufficient to enable withdrawal of the
key segment from any position in the ring.
2.2.16.5 Stroke of Thrust Rams: Stroke of thrust rams shall be

consistent with lining installation and requirements relative to
advance of the machine.
2.2.16.6 The thrust system interlock: In case of a power supply failure

the system hydraulic lock must be able to hold at least 85% of
the pre-failure thrust to maintain the face pressure at this level
for at least 24 hours.
2.2.17 Alignment Control
2.2.17.1 Articulation/Layout: The TBM Manufacturer is required to make

a submittal describing the mechanism for maintaining alignment
while overcutting the body to give sufficient clearance for
steering.
2.2.17.2 Guidance System and Monitoring: The TBM Manufacturer shall

provide a computerized laser guidance system with the
necessary digital or graphic displays which will show the current
and predicted TBM position and attitude compared with design
alignment at any instant while linked to the survey control.
2.2.17.3 Accuracy and Output: Display modes shall be accurate to ±1

mm, and shall include but not be limited to the following:
A. Line and level
B. Correction values
C. Plumb
D. Lead
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
E. Roll
F. Stationing from a given datum
G. Prediction of the shield position 5 meters forward of current

position
H. Centre of thrust
I. Articulation angle
J. Segment Orientation: The TBM Manufacturer shall provide a

segment orientation calculation and prediction unit to allow the
tapered segmental lining to most accurately follow the TBM.
2.2.18 Segment Erection and Handling
2.2.18.1 Type: The pre-cast concrete segment Erector shall be an

integral part of the TBM shield, operating inside the shield tail
area.
2.2.18.2 Lining Type: Installation of Precast Concrete Tunnel Lining,

requires a tunnel lining consisting of single pass, bolted,
doweled and fully gasketed, segmental, pre-cast, reinforced,
tapered concrete rings, Refer to 31 74 16 Precast Concrete
Tunnel Lining (PCTL).
2.2.18.3 Purpose: The Erector mechanism shall be a vacuum or bolt

type system capable of picking up, accurately locating and
placing the different types of segment safely in the required
orientation to within 3 mm of the intended location without
damage to the segments or gaskets.
2.2.18.4 Design: The lifting and gripping system shall be designed and
constructed to handle all loads with a factor of safety of 2:1.
The vacuum lifting pad shall be designed with a factor of safety
of 3:1, operating at 80% vacuum, and the entire system should
be capable of a minimum of 30 minute holding time after a
power failure.
2.2.18.5 Removal of Segments: The Erector mechanism shall also be

capable of removing damaged or misaligned segments of a
partially or completed ring within the tail skin.
2.2.18.6 Rotary Torque Capacity: The rotary torque must be sufficient to
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
lift a segment and compress the cross joint gaskets in a

vertically upwards direction.
2.2.18.7 Operation: The Erector shall provide actuation in axial, radial

and circumferential directions, as well as in directions of the
three articulation angles, corresponding to six degrees of
freedom, or enough to grip and erect the segments properly so
that they are positioned accurately, gaskets are aligned within
the required tolerances, and no damage or distortion of the
segments occurs. Actuation of the erector in all directions shall
be smooth and continuous. Control of the erector shall be by a
remote handheld joystick control panel.
2.2.18.8 Hydraulic Erectors: Hydraulic Erectors shall be equipped with

proportional valves, or equivalent.
2.2.18.9 Gripping: The Erector shall use vacuum pick-up and be fitted
with shear connectors. Segment design will be consistent with
the method of pick-up. The TBM Manufacturer shall ensure that
a method is devised which will allow the erector to handle
broken segments as may become necessary during the
dismantling of a damaged partially built ring.
2.2.18.10 Inching: The Erector shall have an inching capability in

rotational mode.
2.2.18.11 Segment Feeder System: The Segment Feeder System shall

consist of a segment unloader and monorail system for
transporting the segments to the Erector designed, constructed
and used so that the segments are supplied at the rate and
orientation to suit the Erector. It shall be capable of reverse
operation in order to remove damaged or incorrectly selected
segments and be able to supply the tapered segments in the
correct order to ensure the correct build for each ring.
2.2.19 Hydraulic Equipment
2.2.19.1 Hydraulic Fluid: Synthetic fire resistant and biodegradable fluids

(type HFDU or similar) shall be used on all systems in the TBM
and Trailing Gear hydraulic systems.
2.2.19.2 Filtration: Pressure and return line filtration shall be provided to

a level of 10 micron to ensure the efficient working of the
system. Hydraulic filters shall be provided with filter clogging
indicators which send an electrical warning to the control
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
console.
2.2.19.3 Noise: The noise emitted by the hydraulic power packs must be
considered and if necessary acoustic shields should be
provided and fitted with any necessary ventilation fans to
maintain cooling. Noise levels should comply with local
regulations. In general noise levels emitted by the hydraulic
power packs should not exceed 85 dB or a warning will sound.
2.2.19.4 Cooling: Effective oil coolers should be fitted to maintain oil

temperatures below 70°C. These should operate via a heat
exchange unit using piped water into and out of the TBM area.
2.2.19.5 Hydraulic hoses: The use of hydraulic hoses shall be

minimized, but where used they should be adequately protected
to minimize damage. All hoses and fittings to be rated to (415
Bars) 6000 PSI.
2.2.20 Electrical Equipment
2.2.20.1 The electrical components of TBM and TBM Trailing Gear

equipment, and all supporting control, communication and
electrical switching equipment, including the guidance system,
installed within the tunnel and required for operation of the TBM
shall be protected against explosive gases as follows:
A. Monitoring for explosive gases shall be installed. Interlocks

shall prevent equipment operation if more than 10% LEL is
detected.
B. Electrical equipment for emergency services (lights, ventilation,

fire-fighting, pumping out water, communications) shall start
automatically on emergency power, should an electrical cut off
from the main power line in the tunnel occur.
2.2.20.2 Equipment shall be CSA certified or obtain special approval

from the Electrical Safety Authority (ESA).
2.2.20.3 All underground switchgear shall have NEMA rating suitable for
the application. Cable entries to switchgear cabinets shall be
glanded and be bottom entry where possible. If side entry
glands are used these should be well protected. Top entry
glands will not be permitted.
2.2.20.4 Wire and cables shall be listed as being resistant to the spread
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
of fire and shall have reduced smoke emissions.
2.2.20.5 All operation and work areas, including maintenance areas,

shall be provided with good levels of lighting in accordance with
the IESNA recommendations. All areas including access
walkways shall be provided with battery back-up emergency
lighting. The following lighting levels are extracted from Table
10-9 of the IESNA for guidance.
TABLE 2-1 LIGHTING LEVELS
A Public Spaces 30 lx (3 fc)
B Simple Orientation for Short Visits 50 lx (5 fc)

Working spaces where simple visual
C 100 lx (10 fc)
tasks are performed
Performance of visual tasks of high
D 300 lx (30 fc)
contrast and large size
Performance of visual tasks of high
E contrast and small size, or visual tasks of 500 lx (50 fc)
low contrast and large size
2.2.20.6 An emergency generator shall be installed on the Trailing Gear

or on the surface. This should be of sufficient power to supply
lights, emergency pumping, firefighting equipment, compressed
air supply if working under compressed air and local ventilation.
The diesel engine should be fitted with appropriate scrubbers on
the exhaust.
2.2.20.7 Power Factor: The TBM should be fitted with switched

capacitor power factor correction equipment to ensure that the
power factor does not fall below 0.9 lagging at any time.
2.2.20.8 Monitoring of TBM Systems and Interlocks: The TBM

Manufacturer shall provide a PLC with a suitably protected
power supply for monitoring of TBM systems together with a
diagnostic package for maintenance and fault tracing.
2.2.20.9 Control of TBM Systems and Interlocks: The TBM Manufacturer

shall provide a monitoring unit with alarm and trip settings
connected to the PLC for control and interlocking.
2.2.20.10 High Voltage (HV) transformers may be dry type, cast coil or
fluid filled. If fluid filled, then synthetic, flame-resistance fluid
shall be used.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
2.2.20.11 The electrical systems shall maintain ventilation, illumination,

communications, drainage and water supply; areas of refuge,
exits and exit routes, remote annunciation and alarms under all
operating and emergency modes associated with the facility.
2.2.20.12 Electrical systems shall not use materials that produce toxic by-
products during electric circuit failure or when subjected to an
external fire.
2.2.20.13 PVC raceways, conduit, cable trays, wire ways, vinyl

insulated/jacketed conductors or cables and exposed PVC-
coated metal conduit, shall not be used.
2.2.20.14 The cable reel shall provide a minimum of 150 meters of flexible
HV cable.
2.2.20.15 HV supply to the TBM shall be 12.5 kV at 60 Hz.
2.2.21 Data Logger
2.2.21.1 Parameters: A data logger shall be installed and used to

continuously record the vital operating parameters of the TBM
and transmit the information to surface workstations on a real
time basis. The TBM Manufacturer shall make a submittal
including a full listing of all parameters that will be recorded. The
data recorded shall include, but not be limited to:
A. Cutterhead rotation speed
B. Thrust load to each ram or group of rams
C. Total thrust load
D. Torque consumed by the TBM Cutterhead
E. Instantaneous and average rate of advance (for excavation

cycle)
F. Quantity of excavated material per TBM stroke to give a

comparative cycle-by-cycle calculation, adjusted as necessary
to account for changes in ground density and quantity of
conditioner injected. The system shall compare this
measurement to the predicted values and to the running
average trend over the previous five rings thereby indicating
any sudden change to normal excavated quantity. This shall be
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
carried out on a continuous real time basis and displayed both

at the operator’s workstation and in the surface monitoring
stations and recorded by the data logger.
G. Electrical power consumption
H. Operation and consumption of lubricating oils and greases by

the TBM
I. Monitoring of the bearing sealing system
J. Record of alarm activations
K. TBM Guidance and steering data
2.2.21.2 Workstations: The TBM Manufacturer shall provide

workstations and software at both the Contractor’s and the
Owner’s surface field office capable of reading the data logger
and shall communicate all data from the data logger to the
workstations at the Contractor’s and the Owner’s field offices in
real time. The connections to the surface facilities will have a
parallel redundant system to avoid connection downtime. The
software should be capable of displaying analysis and historical
trends of selected parameters. Cabling and redundant cabling to
be supplied by the TBM Manufacturer and installed by the
Contractor.
2.2.21.3 A facility for connecting the data logger to the Internet through a
secure and stable connection with a full redundancy must be
included.
2.2.21.4 Databases for all recorded parameters must maintained

permanently throughout tunnelling operations and accessible
through a graphical interface at the TBM. A real time back up
on a redundant system of all data must be maintained at the
TBM.
2.2.22 Safety and Fire
2.2.22.1 Layout and Design: The layout and design of the TBM and all
ancillary equipment shall provide a safe working environment
with visual, and, where appropriate, audible warnings of
potential hazards.
2.2.22.2 Systems: The TBM and Trailing Gear shall be provided with fire
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
detection, alarm, and suppression systems to extinguish fires,

and shall allow safe egress for all persons from the TBM and
Trailing Gear.
2.2.22.3 Emergency Stops and Pull Wire: Pull wires shall be provided
along the full length of all TBM conveyors. Emergency stops
shall also be included at all points of hazard.
2.2.22.4 Fire Detection and Suppression: An integrated fire detection

system shall be installed. Smoke and heat sensors fitted to the
TBM and Trailing Gear shall be connected to a central control in
the operator’s cabin indicating their location. A manually
operated foam sprinkler suppression system shall be fitted
above the hydraulic power packs. All electrical cabinets shall
have internal detection systems which activate inert gas
suppression inside each enclosure. In addition, manually
operated fire extinguishers of both the dry powder and foam
type shall be provided throughout the TBM and Trailing Gear.
Drawings of all these systems should be submitted as part of
the design drawings.
2.2.22.5 Access and Egress: Clearly marked access and egress routes
should be provided along the Trailing Gear.
2.2.23 Gas Detection and Ventilation Equipment
2.2.23.1 Design: The TBM Manufacturer shall design and install a

ventilation system on the TBM which is compatible with the
main tunnel ventilation system designed by the Contractor. It
shall have fans for fresh air supply and exhaust to maintain a
safe working environment, in accordance with the provisions of
WorkSafeBC, behind the bulkhead.
2.2.23.2 Gas Monitoring: The TBM Manufacturer shall provide built-in

equipment to monitor for gas continuously having the capability
of giving audible and visual warning if gas concentration
exceeds 5% of the lower explosive limit, and shut down the
main power supply if gas concentration exceeds 10% of the
lower explosive limit. Gases to be monitored shall include
hydrocarbons, Oxygen (O2), Hydrogen Sulphide (H2S), Sulphur
Dioxide (SO2), Methane (CH4), Nitrous Oxide (NO), Nitrogen
Dioxide (NO2), Carbon Monoxide (CO) and Carbon Dioxide
(CO2).
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
2.2.23.3 The main monitoring positions will be at the discharge gate of

the screw conveyor and in the working area of the TBM. It will
be the Tunnel Contractor’s responsibility to provide hand held
devices to monitor in other positions in the tunnel.
2.2.23.4 Location: Penetrations into the Excavation Chamber and the

Screw Conveyor shall be provided to enable monitoring by hand
held devices prior to entry by personnel.
2.2.24 TBM Refuge Chamber
2.2.24.1 A refuge chamber, mounted to the TBM rear gantry, shall be

provided to protect tunnel crew in case of an emergency.
2.2.24.2 The refuge chamber shall be compliant with the ITA's

"guidelines for the provision of refuge chambers under
construction" and the provisions of WorkSafeBC Part 22.50.
2.2.25 Control of Water
2.2.25.1 Purpose: The TBM Manufacturer shall provide the TBM and
Trailing Gear with pumps capable of removing ingress water
and construction water from the invert at rates equal to or
greater than those defined in the Geotechnical Contract
Documents, and pumping it to a settling tank with a separator
and oil trap, which shall be provided by the Contractor (on the
surface). Removal of ingress water from the tunnel will be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
2.2.25.2 Cooling Water: The TBM Manufacturer shall submit details of

flow, pressure and temperature of water required to be delivered
to the TBM for cooling purposes.
2.2.25.3 Water Supply. In addition, the TBM Manufacturer must allow for
water supply for other construction purposes, such as grout
mixing, washing down etc.
2.2.26 Trailing Gear
2.2.26.1 The Trailing Gear shall be capable of handling one complete

ring and delivered grout for two rings concurrently.
2.2.26.2 The Trailing Gear shall have wheeled supports.
2.2.26.3 The Trailing Gear shall incorporate a continuous walkway that
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
can serve as an escape route and exit in an emergency.
2.2.26.4 All services required on the TBM, including water supply,

drainage, power, compressed air, telemetry and
communications, must have a connection system on the TBM
Trailing Gear to allow the services to extend as the TBM
advances. This should allow a minimum advance of 100 meters
without having to add extensions for electrical supply. Cable
reels, water reels and pipes on Trailing Gear are to be supplied
by the TBM Manufacturer. All cable and pipes for the length of
the tunnel will be supplied by the Contractor. Interface drawings
between these two systems are to be supplied.
2.2.27 Communication Systems
2.2.27.1 CCTV systems shall be provided to monitor the discharge gate

of the muck conveyor and at the ring building station. A
minimum of four cameras shall be provided.
2.2.27.2 Provide telephone communication in the tunnel in accordance

with regulations of the Work Safe BC.
2.2.28 Control Station
2.2.28.1 A control station shall be provided at a convenient location

within the TBM.
2.2.28.2 The control station shall be capable to host two people at

minimum.
2.2.28.3 The control station shall host the TBM computer and interface
screens as well as the guidance system computer and interface
screen.
2.2.28.4 The control station shall provide direct where possible and
CCTV view to areas of operations such as segments erection,
muck discharge and general front and rear view of the tunnel.
2.3 Tunnel Support
2.3.1 Tunnel Support shall be in accordance with 31 74 16 Precast Concrete

Tunnel Lining (PCTL).
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 General Requirements
3.1.1 Be responsible for the safety of the tunnel from start of excavation until
final acceptance. Execution of excavation and Tunnel Support installation
methods and systems shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.
3.1.2 Maintain clean working conditions at all times inside the tunnel. All spoils,
slush, grout spills, and any other material not required for tunnel
excavation shall be removed in a timely manner.
3.1.3 Tunnel Support:
3.1.3.1 Tunnel Support is shown on the Drawings and detailed in 31 74

16 Precast Concrete Tunnel Lining.
3.1.3.2 Be responsible for safe installation as deemed necessary to

ensure stable tunnel. The Contractor shall responsible for
damages to the tunnel, to property and for injury to persons
resulting from inadequate installation of support.
3.1.4 Provide the Owner with access to inspect and observe all works, to
perform independent line and grade surveys, and to inspect the monitoring
instrumentation.
3.1.5 Carry out tunnelling work in accordance with the approved working hours
established for the project.
3.1.6 In case of emergency or where work stoppages are likely to endanger the
stability of the tunnels, maintain a full work force 24 hours per day,
including weekends and holidays, until emergency or hazardous
conditions no longer jeopardize stability and safety of the Work.
3.1.7 Noise and Dust Control: Noise levels and dust controls shall comply with
all applicable federal, provincial and municipal codes, laws, regulations
and ordinances. Operations shall be conducted in such a way as to
minimize the impact of noise and dust to the residents in the vicinity of the
Work. All surface equipment shall be equipped with noise suppressors
and enclosed in sound attenuation enclosures. All compressors shall be
enclosed in sound attenuation enclosures. All gasoline, diesel or air-
powered equipment shall be equipped with silencers or mufflers on
exhaust lines. Storage bins and hoppers shall be lined with materials that
deaden sound.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
3.2 Ventilation
3.2.1 Provide, operate and maintain, for the duration of the underground
operations, temporary ventilation systems, air quality monitoring systems
and dust suppression systems to maintain sufficient supply of fresh air in
all underground work areas, and which conforms to regulations of
WorkSafeBC Part 22 - Underground Workings, the Contract Documents,
and all applicable laws and regulations.
3.2.2 The ventilation facilities shall be designed by a person experienced in the

design of ventilation facilities for tunnel construction.
3.2.3 Air Quality:
3.2.3.1 Conduct excavation operations employing methods and

equipment which will positively control dust, fumes, vapours,
gases, mists, particulate and other airborne impurities.
3.2.3.2 Special care shall be taken to prevent inversion weather

conditions from causing concentration of exhaust air or fumes
underground.
3.2.3.3 Ventilation fixtures shall be continuously operational until all

work has been completed and approved.
3.2.3.4 Provide instruments and test the underground atmosphere in

accordance with WorkSafeBC Part 22 and applicable
regulations as frequently as necessary to assure that the
required air quality and quantity is maintained.
3.2.3.5 Maintain a log book of all air quality test results, including date,
time, tunnel station, person taking tests, and all information
relevant to each test and test results. A copy of each air test
result shall be forwarded to the Owner within 12 hours of the
test being performed.
3.2.3.6 Provide all crews working outside the audible range of the built-
in gas monitoring system with an equivalent portable air
monitor.
3.2.3.7 Routinely test and maintain all monitoring devices in accordance

with manufacturer’s recommendations to ensure they are fully
functional at all times.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
3.2.3.8 Upon completion of the Work, all ventilation shall be removed

from the Project Site.
3.3 Additional Safety Requirements
3.3.1 Maintain adequate lighting at all stages of the construction to provide safe
underground working conditions. Lighting fixtures shall be continuously
operational until all work has been completed and approved.
3.3.2 Equipment powered by gasoline, natural gas and similar volatile fuels will
not be allowed underground.
3.3.3 Provide respiratory protection, fall protection, and other safety-related

equipment and facilities including hard hats, mine lamps, self-rescuers,
hearing and eye protection, and waterproof clothing as required by the
regulations of WorkSafeBC.
3.3.4 Upon completion of the Work, all lighting systems shall be removed from
the Project Site.
3.4 Tunnel Boring Machine and Tunnelling
3.4.1 Attendance by Owner Representative
3.4.1.1 The Owner shall be allowed full access to all manufacturing and
assembly facilities for the TBM after giving 24 hour notice of
intent to visit. These facilities shall include any subcontractor’s
facilities used by the TBM Manufacturer.
3.4.1.2 The Owner will be involved at all stages of supply from design to
site erection/commissioning.
3.4.2 TBM Manufacturer’s Facilities
3.4.2.1 General: The TBM Manufacturer shall provide workshop

facilities, including those of his subcontractors, suitable for the
safe and efficient manufacture of the TBM. Those facilities shall
include crainage, machining, and all necessary specialist tools
and equipment suitable for the large components associated
with the TBM. The TBM Manufacturer shall make available for
inspection by the Owner, any manufacturing facility as deemed
necessary by the Owner, in order to ensure suitability prior to
award of supply contract.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
3.4.2.2 Manufacturing Schedule and Equipment: The TBM

Manufacturer shall supply a manufacturing schedule, clearly
identifying the detailed stages of manufacture and major items
of plant used, (such as large machine tools), and required to
enable the schedule to be maintained. Regular progress
meetings will be held to monitor the progress of the manufacture
against this schedule. The TBM Manufacturer will be expected
to identify alternative facilities should those specified in the
schedule be insufficient or unavailable.
3.4.2.3 Assembly Area: The assembly area in the TBM Manufacturer’s

factory shall be large enough to include the full TBM assembly
(shield and Trailing Gear gantries) and shall be weatherproof.
The assembly area shall be suitable for use while carrying out
various equipment tests; for example, isolation during high
voltage testing, hydraulic pressure testing and ring erection
trials.
3.4.2.4 Subcontractors: The TBM Manufacturer shall ensure that all

subcontractors comply with the requirements of the
specification.
3.4.3 Factory Assembly, Testing and Acceptance
3.4.3.1 General: The TBM Manufacturer shall fully assemble the TBM
complete with all ancillary equipment at the TBM Manufacturer’s
primary facility. All systems shall be tested and commissioned in
the factory. Drawings, lists of parts, engineering method
statements, works assembly and test schedules shall be used
for this purpose. These tests shall be witnessed by the Owner
and the Contractor. The TBM Manufacturer will submit the test
procedures to the Owner and/or the Contractor three months
before the tests are due to take place.
3.4.3.2 Functional Tests: Prior to factory dismantling and transport to

site, the TBM shall undergo a series of functional tests. These
tests shall be witnessed by the Owner and the Contractor in
order to ensure acceptability with respect to meeting the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
3.4.3.3 Records: Fully detailed records of all system tests, functional

tests and commissioning documentation shall be maintained
and copies provided for the Owner and/or the Contractor as part
of the Acceptance Documentation.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
3.4.3.4 Access: The TBM Manufacturer shall allow reasonable access

to the manufacturers of other equipment for pre-installation and
testing.
3.4.3.5 Trials: The TBM Manufacturer shall carry out segment handling
tests in the factory using at least two tunnel rings supplied by
the Contractor. These tests shall demonstrate the use of the
hoists that lift the segments from the segment cars to the feeder
and the ring erector.
3.4.4 Packing, Shipping and Transportation
3.4.4.1 The TBM Manufacturer shall be responsible for packing and

shipping the TBM and Trailing Gear to the site and providing full
insurance and all documentation for the shipment, including
weights and packing lists, required by the Contractor. The TBM
Manufacturer shall submit a plan for carrying out the
requirements of this clause.
3.4.5 On-Site Assembly and Testing
3.4.5.1 The TBM Manufacturer will provide technical assistance to the

Contractor on site when the Contractor carries out trials to
demonstrate the TBM’s ability to conform to the requirements of
this specification.
3.4.5.2 The TBM Manufacturer will provide technical assistance to the

Contractor on site when the Contractor carries out trials to
demonstrate the TBM’s ability to meet the tunnel support
erection rates required by this specification.
3.4.6 Documentation
3.4.6.1 The TBM Manufacturer shall supply, for the TBM and ancillary
equipment one copy in loose leaf form, and eight electronic
copies in searchable interactive PDF format on separate DVDs,
of manuals in English containing complete operating
instructions, erection and disassembly procedures, maintenance
and service instructions (including the names of recommended
lubricants and routine lubrication procedures), parts
catalogue(s) and software, together with all drawings in reduced
size which are necessary to aid in the understanding of the
instructions.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
3.4.6.2 All documentation shall be made available in accordance with

the submittal schedule.
3.4.6.3 The TBM Manufacturer shall be responsible for updating TBM

operation, maintenance/servicing and spare part manuals
should any changes become necessary during the
commissioning period. Accordingly these manuals (separate
pages if necessary) shall be identified by revision stage. A
submittal will be required to demonstrate how the TBM
Manufacturer will comply with this clause.
3.4.7 TBM Mobilization, Assembly and Launching
3.4.7.1 Infrastructure Upgrade and Strengthening
A. Assess the condition, adequacy and load carrying capacity of

all existing infrastructure from point of arrival to the Worksite.
B. Repair all damage to existing infrastructure resulting from the

Contractor’s operations. Unless otherwise authorized by the
Owner, all existing infrastructure must be returned in pre-
construction condition or better.
C. Design all upgrades and strengthening to existing infrastructure

required by the Contractor’s operations. Where applicable the
upgrades shall be designed and stamped by an engineer
registered in the Province of British Columbia. Upgrades shall
be subject to the approval of the Owner.
3.4.7.2 Design and construct TBM assembly working slab to

accommodate maximum weight of TBM and Trailing Gear,
surcharge loading from TBM assembly crane, uplift pressures
and hydrostatic pressures.
3.4.7.3 Design and construct TBM launch frame to accommodate

launching of the TBM.
3.4.7.4 The launch eye shall be sealed against the pressure exerted by
the TBM against the ground and sealed against groundwater.
The TBM shall be excavating with a full excavation chamber
prior to the nose cone breaking through into ungrouted soil.
Submit launch sealing design and method statement for owner’s
approval. The details and methods must prevent loss of ground
into the portal excavation.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
3.4.8 Assistance with Work Site Assembly and Commissioning
3.4.8.1 The TBM Manufacturer shall provide named, qualified,

experienced technical assistance to assist the Contractor with
erection of the equipment at the work site, verification testing of
the TBM prior to tunnelling and throughout commissioning, as
defined in Section 1.6.5 of this Specification.
3.4.8.2 The TBM Manufacturer shall have experienced service

technicians on site on a full-time basis to supervise and assist
with assembly, commissioning, launch of the TBM, the first 300
meters of TBM tunnelling in soil, and when transitioning from
soil to rock for additional 300 meters of TBM excavation.
Arrange for service technician attendance thereafter on a bi-
weekly basis for testing and inspections of the TBM during
normal tunnelling operations or maintenance shifts.
3.4.9 Training of Contractor’s and Owner’s Personnel
3.4.9.1 The TBM Manufacturer shall provide named, qualified,

experienced technical assistance to train the Contractor’s and
the Owner’s site personnel in operation and maintenance of the
TBM and ancillary equipment, in particular all computerized
systems.
3.4.9.2 The majority of training shall take place on site during erection,
commissioning and initial stages of tunnelling. However, the
TBM Manufacturer shall provide named, qualified, experienced
technical assistance to train a small team of the Contractor’s
and the Owner’s site personnel in operation and maintenance of
the TBM and ancillary equipment, including all computerized
systems in the factory during the latter stages of factory
assembly and commissioning.
3.4.9.3 Trained Contractors personnel shall receive certification from

the TBM Manufacturer including operators, mechanics and
electricians.
3.4.10 TBM Tunnelling Requirements
3.4.10.1 Tunnel excavation shall not begin until the following conditions
have been met:
A. Required submittals have been made and the Owner has

reviewed submittals.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
B. Required pre-construction inspections have been completed.
3.4.10.2 The tunnel shall be excavated using a TBM while erecting the
Tunnel Support within the tail of the TBM shield so that the
ground is continuously supported.
3.4.10.3 Maintain a site inventory of a minimum of 150 segmental lining

rings having met the minimum 28-day concrete UCS strength
and provide adequate lead-time to obtain replacement materials
to prevent disruption to the Work. The contractor is responsible
any delays related to a shortage of segment supply.
3.4.10.4 Enlargements for the Contractor’s convenience, or for other

limited portions of the tunnel, are subject to approval by the
Owner. Enlargements shall be supported adequately during
construction and shall be backfilled as approved by the Owner.
Submit the details of any planned enlargements or extensions to
the Owner for review prior to excavation.
3.4.10.5 Conduct all tunnel construction work within the construction

easements and limits of disturbance indicated on the Drawings.
3.4.10.6 All materials encountered shall be regarded as unclassified. All

excavated material must be removed and disposed of as
specified. Excavation shall be confined to the limits of the
tunnel and as required for the type of construction to be used,
and in such manner as to minimize any settlement of the ground
over or near the tunnel. If the Contractor uses or proposes to
use tunnelling methods which, in the opinion of the Owner, are
not such as to minimize settlement or permit close adherence to
line and grade, the Owner may require the Contractor to revise
his procedure to comply with methods which will give more
satisfactory results.
3.4.10.7 Excavated material shall be handled in the underground

opening and transported, hoisted and loaded in accordance with
applicable federal, provincial and municipal safety requirements.
Muck is to be removed continuously from the mined excavation
as the tunnel is advanced.
3.4.11 Operations and Maintenance
3.4.11.1 The TBM shall be maintained in accordance with the TBM

Manufacturer’s guidelines and recommendations.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
3.4.11.2 All TBM operations are to be performed under the control of an

experienced supervisor.
3.4.11.3 The contractor shall determine the tunnel excavation mode and
execute changes as deemed necessary (pressurize face to
open mode; primary screw conveyor to primary belt and
reverse) identify locations and the need to change based on the
encountered ground conditions, the frequency of TBM cutting
tool changes along with of tunnel cut diameter adjustment to
ensure the TBM is advancing safely without compromising its
structural integrity.
3.4.11.4 Key TBM operations and functions shall be continually

monitored and logged.
3.4.11.5 The Owner reserves the right to stop tunnelling operation if the
TBM is being operated or maintained in a manner that is
deemed unsafe for personnel. No additional payment shall
accrue as a result of such stop orders.
3.4.11.6 Whenever there is an incident or stoppage of work which in the

opinion of the Owner is likely to endanger the stability of the
excavation or adjacent structures, maintain sufficient forces on
the site for 24 hours a day, including weekends and holidays, to
cope with the incident or hazardous condition until the incident
or stoppage is rectified.
3.4.11.7 Maintain clean and safe working conditions. Maintain track for
safe operation of trains. Coordinate with and provide assistance
to the Owner documenting geological conditions at the heading.
3.4.11.8 Ensure that over excavation does not occur. The Contractor
shall prevent over excavation by continuously and accurately
measuring and recording the quantity of excavated material
during each forward stroke of the TBM. When an increase in the
quantity of excavated material is measured, the Contractor shall
stop excavation and comply with the Approved contingency
measures prior to continuing with excavation.
3.4.11.9 Compute the results of excavated material per TBM shove

stroke to give a comparative ring-by-ring calculation, adjusted
as necessary to account for changes in ground density.
3.4.11.10 Maintain detailed records of quantities of conditioning agents

and consumable fluids, oils and greases used in TBM operation,
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
and make continuously available to the Owner. This information

shall be recorded on the data logger.
3.4.11.11 The Contractor shall submit daily and periodical scheduled

maintenance records as per Contract Documents.
3.4.11.12 Perform work to ensure ground movement does not exceed the
specified values.
3.4.11.13 Face Pressures: calculate minimum, target and operating range

of face pressures based on the conditions and design
considerations described in the Contract Geotechnical Reports
using an analytical or empirical method. The Contractor shall
operate the TBM using the minimum face pressure, target face
pressures and within the operating range of face pressures at all
times, monitor face pressures continuously, and adjust face
pressures to maintain face stability and prevent settlement.
3.4.12 Conditioning (EPBM)
3.4.12.1 The TBM shall be equipped with all necessary equipment,

supplies and storage for ground conditioning using the following
additives: Foam; Polymers; Bentonite; Water; Compressed Air;
and Any other additives the Contractor determines are
necessary.
3.4.12.2 The Contractor shall use soil conditioners mixed with the spoil to
be excavated as necessary for the following purposes:
A. Stabilize the tunnel face under all ground conditions described

in the Contract Geotechnical Reports.
B. Balance ground and hydrostatic pressures.
C. Reduce ground permeability.
D. Reduce torque demands on the TBM;
E. Reduce abrasive properties of ground thereby reducing wear

on the TBM components including the cutterhead, cutting tools,
and screw conveyor;
F. Enable the conditioned spoil to form a plug in the screw

conveyor to balance ground and hydrostatic pressures.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
3.4.12.3 Assist in spoil transport
A. The Contractor shall carry out trials and testing, combined with
the Contractors past experience of similar ground conditions, to
determine the most suitable ground conditioning for the ground
and groundwater conditions described in the Contract
Geotechnical Data Reports prior to commencing tunnel
excavation.
B. The Contractor shall carry out trials and testing to confirm that
the ground conditioning used for the ground and groundwater
conditions encountered during excavation are suitable and
adjust the type and quantities as necessary.
C. The Contractor shall carry out trials and testing on foam made
from foaming agents or polymers products to determine the
most suitable product prior to commencing tunnel excavation.
D. The Contractor shall carry out trials and testing on foam made
from foaming agents or polymers products to confirm the most
suitable product for the ground and groundwater conditions
encountered during excavation and adjust the type and
quantities as necessary.
E. The Contractor shall ensure that sufficient quantities of suitable

soil conditioners are available on site at all times and are used
during tunnel excavation.
3.4.13 Assistance with Maintenance
3.4.13.1 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the maintenance

of the TBM. The TBM Manufacturer shall provide Specialists
paid by the Contractor, to be available on demand at the work
site to assist the Contractors with the maintenance, operation
and condition monitoring of the TBMs.
3.4.13.2 Testing of Lubricants: The work program shall include sampling,

testing and analysing of all lubricants at intervals not greater
than one week or as recommended by the TBM Manufacturer,
whichever is the shorter interval.
3.4.14 Supply of Spares and Replacement Parts
3.4.14.1 The TBM Manufacturer shall supply the Contractor with a

recommended spares and replacement parts list for the duration
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
of the Construction Contract. This list shall include quantities,

availability and shipping costs to the Work Site.
3.4.14.2 It is required that a consignment stock of spare parts will be held

corresponding to the critical parts, will be kept in the TBM
Manufacturer’s facility and the consumables will be supplied
regularly to the Contractor. Administration of this stock of parts
shall be the responsibility of the TBM Manufacturer.
A. It shall be required that a spare main bearing, suitable for

replacing the main bearing of the TBM in case of failure, be
held by the TBM Manufacturer at a convenient location and be
made available to site within 2 weeks of notification.
3.4.14.3 The TBM Manufacturer shall liaise with the Contractor, who will
be responsible for providing suitable and secure
accommodation on site, to ensure that all spare parts, required
to be stored at the Work Site, are stored in a suitable
environment so as to be maintained in a satisfactory condition
and are readily available when required.
3.4.14.4 The contractor shall be responsible to maintain an adequate

stock of critical and non-critical spares to ensure no down-time
caused by the shortage of parts or long lead items.
3.4.14.5 A detailed listing of all spare parts together with consumption

and recommended stock levels shall be prepared by the TBM
Manufacturer and made available to the Owner. The contractor
shall be responsible to maintain recommended stock levels.
3.4.14.6 Cutting Tools: The TBM Manufacturer shall advise on cutting

tool maintenance procedures and tool replacement limits.
3.4.15 TBM Reception
3.4.15.1 Design a reception eye seal to prevent loss of ground into the
portal excavation at reception. Submit to owner for approval.
3.4.16 TBM Removal
3.4.16.1 The design of the TBM is to be suitable for use on a single

drive, with the ability to dismantle the TBM for transportation.
3.4.16.2 The Contractor will remove the TBM from the tunnel at the end
of the project.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
3.5 Existing Conditions
3.5.1 All restrictions shall be followed which are set as conditions under which
the easement or permission was granted to the Owner to perform the
Work of this Contract. These restrictions are included with these
Specifications.
3.5.2 A description of the expected ground and groundwater condition is

provided in the Contract Geotechnical Reports.
3.5.3 All utilities encountered shall be protected during the Work of this
Contract. The known utilities are shown in the contract drawings. Every
precaution should be taken when working near the utilities to locate and
protect these utilities. All damage to, or resulting from, damage to the
existing utilities shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor and the
Contractor shall replace, repair, remedy, or compensate for all damages at
no additional cost to the Owner.
3.5.4 All structures above or adjacent to the tunnel shall be protected, within the
framework and criteria set forth in the Contract Documents.
3.6 Execution of the Work
3.6.1 Execute tunnelling works in accordance with the approved working hours
established for the project. Notify the Owner at least 24 hours in advance
of a proposed change in working hours. When the Work is interrupted for
more than 24 hours, or if required by the ground conditions, the face shall
be supported in accordance with approved Shop Drawings.
3.6.2 In case of emergency or work stoppages likely to endanger the stability of

the excavation or adjacent structures, maintain a full work force 24 hours
per day, including weekends and holidays, until emergency or hazardous
conditions no longer jeopardize stability and safety of the Work.
3.7 Underground Access
3.7.1 Provide access for the Owner to inspect and observe the Work, to perform
independent line and grade surveys, and mapping, as deemed necessary
by the Owner.
3.8 Communication Systems
3.8.1 Voice communication shall be provided between the surface and

underground work areas at all times. The communications system may be
by a fixed-wire system, protected by an enclosure or location.
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
3.8.2 Each field office of the Owner shall be provided with one fixed-wire device
dedicated to maintaining communication with the underground work area
at all times. In addition, each field office of the Owner shall be provided
with four radios and chargers of the same type and including all
frequencies and channels used by the Contractor.
3.8.3 Fixed communications wiring and equipment shall be located away from
fire sources such as, but not limited to, transformer and conveyor systems.
3.8.4 Fixed-wire communications equipment along the tunnel alignment shall be

located as to avoid unnecessary reaching or climbing on the tunnel walls
for access.
3.8.5 Where radio system(s) are used for emergency communications, repeater
systems shall be so installed and located as to ensure uninterrupted and
audible communications between the surface and underground work
locations.
3.8.6 All communications equipment (primary and secondary) shall be tested

weekly and a record of the tests maintained by the Contractor for the
duration of the Work.
3.9 Water Control
3.9.1 Water control shall be performed in accordance with 01 57 23 Diversion

and Care of Water.
3.9.2 The Contractor shall promptly and continuously control groundwater inflow
or dispose of all water from any source that may accumulate in the tunnel.
This shall include all necessary pumping, bailing, draining and
sedimentation prior to discharge
3.9.3 Furnish, install, operate, and maintain temporary drainage facilities of

adequate size and capacity to collect and dispose of water that enters the
tunnel. The dewatering facilities shall include standby pumps and
emergency backup power for emergency use.
3.9.4 Drainage facilities shall be sized to handle flows including flows from rock
formation as described in the Contract Geotechnical Reports. Water shall
not be permitted to stand at the tunnel face or in working areas.
3.9.5 Treat water as necessary to remove sediments, oil, grease, and other
contaminants prior to discharge.
3.10 Restoration
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
3.10.1 Promptly restore to their original condition any streets, curbs, sidewalks, or
any other facilities which are damaged, moved, or disturbed as a result of
tunnelling operations, portal construction.
(THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK)
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
APPENDIX A – DATA SHEET
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
Technical Design Data Worksheet
PROPOSER'S NAME
INSTRUCTIONS TO PROPOSER
All Sections must be filled in completely. These worksheets are part of the Technical Proposal.
1 GENERAL DATA
1.1 EXCAVATION DIAMETER mm __________
1.2 OVERALL LENGTH OF SHIELD mm __________
(Over Tailshield)
1.3 OVERALL LENGTH OF BACKUP mm __________
1.4 TOTAL WEIGHT OF TBM & BACKUP Kg __________
1.5 TOTAL WEIGHT OF TBM Kg __________
1.6 MAXIMUM WEIGHT OF BACKUP Kg __________
(Including all Auxiliaries)
1.7 TOTAL INSTALLED POWER kW __________
(Including all Auxiliaries)
2 ELECTRICAL POWER
2.1 CUTTERHEAD DRIVE (VFD) kW __________
2.2 CONTROL SYSTEM kW __________
2.3 SCREW CONVEYOR SYSTEM (EPB MODE) kW __________
2.4 SLURRY SYSTEM (IF APPLICABLE) kW __________
2.5 THRUST SYSTEM kW __________
2.6 ARTICULATION SYSTEM kW __________
2.7 ERECTOR kW __________
2.8 SEGMENT MAGAZINE kW __________
2.9 SEGMENT CRANE(S) kW __________
2.10 PRIMARY CONVEYOR BELT (OPEN MODE) kW __________
2.11 SECONDARY CONVEYOR BELT (EPB MODE) kW __________
2.12 H.P. COMPRESSOR kW __________
2.13 CONDITIONING PLANT kW __________
2.14 GROUTING PLANT kW __________
2.15 DRAINAGE PUMPING SYSTEM kW __________
2.16 TBM VENTILATION SYSTEM kW __________
2.17 EMERGENCY GENERATOR kVA __________
2.18 AUXILIARY SYSTEMS kW __________
(State which Auxiliary Systems are included)
2.19 SPARE CAPACITY kW __________
2.20 TOTAL INSTALLATION kW __________
2.21 TRANSFORMERS:
TOTAL RATING kVA __________
3 CUTTERHEAD DRIVE
3.1 INSTALLED POWER kW __________
3.2 SPEED RANGE RPM __________
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
3.3 LOW SPEED TORQUE kNm-RPM __________

3.4 HIGH SPEED TORQUE kNm-RPM __________
3.5 “BREAKOUT” TORQUE kNm __________
3.6 NUMBER OF DRIVE UNITS No. __________
3.7 MAIN BEARING DATA
MANUFACTURER Name __________
GEAR Int/Ext __________
L10 LIFETIME Hrs __________
4 CUTTERHEAD
4.1 PERCENTAGE OPEN AREA % __________
4.2 NUMBER OF SCRAPER TOOLS No __________
4.3 NUMBER OF RIPPER TOOLS No. __________
4.4 NUMBER OF GAUGE CUTTERS No. __________
4.5 CENTRE CUTTER Type __________
4.6 DISC CUTTING TOOLS Type __________
QUANTITY No. __________
DIAMETER/THRUST mm/kN __________
4.7 ABRASIVE PROTECTION Type __________
THICKNESS mm __________
HARDNESS Rc __________
4.8 CONDITIONING POINTS
LOCATION RADIUS mm __________
5 MAIN BEARING SEALING

5.1 TYPE OF SEALS Type __________
5.2 SEAL MATERIAL Type __________
5.3 SEAL MANUFACTURER Name __________
5.4 SEAL DIMENSIONS
WIDTH/HEIGHT mm ____ / ____
5.5 QUANTITY OF SEALS
INNER SET No. __________
OUTER SET No. __________
5.6 DESIGN PRESSURE (DYNAMIC) bar __________
5.7 DESIGN PRESSURE (STATIC) bar __________
5.8 DESIGN LIFE Hrs __________
5.9 CAPABILITY TO RELOCATE yes/no __________
5.10 METHOD OF LUBRICATION Type __________
5.11 NUMBER OF LUBE PUMP/RESERVOIR No. __________
5.12 CAPACITY RESERVOIR Kg __________
5.13 SYSTEM PRESSURE bar __________
5.14 QUANTITY OF LUBRICATION POINTS
LABYRINTH No. __________
5.15 QUANTITY OF TESTING POINTS
334890-TU-210-S0-0042

6 FORWARD SHIELD
6.1 BULKHEAD DESIGN PRESSURE bar __________
6.2 CONDITIONING POINTS (Size/Number) mm/No. ____ / ____
6.3 EARTH PRESSURE CELLS
ACCURACY bar +/-________
6.4 GROUND TREATMENT PORTS (Peripheral) No.
__________
DIAMETER mm __________
INCLINATION ANGLE Deg. __________
6.5 GROUND TREATMENT PORTS (Bulkhead) No. __________
6.6 DRAINAGE PUMPING PIPES
7 MAIN SHIELD
7.1 SHIELD DIAMETER (Front/Rear) mm ____ / ____
7.2 ABRASIVE PROTECTION Type __________
THICKNESS mm __________
HARDNESS Rc __________
7.3 TOTAL INSTALLED THRUST kN __________
7.4 THRUST CYLINDERS
OPERATION Single/Pair __________
STROKE mm __________
EXTENSION SPEED (All Cylinders) mm/min __________
RETRACT SPEED (All Cylinders) mm/min __________
RETRACT SPEED (Cylinder Groups) mm/min __________
OPERATING PRESSURE bar __________
EXTENSOMETERS:
TYPE Name __________
ACCURACY mm +/-________
7.5 THRUST SHOES:
DIMENSIONS mm __________
PRESSURE ON LINING (Max.) kN/mm2 __________
FACING MATERIAL Type __________
7.6 THRUST ECCENTRICITY mm __________
STANDARD mm __________
MAXIMUM mm __________
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
8 STABILIZER PADS
8.1 QUANTITY ea ___
8.2 MAXIMUM PRESSURE kN/mm2 ___
8.3 DIMENSIONS mm ___
8.4 OPERATION Single/Pair __________
8.5 STROKE mm __________
8.6 EXTENSION SPEED mm/min __________
8.7 RETRACT SPEED mm/min __________
8.8 RETRACT SPEED mm/min __________
8.9 OPERATING PRESSURE bar __________
8.10 EXTENSOMETERS:
8.11 QUANTITY No. __________
8.12 TYPE Name __________
8.13 ACCURACY mm +/-________
9 ARTICULATION
9.1 THRUST FORCE kN __________
9.2 RETRACT FORCE kN __________
9.3 ARTICULATION ANGLE Deg. __________
9.4 ARTICULATION TYPE passive/active __________
9.5 MINIMUM CURVE RADIUS m __________
9.6 CYLINDERS:
QUANTITY No. _________
OPERATING PRESSURE bars __________
EXTENSOMETERS:
TYPE Name __________
ACCURACY mm +/-________
9.7 SEALING SYSTEM:
SEALING PRESSURE bar __________
QUANTITY OF SEALS No. __________
TYPE OF SEALS Type __________
10 TAIL SHIELD
10.1 INTERNAL/EXTERNAL DIAMETER mm ____ / ____
10.2 TAIL SHIELD THICKNESS mm __________
10.3 OVERALL LENGTH mm __________
10.4 ATTACHMENT TO MAIN BODY Type __________
10.5 QUANTITY/TYPE OF TAIL SEAL No./Type __________
10.6 SEAL CAPABILITY bar __________
10.7 GROUT PROVISION:
QUANTITY OF LINES No. __________
SECTION OF LINES cm2 __________
10.8 SEAL LUBRICATION:
QUANTITY OF LINES PER SEAL No. __________
SECTION OF LINES cm2 __________
10.9 SHIELD GROUT SEAL (Outer) Type __________
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
10.10 TAIL VOID GROUT PER RING m3 __________

10.11 TAIL CLEARANCE mm __________
(Internal Diameter Tail to Outer Diameter Ring)
11 SEGMENT ERECTOR
11.1 AXIAL MOVEMENT
11.2 RADIAL MOVEMENT
11.3 PITCH/ROLL/YAW MOVEMENT
PITCH ROLL YAW
STROKE mm __________ __________ __________
ANGLE Deg. __________ __________ __________
11.4 ERECTOR ROTATION:

SPEED RPM __________
TORQUE kNm __________
ANGLE Deg. __________
11.5 CONTROL METHOD Type __________
11.6 VACUUM SYSTEM:
PREVIOUS EXPERIENCE No. __________
PAD DETAILS:
DESIGN VACUUM % __________
MINIMUM VACUUM % __________
SAFETY FACTOR Ratio __________
EMERGENCY HOLD TIME min __________
12 SCREW CONVEYOR
12.1 DESIGN CAPACITY m3/Hr __________
12.2 DESIGN OPERATING SPEED rpm __________
12.3 INTERNAL DIAMETER mm __________
12.4 TYPE OF DRIVE Type __________
12.5 THICKNESS OF CASING mm __________
12.6 TORQUE AT MINIMUM SPEED kNm __________
12.7 TORQUE AT MAXIMUM SPEED kNm __________
12.8 SPEED RANGE RPM __________
12.9 SHAFT DIAMETER mm __________
12.10 SCREW PITCH mm __________
12.11 NUMBER OF PITCHES No. __________
12.12 PROVISION TO RESIST WEAR Describe __________
12.13 MAXIMUM DIMENSIONS OF BOULDER
THAT CAN BE HANDLED mm __________
12.14 OVERALL LENGTH (Including Drive) mm __________
12.15 FLIGHT THICKNESS mm __________
12.16 ABRASION RESISTANCE:
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
AUGER MATERIAL HARDNESS mm/Rc __________

TUBE MATERIAL HARDNESS mm/Rc __________
12.17 TELESCOPIC SECTION
CYLINDERS
THRUST kN __________
RETRACT kN __________
12.18 SCREW (BULKHEAD) DOOR:
DOOR TYPE Type __________
TIME TO CLOSE sec __________
TIME TO OPEN sec __________
12.19 EARTH PRESSURE CELLS:
ACCURACY bar +/-________
12.20 INSPECTION HATCHES:
13 TBM BELT CONVEYOR

13.1 CAPACITY m3/Hr __________
13.2 DRIVE MOTOR:
13.3 QUANTITY No. __________
TYPE Type __________

13.4 BELT SPEED m/sec __________
13.5 BELT WIDTH mm __________
13.6 LENGTH m __________
13.7 DRIVE TENSIONING:
TAKE UP mm __________
THRUST kN __________
13.8 BELT CLEANER:
13.9 INCLINATION Deg. __________
13.10 MODULE LENGTH m __________
13.11 BELT WEIGHERS:
TYPE 1 Type __________
ACCURACY % +/-________
TYPE 2 Type __________
ACCURACY % +/-________
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
14 OPERATOR STATION
14.1 DIMENSIONS (LxWxH) mm __________
14.2 AIR CONDITIONER: yes/no __________
POWER kW __________
14.3 LOCATION Area __________
14.4 CCTV/MONITORS:
14.5 DATALOGGER:
COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATION yes/no __________
14.6 DOUBLE GLAZING yes/no __________
15 CONDITIONING PLANT
15.1 CAPACITY OF PLANT (FOAM) m3/Hr __________
15.2 CAPACITY OF COMPRESSOR m3/Hr __________
15.3 WATER SUPPLY TANK m3 __________
15.4 PRESSURE RANGE bar __________
15.5 DIMENSIONS OF PLANT (LxWxH) mm __________
15.6 FOAM CONCENTRATE TANK m3 __________
15.7 CONCENTRATE RANGE % __________
15.8 INJECTION POINTS:
CUTTERHEAD (Number, Size) No./mm ____ / ____
CHAMBER (Number, Size) No./mm ____ / ____
SCREW (Number, Size) No./mm ____ / ____
15.9 CAPACITY OF POLYMER TANK m3 __________
15.10 POLYMER RANGE % __________
15.11 FLOWMETERS No./Type __________
15.12 QUANTITY OF FOAM PUMPS No. __________
15.13 QUANTITY OF POLYMER PUMPS No. __________
15.14 DRIVE MOTOR CONTROL (FOAM) Type __________
15.15 DRIVE MOTOR CONTROL (POLYMER) Type __________
15.16 MANUFACTURER Name __________
15.17 DISTANCE FROM TUNNEL FACE m __________
16 BENTONITE PLANT
16.1 CAPACITY OF PUMP(S) m3/Hr __________
16.2 QUANTITY OF PUMPS No. __________
16.4 TYPE OF PUMP Type __________
16.5 CAPACITY OF RESERVOIR m3 __________
16.6 DISTRIBUTION METHOD Type __________
16.7 TRANSFER METHOD Type __________
16.9 PRESSURE MONITORING:
RANGE OF PRESSURE bar __________
16.10 VOLUMETRIC MONITORING:
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT m3 __________
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
17 SLURRY SYSTEM (IF APPLICABLE)

17.5 DIAMETER OF PIPING mm __________
17.6 MAXIMUM PARTICLE SIZE (DIAMETER)
THAT MAY BE HANDLED mm __________
17.7 DIMENSIONS OF PLANT (LxWxH) mm __________
17.9 CAPACITY OF PLANT m3/Hr __________
18 ANNULAR GROUTING PLANT

18.5 CAPACITY OF RESERVOIR m3 __________
18.6 DISTRIBUTION METHOD Type __________
18.7 TRANSFER METHOD Type __________
19 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
19.1 TYPE OF SYSTEM Type __________
19.2 QUANTITY OF OUTLETS No. __________
19.3 EXTENSION CAPACITY No. __________
20 SEGMENT HANDLING
20.1 SEGMENT OFFLOADER:
SYSTEM Type __________
CAPACITY kN __________
20.2 SEGMENT CRANES:
20.3 SEGMENT MAGAZINE/FEEDER:
TOW METHOD Type __________
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
CAPACITY No. of Segs. __________

FEED SYSTEM Type __________
STROKE m __________
LENGTH m __________
WEIGHT Kg __________
REVERSING SYSTEM Type __________
21 BACKUP TRAILERS
21.1 OVERALL LENGTH m __________
21.2 QUANTITY No. __________
21.3 CONSTRUCTION Type __________
21.4 DIMENSIONS (LxWxH) mm __________
21.5 WHEELS:
QUANTITY/UNIT No. __________
MATERIAL Type __________
LUBRICATION Type __________
LOAD/WHEEL kN __________
LOCATION Lining/Track __________
21.6 TRACK EXTENSION:
LOCATION Area __________
RAIL LENGTH m __________
RAIL STORE m __________
21.7 TOW CYLINDERS:
TOTAL FORCE kN __________
21.8 STEEL WORK WEIGHT

(Excluding Equipment) Kg __________
21.9 INTER TRAILER JOINT Type __________
21.10 CURVES:
Minimum Horizontal m __________
Minimum Vertical m __________
21.11 RAIL RAMP:
GRADIANT Deg. __________
LENGTH m __________
21.12 ANTI-ROLL DEVICE Type __________
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
22 REFUGE CHAMBER
CAPACITY No __________
SAFE DURATION Hours __________
MAX TEMPERATURE Deg. C __________
MAX TEMPERATURE DURATION Hours __________
FACILITIES List __________
List __________
List __________
List __________
SERVICES List __________
List __________
List __________
List __________
23 GUIDANCE/RING ERECT SYSTEM

23.1 SYSTEM Type __________ __________
23.2 MANUFACTURER Name __________ __________
23.3 MODEL Model __________
__________
23.4 LASER:
MODEL Type __________ __________
POWER mW __________ __________
OPERATING DISTANCE m __________ __________
23.5 LASER WINDOW:
LOCATION Area __________ __________
COORDINATES mm __________ __________
DIMENSIONS (LxWxH) mm __________ __________
24 TBM VENTILATION SYSTEM
24.1 FAN:
CAPACITY m3/Hr __________
STAGES No. __________
POWER kW __________
SILENCER(S) Type.No. __________
24.2 DUCT:
RATING g/m2 __________
AIR SPEED m/sec __________
25 TBM SCRUBBER SYSTEM

25.1 SCRUBBER
25.2 FAN:
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
STAGES No. __________

POWER kW __________
SILENCER(S) Type.No. __________
25.3 DUCT:
RATING g/m2 __________
AIR SPEED m/sec __________
26 HIGH TENSION CABLE REEL
26.1 CAPACITY m __________
26.2 CABLE:
VOLTAGE RATING V __________
26.3 CABLE CONNECTOR Type
__________
27 TUNNEL VENT CASSETTE SYSTEM

27.1 DUCT:
CAPACITY m __________
WEIGHT g/m2 __________
27.2 SYSTEM DIMENSIONS:
LxWxH mm __________
WEIGHT (EMPTY) Kg __________
27.3 CASSETTE DIMENSIONS:
LxWxH mm __________
WEIGHT (EMPTY) Kg __________

WEIGHT (FULL) Kg __________
27.4 LIFTING EQUIPMENT:
SPEED m/min __________
28 GAS MONITORING SYSTEM

Oxygen No/Locations __________
Methane No/Locations __________
Hydrogen Sulphide No/Locations
Sulphur Dioxide No/Locations ____
Nitroux Oxide No/Locations ____
Nitrogen Dioxide No/Locations ____
Carbon Monoxide No/Locations
Carbon Dioxide No/Locations
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
29 H.P. COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM

29.1 COMPRESSOR:
CAPACITY m3/min __________
POWER kW __________
PRESSURE RANGE bar __________
RECEIVER CAPACITY m3 __________
30 EMERGENCY GENERATOR
30.1 GENERATOR:
POWER kW __________
FUEL TANK Liters __________
ENGINE TYPE Model __________
RUN TIME Hrs __________
31 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
31.1 RESERVOIR:
CAPACITY m3 __________
31.2 OIL:
GRADE Grade __________
31.3 FILTRATION Micron __________
31.4 PUMP TYPE/MODEL (List other pumps):
CUTTERHEAD Type __________
Model __________
Pressure bar __________
Number No. __________
BOOST Type __________
Model __________
Number No. __________
CONTROL Type __________

Model __________
Number No. __________
THRUST Type __________

Model __________
Number No. __________
SCREW Type __________

Model __________
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
Number No. __________
ARTICULATION Type __________

Model __________
Number No. __________
CONVEYORS Type __________

Model __________
Number No. __________
ERECTOR ROTATE Type __________

Model __________
ERECTOR AUXILIARY Type __________

Model __________
ANCILLARY SYSTEMS Type __________

Model __________
31.5 POWER DISSIPATED AS HEAT

(Including all auxiliaries) kW __________
31.6 TOTAL WATER COOLING REQUIREMENT
FLOW 1/min __________
TEMPERATURE ºC __________
(END OF SECTION)
334890-TU-210-S0-0042
31 74 16 Precast Concrete Tunnel Lining (PCTL)

TMEP-TU-1500, Revision C, July 4, 2016
REVISION INDEX
Rev Prepared by/ Reviewed by/ Approved by/ Client Approval Pages Remarks
No. Date Date Date Revised
Dani Delaloye Martin Tyrlik Dave Young

A Draft – Issued for RFP
2015-05-04 2015-05-04 2015-05-04
Daniel Jezek Dave Young Adam Neale
B Issued for 90% Design
2015-12-11 2015-12-11 2015-12-11
Reza Shobayry Brian Garrod Adam Neale
C Issued for 90% Design
2016-07-04 2016-07-04 2016-07-04
334890-TU-210-S0-0044
TMEP-TU-1500 Revision C July 4, 2016 Page 2 of 22
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 3
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 3
1.2 Scope of Work ........................................................................................... 5
1.6 Finishes ..................................................................................................... 9
1.7 Tolerances ............................................................................................... 10
1.8 Design Requirements .............................................................................. 10
1.9 Performance Requirements ..................................................................... 10
1.10 Submittals ................................................................................................ 11
1.11 Test Assemblies ...................................................................................... 12
2.0 PRODUCTS ....................................................................................................... 12

2.1 Materials .................................................................................................. 12
2.2 Equipment................................................................................................ 13
3.0 EXECUTION....................................................................................................... 14

3.1 Casting Preparation ................................................................................. 14
3.2 Segment Casting ..................................................................................... 14
3.3 Consolidating ........................................................................................... 15
3.4 Curing ...................................................................................................... 15
3.5 Storage, Protection, and Handling ........................................................... 15
3.6 Gasket Installation: .................................................................................. 16
3.7 Repair of Defects ..................................................................................... 16
3.8 Precast Concrete Lining Erection ............................................................ 17
334890-TU-210-S0-0044
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction

PC-001.


following:


Trans Mountain



334890-TU-210-S0-0044
H. 1620 Shotcrete
N. 2510 Site Restoration 2600 Secant Pile Wall
O. 2700 Concrete Reinforcement
P. 2600 Secant Pile Wall
334890-TU-210-S0-0044
1.2 Scope of Work
1.2.1 This specification covers the production of precast concrete tunnel lining
(PCTL) segments, complete with accessories, for use as lining rings in
bored tunnel and their delivery to the Delivery Site.
1.2.2 Furnish all labour, materials, tools, and equipment and perform all
operations necessary or incidental for the complete manufacture of the
precast, segmented, reinforced concrete tunnel lining as specified herein.
1.3.2 31 73 00 Tunnel Annular Grouting
1.3.3 03 15 00 PCTL Concrete Accessories
1.3.4 03 20 00.1 Concrete Reinforcement for PCTL
1.3.5 03 30 00.1 Concrete for PCTL

334890-TU-210-S0-0044

1.5.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA):
1.5.2.1 CSA A23.1-14 / CSA A23.2-14, Concrete materials and

methods of concrete construction / Test methods and standard
practices for concrete
1.5.2.2 CSA A23.4-16, Precast Concrete - Methods and Construction
1.5.2.3 CSA A283-06 (R2016) - Qualification Code for Concrete Testing

Laboratories Quality Control and Quality Assurance
1.5.3 General
1.5.3.1 Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the

Work except when more stringent tolerances or codes indicate
higher standards or more precise workmanship.
1.5.3.2 Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract

Documents, request clarification from the Owner before
proceeding.
1.5.3.3 Perform Work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of

specified quality.
1.5.3.4 Work to be done away from the Site is subject to inspection on

behalf of the Owner during its fabrication, manufacture, or
testing, or before shipment. Give notice to the Owner of the
place and time where such fabrication, manufacture, testing or
shipping is to be done. Such notice shall be in writing and
delivered to the Owner at least seven (7) days prior to the
requirement so that the necessary arrangements for inspection
and witnessing or shop tests can be made.
1.5.3.5 Where tests or inspections are called prematurely or the testing

laboratory is delayed by the Contractor, the Contractor will pay
all additional costs incurred.
334890-TU-210-S0-0044
1.5.3.6 Where tests or additional tests show the work to be outside

contractual requirements, the Contractor shall dispose of the
defective work and replace with new at his own cost.
1.5.3.7 Provide steel templates, gauges and testing apparatus, as

required to enable the measurement of tolerances to ensure
that each segment falls within two concentric volumes in space
represented at the maximum and minimum dimensions allowed.
Keep suitably protected from damage and distortion, free from
dirt and corrosion and ready for use in checking the segments
as described hereinafter.
1.5.3.8 Before ordering any material, notify the Owner in advance

where such material is to be obtained.
1.5.3.9 The first segment cast in any mould shall be gauged.

Thereafter a minimum of 2% of the segments from each mould
shall be gauged. When any variation in segment quality has
occurred, the number of segments gauged shall be increased to
that required to re-establish the accuracy and consistency of
production as directed by the Owner.
1.5.3.10 A record shall be kept of all the units cast in each mould and
any mould that becomes distorted or which casts faulty units
shall be withdrawn from service until it is proved to the
satisfaction of the Owner to be corrected.
1.5.3.11 All units of the same type shall be interchangeable and the
dimensions for each unit shown on the Drawings shall be
accurately reproduced within the tolerances indicated on the
Drawings. The accuracy of the orientation of the joint surfaces
is of great importance.
1.5.3.12 At a minimum frequency of one per thousand of the castings

from each mould, segments picked at random or by the Owner
shall be built to form rings on the master rings to ensure that
tolerances and interchangeability of segments are being
maintained. Shave dowel threads used in the test ring for a
snug fit. Ring orientation relative to the master ring shall be
determined by the Owner.
1.5.3.13 Check formwork dimensions prior to each production pour to

ensure tolerances of each mould are being maintained. Check
a minimum of 2% of each segment type produced on each shift
334890-TU-210-S0-0044
and, as a minimum, ensure that one (1) segment from each

mould is checked weekly for dimensions and tolerances.
1.5.3.14 Check reinforcement cages and other embedments within each

mould for dimensions and concrete cover.
1.5.3.15 Minimum quality control requirements for concrete are specified

in 03 30 00.1 Concrete for PCTL.
1.5.3.16 Test to determine the in-place strength of concrete prior to lifting

and for proving the attainment of the design strength.
1.5.3.17 Verify that the segments have attained the design strength prior
to shipping through a combination of in-place strength testing
and comparison with strength gain-maturity curves. Verify
results with cylinder tests from concrete cured with segments.
1.5.4 Manufacturer Qualifications:
1.5.4.1 Employ qualified firm regularly engaged in the manufacture and

fabrication of precast concrete tunnel lining segments of similar
dimensions and tolerances to those specified, and who has
provided precision tunnel rings in the last five years for at least
three large projects comparable to the work of this Contract in size
and type.
1.5.4.2 Employ personnel fully qualified and experienced in the

manufacture and installation of gaskets and mechanically
connected precast concrete tunnel lining. Lead personnel shall
have a minimum of five years experience on similar projects.
1.5.4.3 Plant Manager: A minimum of 10 years of demonstrated successful

experience in the field of precast concrete tunnel lining production
as PCTL plant manager, and/or specialist consultant and/or senior
supervisor for PCTL plant setup with responsibilities that include
effectively directing the setup arrangements and lining production
start and production process.
1.5.5 Inspection and Testing by Tunnel Contractor
334890-TU-210-S0-0044
1.5.5.1 Be responsible for quality control inspection and testing as required

by the Contract Documents, statutes, regulations, by-laws,
standards or codes or any other jurisdictional authority. Give the
Owner timely notice of the readiness for inspection, date and time
for such inspection for attendance by the Owner.
1.5.6 Inspection and Testing by Owner
1.5.6.1 Owner shall appoint an independent inspection and testing

company to carry out quality assurance inspection and testing of
the Work for conformance to the Contract Documents. Such costs
for inspection and testing will be paid by the Owner. However, any
additional inspection and testing due to non-conformance to the
Contract Documents shall be at the Contractor's expense.
1.5.6.2 Owner may carry out its own inspection and testing program that is
normally considered appropriate for Quality Control of the Work.
Inspection and testing by the Owner will not relieve the Contractor
of their contractual responsibility.
1.5.6.3 Inspections and testing by the Owner will be promptly made.

Uncover for examination any Work covered up prior to inspection
or without consent of the Owner. Make good such Work at no cost
to the Owner.
1.5.6.4 The Owner shall inspect and test Products during manufacture,
fabrication, and shop testing phases of the Contract. The Owner
will ascertain the quantity and quality of testing to be performed.
Inspection and testing shall be performed at the place of
manufacture/fabrication or storage as designated by the Owner.
Where inspection and testing is done either during manufacture or
fabrication, ensure that proper facilities and assistance are
provided.
1.6 Finishes
1.6.1 On formed surfaces, the maximum local irregularity acceptable shall be

rounded protrusions of 0.5 mm height above the general concrete surface.
Larger irregularities may be accepted if they are abraded back giving no
clear transition to the surrounding surface. A protrusion on segment joints
is considered as rounded when one can freely slide a packer, guide rod or
gasket over it, depending on the location.
334890-TU-210-S0-0044
1.6.2 If the extrados of the segments is not formed it shall have a steel trowel
finish and shall comply with the following:
1.6.2.1 The maximum local irregularity shall be rounded protrusions of 2

mm height above the general concrete surface.
1.6.2.2 The maximum surface irregularity over an area of 500 mm by

500 mm shall be 3 mm from maximum height to maximum
depth.
1.6.3 Compliance with the above finish limitations shall not eliminate the need to
meet tolerances specified on the Drawings.
1.7 Tolerances
1.7.1.1 Tolerances for segments are shown on the Drawings.
1.7.1.2 Reinforcing shall be placed within moulds to provide the

minimum cover between steel and concrete surface shown on
the Drawings.
1.7.1.3 Bolt inserts shall be located within 1 mm of the theoretical

location.
1.8 Design Requirements
1.8.1 The design is detailed on the Drawings.
1.8.2 The design has taken into account, as a minimum, loading conditions as
defined in the Contract Geotechnical Reports, long-term soil loads,
external hydrostatic loads, annular grouting pressures up to a maximum 5
bars, and deformation imposed by the soil, as it interacts with the lining to
redistribute loads over the available radial joint bearing surfaces.
Construction loads such as erection and thrust forces, up to a maximum of
1100 kN on each of 16 thrusting rams, are assumed to be uniformly and
concentrically distributed over the available circumferential joint bearing
surface areas, exclusive of joint intersections and gaskets. If the
Contractor supplied TBM imposed construction load exceed these values,
notify the Owner at the onset of the project. The cost of segment re-design
for higher loads shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.8.3 Concentric load distribution areas both in radial and circumferential joints
require equidistantly distributed joint connectors as specified herein.
1.9 Performance Requirements
334890-TU-210-S0-0044
1.9.1 Furnish a segmental precast concrete lining system, produced to the

tolerances specified on the Drawings, capable of:
1.9.1.1 Erection within the TBM by lifting insert or by vacuum pick up.
1.9.1.2 Providing a watertight barrier against specified hydraulic and

grouting pressures when erected within specified erection
tolerances and made from the materials specified in 03 15 00
PCTL Concrete Accessories, and 03 20 00.1 Concrete
Reinforcement for PCTL.
1.9.1.3 Resisting loads imposed during manufacturing, handling,

storage and transport.
1.10 Submittals
1.10.1 General

1.10.2 Shop Drawings: At least 30 days prior to commencing PCTL production

activities, submit the following:
1.10.2.1 For each type of segment, details of reinforcement, mechanical

joint connection assemblies, caulking grooves, lifting/grout
insert, shear pockets, gasket grooves and gaskets. No
segments shall be cast until shop drawings are reviewed by the
Owner.
1.10.2.2 Drawings showing layout of facilities for casting, curing and

storing segments.
1.10.2.3 A detailed description of procedures for fabricating, handling,

transporting, and storing segments, including calculations of
stresses during handling.
1.10.2.4 Data to demonstrate that the mould design will provide the
rigidity and strength required to maintain the dimensions and
tolerances of construction indicated herein.
1.10.2.5 Details of the curing process from segment casting to fourteen

(14) days after casting, with test data including temperature
gradient measurements from trial segments to verify that curing
requirements can be achieved.
334890-TU-210-S0-0044
1.10.2.6 Submit data to show that the proposed consolidation and curing
process will result in uncracked segments with the strength,
permeability and diffusion properties specified and an
acceptable air-void system.
1.10.2.7 Submit data establishing the relationships between strength

gain and curing time at the range of temperatures anticipated
during the curing process.
1.10.2.8 Notify the Owner in writing when the precast segmented rings
are to be manufactured and make arrangements for inspection
by the Owner.
1.10.3 Qualifications: At least 30 days prior to commencing PCTL production

activities, submit the following
1.10.3.1 Submit to the Owner, for review, the names of experienced,

competent key project staff.
1.10.3.2 All work to be supervised by a Plant Manager who shall be at

the manufacturing facility each day of production.
1.11 Test Assemblies
1.11.1 Erect two (2) full tunnel lining rings, one on top of the other, with packers
but without gaskets, vertically on a flat level base (“test bed”) to
demonstrate the accuracy of segments within the allowable tolerances.
One (1) set shall have an up-down configuration (tangent alignment), and
the other a left-right configuration (curved alignment).
1.11.2 The lower ring shall be retained as a master ring for the duration of the
Contract. The segments forming this ring may be selectively handpicked;
the segments for the other shall be picked at random or by the Owner.
1.11.3 The test bed shall be located under cover, equipped with cranage and
kept clean and dry.
1.11.4 Furnish all necessary tools and equipment to measure the required
dimensions, at no additional cost to the Owner.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
334890-TU-210-S0-0044
2.1.1 Concrete
2.1.1.1 Concrete shall be furnished in accordance with the

requirements of Section 03 30 00.1 Concrete for PCTL.
2.2 Equipment
2.2.1 Moulds
2.2.1.1 The moulds are to be supplied only by a manufacturer

specializing in mould production. Acceptable manufacturers are
CSI, CBE, Herrenknecht, Ceresola or as approved by the
Owner. However, by this Clause the Owner does not warrant or
guarantee the quality or suitability of the product supplied by
these manufactures whatsoever.
2.2.1.2 The moulds for the precast concrete segments shall be strongly
constructed with smooth casting faces so that a true sound
concrete surface may be formed. Joints are to be completely
tight and closed to prevent the escape of cement paste from the
concrete. Mould surfaces shall be prepared to provide the
segment with finished surfaces free from irregularities.
2.2.1.3 Moulds shall be designed and constructed to produce segments

that will conform to the dimensions and tolerances required.
Segments of common dimensions and cast in different moulds
shall be interchangeable.
2.2.1.4 All chamfer and radius strips, bolt pockets, bolt holes, spacers,
etc., shown on the Drawings are to be provided.
2.2.1.5 Moulds shall be provided with individual identifications to ensure

that all segments cast are marked with this identity and are fully
traceable.
2.2.1.6 Mould joint surfaces shall form a flat plane.
2.2.1.7 Loose mould components that affect the integrity of the mould
shall be clearly identified as being part of the main mould.
2.2.1.8 All inserts used to form the bolt pockets, bolt holes, grout holes,
etc. shall be made of steel or approved material with equivalent
coefficient of thermal expansion.
334890-TU-210-S0-0044
2.2.1.9 If concrete moulds are proposed they shall have means to

preheat the mould to a uniform temperature of at least 35ºC, or
10ºC above the delivery temperature of the concrete.
2.2.1.10 Details of the proposed moulds shall be submitted to the Owner

for review.
2.2.1.11 Allow for inspection of moulds by the Owner at the mould

manufacturers facility prior to shipping of moulds. Provide sixty
(60) day notice prior to date of mould inspection.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Casting Preparation
3.1.1 Reinforcement spacers shall be fixed so that the reinforcement is held

firmly in the correct position within the formwork with all the cover as
specified. The spacers shall be rigidly fixed to the reinforcement to
prevent displacement. If the spacers are wired on, the ends of the wires
shall be turned into the unit.
3.1.2 Spacers shall not be used in the circumferential or radial gasket regions.
3.1.3 All spacers shall be saturated with clean water prior to use. Spacers shall
not be allowed to dry out after being fixed to reinforcement cages before
the concrete is cast.
3.2 Segment Casting
3.2.1 The segments shall be produced under plant controlled conditions with
production areas protected against rain, dust and direct sunlight.
3.2.2 Each segment shall have cast into the inside surface:
3.2.2.1 Type of segment.
3.2.2.2 Mould number.
3.2.3 Placing concrete in hot weather (when air temperature is at or greater than
27° C) shall conform to CSA A23.1 and CSA A23.4. The initial concrete
placement temperature shall be less than 25° C.
3.2.4 Placing concrete in cold weather (when air temperature is forecast to be

lower than 20° within a twenty-four (24) hour period) shall conform to CSA
A23.1-M and CSA A23.4-M. The initial concrete placement temperature
shall be greater than 20° C.
334890-TU-210-S0-0044
3.3 Consolidating
3.3.1 In accordance with CSA A23.1, Clause 7.2.5.
3.3.2 Work concrete into complete contact with forms and embedded items.
Consolidate concrete adjacent to side forms and along the entire length of
forms to ensure a smooth surface finish after stripping of formwork.
3.4 Curing
3.4.1 Segments shall not be removed from their moulds until a minimum
compressive strength of 15 MPa is attained or greater if a higher strength
is necessary to handle without causing damage or stress to the segments.
3.4.2 Curing shall be performed in accordance to CSA A23.1 Clause 23. Submit
methods and procedures to the Owner for review.
3.4.3 Steam curing at atmospheric pressure, if performed, shall be in

accordance with CSA A23.4-M Accelerated Curing with a maximum
temperature of 55ºC. Submit methods and procedures to the Owner for
review.
3.4.4 Protect the segments from thermal shock. Utilize thermal blankets to
minimize thermal shock. Do not allow rate of change of temperature to
exceed 15ºC per hour. Do not allow a concrete temperature difference of
more than 10ºC between any two points of the segment at any time.
3.4.5 Membrane curing compounds are not permitted.
3.5 Storage, Protection, and Handling
3.5.1 Provide a stockyard for the storage for completed and accepted segments
in units of complete rings.
3.5.2 Stockyard shall be prepared and maintained to be suitable for the storage
and handling of segments, including preparing subgrade and laying out
the stockpiles with due consideration to safety, accessibility, clearance for
handling equipment, drainage, snow removal, parking, lighting and
security.
3.5.3 Owner to have access to stockyards at all times.
3.5.4 When handling and storing segments, supports shall be used to avoid
damage or subjecting segments to undue strain.
334890-TU-210-S0-0044
3.5.5 Prevent damage to segment surfaces during handling and storage. Wire
ropes, chains or hooks shall be kept from direct contact with the segment
surfaces, joint assemblies and gaskets.
3.5.6 Plant and field inventories of segments, that have gaskets installed, shall
not be stored out-of-doors for more than three hundred and sixty-five (365)
calendar days, unless protected from sunlight and weather. The
Manufacturer shall warrant that the gaskets will not deteriorate during
exposure to sunlight or ozone for this period.
3.5.7 During cold weather, water shall be prevented from filling the pockets and
recesses of the segments and freezing.
3.5.8 Arrange transportation of segments to the Site. Conform with the

requirements of the police authorities, rush hour restrictions, local bylaws
and instructions that may be given from time to time by the Owner.
3.5.9 The Contractor shall transport, repair or replace such segments at no cost
to the Owner.
3.6 Gasket Installation:
3.6.1.1 Install gasket utilizing bonding agent recommended by the

gasket supplier, and approved by the Owner.
3.6.1.2 Gasket shall be affixed as per method recommended by the

gasket manufacturer.
3.7 Repair of Defects
3.7.1 Concrete segments with major damage which, in the opinion of the
Owner, impairs structural integrity or performance will be rejected and
must be replaced at no cost to the Owner.
3.7.2 The following procedures cover patching and repair of concrete segments
with non-structural damage that will be used for correction of defects in the
concrete.
3.7.2.1 Segments which show excessive crazing, damage or defects

shall be recorded and investigated to determine the cause.
Such segments shall, after completion of the investigation, be
rejected or accepted following repair.
3.7.2.2 Cosmetic repairs of edge damage, scuff damage, and blow

holes shall be performed where damage or a defect exceeds
that listed in the following table.
334890-TU-210-S0-0044
3.7.2.3 Circumferential and radial edges shall be stone rubbed to

remove sharp edges.
3.7.2.4 Repair of damage shall be performed as indicated in Table 3-1.
3.8 Precast Concrete Lining Erection
3.8.1.1 When the average daily temperature is below 5 deg C, provide

a heated enclosure to maintain the segments temperature at a
minimum of 5 deg C for a minimum of 12 hours immediately
prior to shipment into the tunnel.
3.8.1.2 Construct rings to correct line and grade, to preserve the

circular form of the tunnel, and preserve plane of face of rings in
a manner which will not throw ring out of position or dislodge
previously erected rings.
3.8.1.3 Handle segments during transportation and erection processes

so as to prevent damage.
3.8.1.4 Verify that no damage has occurred to the lining gaskets and
packers during shipment and after transport into the tunnel and
prior to lining erection.
3.8.1.5 Ensure foam strips and compression packers are properly

positioned and attached at all times.
3.8.1.6 Thoroughly clean all faces of all tunnel lining segments prior to
adjacent faces being brought together.
3.8.1.7 Use only methods of lining erection that have been reviewed
and accepted by the Owner.
3.8.1.8 Erect rings within the protection of the TBM tail shield in the
order and with the taper orientation required to follow the
designed tunnel alignment. Ensure that construction of the
tunnel is to the designed tunnel alignment and within all
specified tolerances.
3.8.1.9 Perform plane checks on circumferential joint surfaces every

five rings. Correct out-of-plane conditions using additional
packers to within ± 2 mm.
3.8.1.10 Locate keys in upper half of ring insofar as possible.
334890-TU-210-S0-0044
3.8.1.11 Excavate for a length sufficient only for the erection of one ring
after the previous ring has been erected and grouted.
3.8.1.12 Fully tighten bolts on radial joints at the time each segment is
positioned to maintain joint faces and gaskets in compression.
Torque all bolts sufficiently to maintain gasket compression prior
to releasing thrust jacks.
3.8.1.13 Segments sustaining damage during erection shall be replaced

or repaired at the discretion of, and to the satisfaction of Owner.
3.8.1.14 Clearly number every fifth ring following erection using stencilled
paint or similar with 75 mm high characters.
3.8.1.15 On completion of tunnelling, and within 24 hours prior to placing

invert or walkway concrete, thoroughly clean and wash lining to
remove all foreign material
334890-TU-210-S0-0044
TABLE 3-1 REPAIR OF DAMAGE

Class of Damage/
Description Location Extent Remedy
Defect
Class A1: Non- Blow holes and air All locations except Diameter > 20 mm Repair Procedure
Structural Patching voids at gasket groove, or depth > 5 mm 2A
intrados and
caulking groove
Class B: Non- Blow holes and air Gasket groove > 3 mm diameter Repair Procedure 1
Structural Patching voids
Class C: Non- Chipping and Gasket groove Area: Use Procedure 2A
Structural Cosmetic spalling edges Length > 25 mm x or 2B
Depth > 5 mm
Class D: Non- Chipping and Allocations except Area: Use Procedure 2A
Structural spalling as noted in C > 40 mm x 40 mm or 2B
Cosmetic or depth > 15 mm
Class E1: Surface Local protrusions Non-formed > 5 mm high Stone rubbed or
Irregularities surfaces ground
Class E2: Surface Local protrusions Formed surfaces > 1 mm high Stone rubbed, check
Irregularities mould
Class F1: Localized Minor non- Gasket groove and Cracks < 0.2 mm No repair
Surface Cracking and structural local extrados edge on wide
Crazing defects joint faces
Class F2: Localized Gasket groove and Cracks > 0.2 mm Review for approval
Surface Cracking and extrados edge on wide of repair procedure
Crazing joint faces
Class F3: Localized Extrados and all Cracks < 0.2 mm No repair
Surface Cracking and locations not noted wide
Crazing in F1 or F2
Class G1: Structural Radial joint bearing Any crack Review for approval
Cracks areas only of repair procedure
Class G2: Structural Circumferential joint Cracks < 0.05 mm No repair
Cracks bearing area only wide
Class G3: Structural Cracks > 0.05 mm Use Procedure 3
Cracks and < 0.2 mm
wide that do not
cross the gasket
groove
Class G5: Structural Multiple cracks > Reject segment
Cracks 0.2 mm wide
emanating from a
single source and
producing a
wedge pattern on
the bearing face
Class G6: Structural CSA Standard Cracks > 0.2 mm Review for approval
Cracks CAN 3-A23.4 wide of repair procedure
Definition 33.3.2
Class H: Broken Structural crack Through segment Full depth Reject segment
Segment
Class J1: At locations within Reject segment
Honeycombing the circle and radial
joint bearing areas
Class J2: All locations except Use Procedure 2B
Honeycombing as noted in J1
Class K: Structural Damage exposing All surfaces except To be assessed Review for approval
Damage reinforcing radial joints by examination of repair procedure
334890-TU-210-S0-0044
3.8.2 Repair procedures shall be as indicated in Table 3-1:
TABLE 3-2 REPAIR PROCEDURES

Repair Procedure 1
Material: Type 30 Cement (High Early)
Type 20 White Portland Cement
Silica Sand
Mix at the rate of one part cement to 2.5 parts sand, with 0.4
water/cement ratio. Proportion White Portland Cement as
required for color matching.
Procedure: 1. Clean and wire brush off all dirt and dust from areas to be
filled. Dampen repair area with water.
2. Measure and mix cement and sand with water in accordance
with the instructions. Do not re-temper mixture with water.
3. Fill the repair area, and sack rub the finished surface.
334890-TU-210-S0-0044
Repair Procedures 2A and 2B

Material 2A to be used in areas less than 40 mm long and 15 mm deep.
Material: Sikadur 31 Epoxy Mortar or approved alternative.
Mix in one-to-one ratio by volume adding oven-dried silica sand

until a uniform and consistent mix is achieved. Do not mix a
quantity larger than can be used within 30 minutes.
Procedure: 1. Repair area must be dry. Remove any dust, laitance,
grease, oils or loose materials from the area to be repaired
and wire brush.
2. Place mixed material into the void working the material by
trowel or spatula to ensure bond. Strike off level to existing
concrete.
3. Cure the epoxy mortar at a minimum temperature of 40
degrees F.
4. Ensure accurate profile by removing any excess mortar by
grinding.
Material 2B to be used on area in excess of 40 mm long and 15 mm deep.
Material: Master Builders EMACO S88-CA, or approved alternative.
Mix at the rate of 25 kg bag EMACO with 2.7 to 3.8 litres of

water (10.5% - 15% by weight).
Procedure: 1. Saw-cut all edges of repair to a depth of 15 mm with
mechanical disc.
2. Break back to sound concrete and remove surplus material
by low impact method. Clean and wire brush off all loose
particles, dirt and dust from areas to be filled. Soak burlap or
sponge over the repair area to dampen for a period of 2
hours.
3. Measure and mix the patching compound with water in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Do not re-
temper mixture with water.
4. Fill the repair area, and finish open edges with a steel trowel
and use temporary formwork when necessary, ensuring that
repair material is thoroughly compacted.
5. Place a damp rag over the patch area and keep moist for a
period of 7 days until patch material is sufficiently cured.
334890-TU-210-S0-0044
REPAIR PROCEDURE 3 - CRACK SEALING

Material: Sikadur Injection Gel or approved alternative.
Mix in a ratio of 1:1 in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendation. Do not prepare more resin than can be used
within 20 minutes.
Procedure: 1. Concrete must be clean and sound. Remove dust, laitance,
grease, form oil, and foreign particles with a damp to dry
cloth or sponge. Do not contaminate inside of crack.
2a. Mix injection gel from coaxial cartridges by gunning equal
beads on to a pallet and mixing thoroughly to a uniform color
using a putty knife or spatula.
2b. Using a putty knife or spatula, force material into the crack to
seal it.
3. Wipe excess resin from the surface, adjacent to the crack,
using a dry cloth.
4. Allow to cure for four hours before removing any remaining
excess material with a rubbing stone.
3.8.3 Load testing may be specified by the Owner, particularly for any repairs of
concrete near the lifting/shear inserts.
3.8.4 In all cases, acceptance or rejection of a repaired segment shall be at the

discretion of the Owner.
(END OF SECTION)
334890-TU-210-S0-0044
31 73 13 Tunnel Annular Grouting

TMEP-TU-1600, Revision C, July 4, 2016
REVISION INDEX
Dani Delaloye Daniel Jezek Dave Young
2015-05-04 2015-05-04 2015-05-04
2015-12-11 2015-12-11 2015-12-11
2016-07-04 2016-07-04 2016-07-04
334890-TU-210-S0-0045
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 2
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 2
1.2 Scope of Work ........................................................................................... 4
1.7 Design Requirements ................................................................................ 7
1.8 Submittals .................................................................................................. 7
2.0 PRODUCTS ....................................................................................................... 10

2.1 Materials .................................................................................................. 10
2.2 Equipment................................................................................................ 11
3.0 EXECUTION....................................................................................................... 12

3.1 General .................................................................................................... 12
3.2 Annulus Grout .......................................................................................... 13
3.3 Proof Grout .............................................................................................. 14
3.4 Clean-Up.................................................................................................. 14
3.5 Field Quality Control ................................................................................ 15
334890-TU-210-S0-0045
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction

PC-001.


following:


Trans Mountain


334890-TU-210-S0-0045
H. 1620 Shotcrete
334890-TU-210-S0-0045
1.2 Scope of Work
1.2.1 This Specification includes requirements for labour, products, equipment

and services necessary for tunnel grouting work.
1.2.2 The work includes, but is not limited to the following:
1.2.2.1 Requirements for designing and testing grout mix.
1.2.2.2 Provision and injection of grout to fill the annular space between
the precast tunnel lining and the excavated space formed by the
tunnel boring machine.
1.2.2.3 Proof grouting
334890-TU-210-S0-0045
1.3.1 31 71 20 TBM Tunnelling
1.4.1 Annulus Filling: Provision and injection of grout to completely fill the
annular space between the precast concrete tunnel lining and the cavity
excavated by the Tunnel Boring Machine (TBM) through ports within the
segments.

1.4.3 Proof Grouting: Provision and injection of grout through grout ports
provided in the precast concrete segments to verify that the annular space
between the precast concrete tunnel lining and the cavity excavated by
the TBM is completely filled.
1.4.4 Testing Laboratory: A Contractor provided certified laboratory responsible

for calibrating and testing the accuracy of the master gauges and meters.
1.5.2 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1.5.2.1 ASTM C39/C39M-16, Standard Test Method for Compressive

Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
1.5.2.2 ASTM C109/C109M-16a, Test Method for Compressive Strength

of Hydraulic Cement Mortars
1.5.2.3 ASTM C150/C150M-16, Specification for Portland Cement
1.5.2.4 ASTM C494/C494M-15a, Specification for Chemical Admixtures

for Concrete
1.5.2.5 ASTM C827/C827M-10, Standard Test Method for Change in

Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens of Cementitious
Mixtures
334890-TU-210-S0-0045
1.5.3 Where standards identify conflicting requirements, the more stringent

requirement shall apply unless otherwise specified herein.
1.6.1 Qualifications:
1.6.1.1 Grouting Supervisor: The Contractor shall retain a Grouting

Supervisor to manage the grouting program by designing, testing
and overseeing the injection of grout mixes of the type required,
shall have at least 10-years of related Work experience on similar
projects. The Grouting Supervisor shall be familiar with the type of
grout set-up on the TBM.
1.6.2 Quality Control Plan:
1.6.2.1 Comply with the specified standards as a minimum quality for the
Work except when more stringent tolerances or codes indicate
higher standards or more precise workmanship.
1.6.2.2 Should the manufacturers' printed instructions conflict with the

Specifications, the Contractor shall request clarification from the
Owner before proceeding.
1.6.2.3 Preconstruction testing of Annular Grout:
A. Provide a testing apparatus and procedure to demonstrate the

strength gain and gel time characteristics of the grout. The
Contractor shall carry out parallel testing using a strength-
monitoring device suitable for use in the tunnel.
B. Submit test results demonstrating the attainment of the

specified minimum twenty-eight day compressive strength in
accordance with ASTM C39.
1.6.2.4 Production testing of Annular Grout:
A. Grout samples for testing shall be taken from the grout tanks
on the TBM trailing gear.
B. Measure the early strength gain using the procedure developed

in Subparagraph 1.6.2.3.A above, with at least one test for
every two rings grouted.
334890-TU-210-S0-0045
C. Test 28 days strength of two test cubes in accordance with

ASTM C39 for each shift that grouting is performed.
1.6.3 Certifications:
1.6.3.1 Certificates of compliance for the materials listed under Part Two of
this Section.
1.6.3.2 Calibration certificates for gauges and meters to be used in the

grouting operations.
1.7 Design Requirements
1.7.1 Design grout mixes with the appropriate properties to fully serve their
intended functions, as defined herein.
1.8 Submittals
1.8.1 General

1.8.2 At least 30 days prior to commencing the Work, submit the following:
1.8.2.1 Shop Drawings indicating:
A. Patterns and details for sequencing and performing grouting.

The means and methods for collecting and disposing of the
excess and waste material, collecting and disposing of water
resulting from the grouting operations and the cleaning of the
precast concrete segments shall be included.
1.8.2.2 The means and methods for collecting and disposing of the excess
and waste material, collecting and disposing of water resulting from
the grouting operations and the cleaning of the precast concrete
segments.
1.8.2.3 Preconstruction testing of Annular Grout: Submit test results

demonstrating the attainment of the specified minimum twenty-
eight day compressive strength.
334890-TU-210-S0-0045
1.8.2.4 The means and methods for Annulus Grouting, including:
A. Grout mix designs, including additives and sources and

properties of all components
B. Location of mixing plant
C. Grout delivery system
D. Grout pumping system
E. Testing procedures
F. Grout volume measurement
G. Location and sequence of injection
H. Pressure measurement
I. Accelerator dosing and control devices
J. Flow and directional control
K. Sequencing grouting and establishing the basis and threshold

values for modifying the mixes
L. Temporary storage vessels
M. Coordination with the other TBM functions, in particular, tail

seal grease injection, pressure control and shove ram
activation.
1.8.2.5 The means and methods for Proof Grouting, including:
A. Descriptions and proposed arrangement of the grouting

equipment, grout pipe materials, drilling methods, grouting
methods and procedures for the disposal of waste grout and
water
B. Acceptance criteria for the completed grouting
C. Methods to determine that the grout pressures will not damage

the lining systems
D. Methods to verify the complete filling of voids and annular

spaces
334890-TU-210-S0-0045
E. Methods to determine that the criteria have been met
1.8.2.6 Product data
A. The manufacturer’s Product data sheets indicating:
i. Mixing, handling, storage and waste disposal

requirements
ii. Personal safety equipment and first aid measures
iii. Source of supply for each grout ingredient
B. For each type and source material:
i. Cement: Standard physical and chemical analysis
ii. Admixtures: Documentation showing that the proposed

admixtures have a history of demonstrable satisfactory
performance and are compatible with the adjacent
materials
iii. Calibration procedures for the gauges and meters used in

the grouting operations
1.8.2.7 Quality Control Plan: A ‘Quality Control Plan’ to be used to

demonstrate that the grout mixes meet the design criteria, and
shall include the following:
A. Methods for ensuring uninterrupted grouting at pressures that

do not exceed the maximum specified
B. Methods for containing excess or waste grout, cleaning

equipment and disposing of excess and wasted grout, water
and debris
C. Methods for preventing grout migration into the cutterhead from

behind the tunnel shield
1.8.3 Submit daily during the Work:
1.8.3.1 Daily Records
A. Records of strength tests on grout samples as soon as

practicable after performing the tests.
334890-TU-210-S0-0045
B. Shift report for Proof Grouting for each shift, regardless of

actual progress, submitted no later than the beginning of the
following working day. The Contractor shall include the
following:
i. Crew size, employee classification and employee work

assignment
ii. Number and type of equipment used
C. Grout injection records for each ring or segment:
i. Chainage of ring and ring number
ii. Hole Location with segment ring (if applicable)
iii. Observational data from drilling and inspection
iv. Mix type and batch number
v. Detailed grout injection records for each hole/pipe down

by quantity injected into each hole/pipe, injection pressure
and pumping rate for each hole/pipe
1.8.3.2 Notifications:
A. Within one calendar day of any proposed addition, deletion or

change to the scheduling of shift Work
B. Within one calendar day of performing gauge and meter tests
C. Immediately upon injection of less than 80% or more than the

120% of the theoretical volume of grout take
1.8.4 Submit weekly:
1.8.4.1 Production testing of Annular Grout.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
334890-TU-210-S0-0045
2.1.1 The products or materials selected shall perform satisfactorily for the
design service life of the tunnel under the groundwater conditions as
described in the Contract Geotechnical Reports.
2.1.2 Two Component Annulus Grout:
2.1.2.1 In accordance with the TBM manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.1.2.2 Cement: Conforming to ASTM C150, Type 1 or 3.
2.1.2.3 Accelerators, retarding agents: Conform to ASTM C494.
2.1.2.4 Anti-washout agent: Conform to the reviewed Contractor's

submittal.
2.1.2.5 Compressive strength: Minimum 1 MPa at twenty-eight days, as

measured in accordance with ASTM C39.
2.1.2.6 Strength gain: 0.2 MPa in 1-hour.
2.1.3 Proof Grout
2.1.3.1 Cement: Conforming to ASTM C150, Type 1 or 3.
2.1.3.2 Acceptable materials shall include water, portland cement, slag, fly
ash, silica fume, bentonite and sand conforming to the
requirements of 03 30 00.1 Concrete for PCTL except that 100% of
the sand shall pass through a No. 16 sieve.
2.1.3.3 Admixtures: As reviewed and approved by the Owner.
2.1.3.4 Design the grout mix for review by the Owner, with or without sand
as required, but in no case containing more than three parts sand
to one part cement by weight, and with a water-cement ratio
compatible with the pumping and placing requirements.
2.1.3.5 Twenty-eight day compressive strength of 15 MPa minimum

measured in 100 mm cubes.
2.2 Equipment
2.2.1 Proof Grout Drilling Equipment:
2.2.1.1 Utilize a core drill for all drilling and cleaning out of the grout holes.
334890-TU-210-S0-0045
2.2.1.2 Equip drills with bits of the same nominal diameter as that required
for the grout hole.
2.2.2 Grouting Equipment:
2.2.2.1 General: Provide for the continuous circulation of the grout within
the system.
2.2.2.2 Pumps:
A. Utilize helical screw rotor-type producing a uniform flow without

pulsation
B. Equip with a water connection to facilitate the flushing of the

system
C. Equip with a pressure gauge as specified herein
2.2.2.3 Appurtenances:
A. Packers: Shall be capable of sealing the grout holes without

leakage when grouting at the maximum specified pressure
B. Hoses and Piping:
i. Provide a manifold system of valves and a pressure

gauge in the line at the collar of the hole to permit the
accurate control and monitoring of the grouting pressure,
bleeding and regulation of flow
ii. Size: 40 mm I.D., minimum.
C. Pressure gauges: Accurate to ±7 kPa over the allowable

grouting pressure range
D. Volumetric Measuring Device: Accurate to 5 litres
2.2.3 Spare Parts: Maintain an adequate supply of spare parts and equipment
to ensure uninterrupted grouting operations.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 General
3.1.1 Equipment for mixing and injecting grout shall be:
334890-TU-210-S0-0045
3.1.1.1 Designed for the grouting service.
3.1.1.2 Maintained for the duration of the Work.
3.1.1.3 Capable of mixing, agitating and forcing grout into the annular
space between the extrados of the precast concrete segments and
the ground, in a continuous flow and at the required pressure.
3.1.2 The pipes for Annulus Grouting through the trailing shield of the TBM are
specified in 31 71 20 Tunnelling by TBM and are integral with the TBM.
The grout holes in the precast concrete segments are described in 31 74
16 Precast Concrete Tunnel Lining (PCTL).
3.1.3 Arrange the grouting equipment to provide for the continuous circulation of
the grout in the system and to permit accurate pressure control at the
grout hole connection. Keep the equipment and lines clean by the
constant circulation of grout and by the periodic flushing with water.
3.1.4 Configure the equipment so that flushing can be accomplished with the
grout intake valves closed, with the water supply valve open and with the
grout pump running at full speed.
3.1.5 Equipment shall be reviewed by the Owner before the Contractor

commences the tunnelling operations.
3.1.6 Waste grout shall not be placed within 2-hours of the time of initial mixing.
3.2 Annulus Grout
General: Perform Annulus Grouting as an integral part of the requirements

of 31 71 20 Tunnelling by TBM.
3.2.1 Annulus Grouting shall completely fill the annular void between the
precast concrete segmental lining and the ground with a grout of a
consistency and strength suitable to prevent the segments from shifting, to
maintain the circularity of the segment ring and to control the ground
surface settlement.
3.2.2 Annulus Grouting shall be performed in a manner that will not grout the
head and shield of the TBM or otherwise interfere with the advance of the
TBM.
3.2.3 Annulus Grouting shall be performed concurrently with the advance of the
TBM. In no circumstance, shall the TBM advance be allowed, unless the
grouting systems and grout quantities suitable for filling the annular void
334890-TU-210-S0-0045
for the next advance increment are immediately available and ready for
use. Grout shall be injected immediately and continuously from the radially
spaced ports around the trailing shield as the ring emerges from the rear
of the trailing shield of the TBM.
3.2.4 The minimum Annulus Grout injection pressure shall be the existing
hydrostatic pressure plus one bar. The maximum Annulus Grout injection
pressure shall be the existing hydrostatic pressure plus two bars.
3.2.5 Ensure that all grout pipes used for Annulus Grouting in the trailing shield
are unobstructed at all times when not in use.
3.2.6 The minimum volume for Annulus Grouting shall be 0.75 m3/m. The
Contractor shall establish the minimum pressure refusal criteria for
Annulus Grouting. Both criteria shall be met prior to the cessation of grout
injection.
3.2.7 Temperature: Maintain the contact surfaces of the precast segments

above freezing at the time of grouting for the minimum period specified in
31 74 16 Precast Concrete Tunnel Lining (PCTL).
3.3 Proof Grout
3.3.1 Proof drilling and grouting shall be performed from the TBM trailing
gantries.
3.3.2 Perform Proof Grouting once every twenty rings through one port within
the tunnel crown, as directed by the Owner.
3.3.3 The minimum Proof Grout injection pressure shall be the existing
hydrostatic pressure plus one bar. The maximum Proof Grout injection
pressure shall be the existing hydrostatic pressure plus two bars.
3.4 Clean-Up
3.4.1 Minimize waste and losses. The Contractor shall collect and dispose of
excess and waste materials using approved methods including the water
resulting from the grouting operations.
3.4.2 Promptly clean-up grout spills and clean the precast segment intrados.
3.4.3 After grouting, the Contractor shall ensure that all grout pipes, valves and
containers are clean and free of grout.
334890-TU-210-S0-0045
3.5 Field Quality Control
3.5.1 Proof Grouting Strength Tests: Take three grout cubes samples from the
grout line hook-up fitting and test in accordance with ASTM C109 for every
10 m3 of each type of grout mixed.
3.5.2 Gauges and Meters:
3.5.2.1 Test field gauges and meters in the presence of the Owner a
minimum of once per week using the master gauges and meters.
3.5.2.2 Verify the accuracy of the master gauges and meters through the
use of a Testing Laboratory no less frequently than once every two
months.
3.5.3 Proof Grouting:
3.5.3.1 Conduct tests at the grout ports to verify the adequacy of the
grouting operations on the first twenty-five rings installed for each
tunnel drive. Thereafter, conduct tests at the grout ports to verify
the adequacy of the grouting operations at locations:
A. Showing inadequate or excessive grout takes.
B. Where the Annulus Grouting refusal criterion was not met.
C. Selected by the Owner at a minimum frequency of one test per

15 m of tunnel. The Contractor shall supply its inspection or
testing service for the Work and shall not rely on the inspection
or testing undertaken by the Owner.
3.5.3.2 Drill-out holes to the extent necessary for the Owner to verify that
the grouting operation has achieved its intended purpose.
3.5.3.3 For every hole drilled indicating the incomplete filling of the
annulus, the Owner will select an additional two locations where
the Contractor shall drill and grout within 5 m of the location where
the voids were found.
3.5.3.4 Non-return valves supplied by the Owner shall be installed in the

grout port prior to Proof Grouting. Remove the grout valves after
the grout has reached an initial set, clean out the grout port and re-
install the grout plug assemblies.
334890-TU-210-S0-0045
3.5.3.5 The Owner will verify the adequacy of the Proof Grouting by
selecting a minimum of one test location within 5 m of every hole
where Proof Grouting was performed. The Contractor shall
perform additional Proof Grouting as required to satisfy the
requirements of this Section.
(END OF SECTION)
334890-TU-210-S0-0045
23 11 00 PIPELINE INSTALLATION IN TUNNEL

TMEP-TU-2000, Revision C, June 1, 2016
REVISION INDEX
Rev Prepared by/ Reviewed by/ Approved by/ Pages Remarks
Sheerin
Daniel Jezek Dave Young
A Rashidian Draft – Issued for RFP
2015-05-04 2015-05-04
2015-05-04
2015-12-11 2015-12-11 2015-12-11
2016-06-01 2016-06-01 2016-06-01
334890-TU-210-S0-0041
TMEP-TU-2000 Revision C June 1, 2016 Page 1 of 12
23 11 00 Pipeline Installation in Tunnel
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 2
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 2
1.2 Scope......................................................................................................... 4
1.3 Related Sections ........................................................................................ 5
1.7 Submittals .................................................................................................. 7
2.0 2.0 PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 9

2.1 Materials .................................................................................................... 9
2.2 Equipment.................................................................................................. 9
3.0 EXECUTION......................................................................................................... 9
3.1 General .................................................................................................... 10
3.2 Inspection, Transportation, Handling and Storage ................................... 10
3.3 Pipeline Installation .................................................................................. 11
334890-TU-210-S0-0041
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 This Technical Specification has been prepared in collaboration with

McNally Construction Inc. (the Contractor) as part of the Early Contractor
Involvement (ECI) Pre-Construction Services (Phase 1) as described in
the Memorandum of Understanding for Early Contractor Involvement,
Contract Number TMEP-PC-001.

following:


Trans Mountain


334890-TU-210-S0-0041
H. 1620 Shotcrete
334890-TU-210-S0-0041
Plan.
1.2 Scope
1.2.1 This Specification covers the requirements for the installation of three NPS
30 pipelines between the tunnel portals and within the tunnel. This
Specification does not include the installation of the pipeline outside of the
tunnel.
1.2.2 The NPS 30 pipe shall be supplied by the Owner to the designated
stockpile location to the Westridge and Burnaby Terminal sites.
1.2.3 This Specification does not include general requirements for pipeline
construction such as pipe transportation, pipe handling, pipe field bending,
pipeline welding, non-destructive testing, coating, hydrostatic testing,
caliper pig run, and inhibitor installation. These requirements are specified
elsewhere.
334890-TU-210-S0-0041
1.2.4 Installation methods may involve the following:
1.2.4.1 Pipe bending outside the tunnel and welding and joint coating
inside the tunnel.
1.2.4.2 Pipeline welding and joint coating completed outside the tunnel
and then:
A. Pulled/pushed into the tunnel over rollers on pipe supports, or

other means
B. Pulled/pushed into the tunnel using a pipe carrier
1.2.4.3 Combination of above methods
1.3 Related Sections
1.3.2 31 73 14 Tunnel Backfill
1.3.3 GC1000 Coating Selection and Specification
1.3.4 TMEP-MP1200 Steel Fittings Specification
1.3.5 TMEP-MP2217 Induction Bends Specification
1.3.6 TMEP-MP2300 Pipeline Valves
1.3.7 TMEP-MP3120 Pipeline Construction
1.3.8 TMEP-MP4121 Mainline Hydrostatic Test Specification
1.3.9 TMEP-MP3904 SMAW and Mechanized Welding
1.3.10 TMEP-MP3903 Non Destructive Testing
1.3.11 TMEP-MP2212 Steel Flanges Specification
1.3.12 TMEP-GC3105 External Fusion Bond Epoxy Coating
1.3.13 TMEP-GC3101 External Coating of Piping, Components and Structural

Steel
1.3.14 TMEP-GC3300 FBE Field Applied Coating Specification
334890-TU-210-S0-0041
1.4.1 Backfill: Approved material for backfilling the tunnel and/or shaft.
1.5.1 Worksafe BC, OHS Regulations
1.5.2 CSA Z245.1-14, Steel Pipe
1.5.3 CSA Z662-15, Oil and gas pipeline systems

1.6.1 Qualifications:
1.6.1.1 Superintendent in charge of pipe installation: In responsible

charge of similar work on a minimum of two projects of
equivalent size and complexity within the past ten years.
1.6.1.2 Welding Foreman: At least ten years of experience with

journeyman status on large diameter mainline pipeline
construction and having B Pressure Welding certification, along
with red seal allowing that person to be certified across Canada.
1.6.1.3 Pipe Foreman: At least ten years of experience with journeyman

status on large diameter mainline pipeline construction.
1.6.1.4 Welding Inspector: Certified and have at least three years of

experience within the last five years with welding procedures
required on this project.
1.6.1.5 Welders: Refer to TMEP-MP3904 - SMAW and Mechanized

Welding Specification, for requirements.
1.6.2 Construction Tolerances: Out of alignment from design drawings shall be

300 mm for sections fed in from outside the tunnel and 10 mm for pipes
fabricated in the 300 m radius section unless otherwise directed by the
Owner.
1.6.3 Preconstruction Meeting:
334890-TU-210-S0-0041
1.6.3.1 Hold separate meetings for each location at least five calendar
days but not more than 30 calendar days prior to commencing
pipe installation where pipe will be installed. Provide minimum
five calendar days advance notification of meeting time.
1.6.3.2 Review and discuss the following items at each meeting:
A. Construction methods and constraints overview.
B. Equipment operating parameters.
C. Safety procedures.
D. Quality control procedures and quality assurance requirements.
E. Reporting requirements.
F. Other issues as may be raised by either party.
1.6.4 Testing: Perform tests in accordance with the applicable codes and
specifications.
1.7 Submittals
1.7.1 The following shall be submitted for approval at least three months prior to
pipeline installation in the tunnels and/or shaft:
1.7.1.1 Transportation, handling, and storage procedures including

calculations demonstrating the pipe’s ability to handle
construction loads without damage.
1.7.1.2 Method statement for fabrication and testing outside the tunnel;
fabrication, installation and testing inside the tunnel; supporting,
restraining and blocking the pipelines in place at its final location
for tunnel backfilling; and constructing bulkheads at specified
backfill intervals. Integrate this information with submittal
requirements specified in 31 73 14 Tunnel Backfill. Include:
A. Preparations for installing pipe sections.
334890-TU-210-S0-0041
B. Panning details, drain pipes, and other methods for controlling

groundwater inflows. Provide details to seal edges of panning
to prevent backfill intrusion into drainage system.
C. Details and locations of temporary bulkheads for tunnel

backfilling operations including grout return (vent) pipes.
D. Details of cradles, pipe supports, straps and methods for

preventing flotation while placing backfill.
E. Details of ventilation system, including design calculations, and

arrangement of fans, starters, bulkheads, and other
appurtenances.
1.7.1.3 Pipe laying drawing(s) for tunnel showing the length, bend
radius, pipe identification number and joints locations for each
pipe. Demonstrate that proper clearances for pipe fabrication
and installation exist.
1.7.1.4 Qualifications of Contractor or subcontractor personnel:
A. Pipeline Construction Superintendent.
B. Welding Foreman.
C. Welding Inspectors.
D. Welders.
1.7.1.5 Project Safety Plan
1.7.1.6 Project Specific Quality Plan and Inspection Test Plan
1.7.1.7 Construction Execution Plan
1.7.1.8 Welding Plan
1.7.1.9 Coating Plan
1.7.1.10 Hydrostatic Test Plans
1.7.1.11 Caliper Pigging Plan
1.7.1.12 Turnover Documentation
334890-TU-210-S0-0041
1.7.3 Daily records: Submit no later than the beginning of the following working
day. Include information and data regarding the following:
1.7.3.1 Results of visual pipe inspection at the stock pile.
1.7.3.2 Pipeline fabrication outside the tunnel including welding, testing,

coating, field bending and inspecting.
1.7.3.3 Pipeline fabrication and installation inside the tunnel including

pipe transportation, fit-up, welding, testing, coating, installation
of pipe supports, restraints and bulkheads, and panning and
drainage.
1.7.3.4 Equipment used.
1.7.3.5 Crew size.
1.7.3.6 Beginning and ending stations or elevations of pipe installation,

and station or elevation where joint work has been completed.
1.7.3.7 Shift details including location, times and durations, details on

production activities and notation of any downtime or
interruption to production, including length of time and reason.
1.7.3.8 Quality Assurance and Quality Control including test results.
2.0 2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Product Pipe: Owner-supplied NPS 30 Pipe, Steel Grade 483 MPa, 762
mm O.D., 15.8 mm wall thickness, as per CSA Z245.1.
2.1.2 Pipe Joint Length: 12 m
2.1.3 Coating: 3M 207R rough overcoat
2.2 Equipment
2.2.1 All equipment to be used for fabrication and installation of the pipeline in
the tunnel is subject to review by the Owner.
3.0 EXECUTION
334890-TU-210-S0-0041
3.1 General
3.1.1 Pipe installation shall not commence until the Owner agrees that the
tunnel and shaft excavation has been stabilized, all deformations of the
primary support have been successfully controlled, and groundwater
inflows have been reduced to specified allowable rates.
3.1.2 Backfilling operations can commence only after positive results of

hydrostatic pressure testing of all three pipelines within the tunnel.
3.1.3 Preparation
3.1.3.1 Control groundwater prior to pipe installation. Control and

isolate water from the tunnel by erecting panning, and diverting
with invert drain pipes, by pumping from sumps, or a
combination thereof. Install sheeting, panning, and invert drains
as needed to control groundwater inflows into the tunnel that
shall be detrimental to the pipe fabrication and installation
operations and late to the tunnel backfilling operations.
Coordinate with requirement of 31 73 14 Tunnel Backfill.
3.1.3.2 The Contractor shall wash down all exposed surfaces prior to
pipe installation to remove all loose, disturbed soil or rock,
shotcrete rebound, dirt and debris in the tunnel and shaft.
3.1.3.3 Demonstrate with survey data taken from initial support systems
monitoring that ground movements have been stabilized, and
that required clearances are met for pipe fabrication and
installation in the tunnel and shaft.
3.1.3.4 Temporary ventilation, lighting, and other utilities shall be

maintained throughout the pipeline installation in the tunnel and
shaft.
3.1.3.5 Sections of temporary tunnel track and other temporary utilities

and equipment may be abandoned in place as agreed by the
Owner.
3.1.3.6 Pipe installation shall not commence until the Owner agrees in
writing that tunnel preparation, clean-up, and groundwater
control measures have been properly completed.
3.2 Inspection, Transportation, Handling and Storage
334890-TU-210-S0-0041
3.2.1 All Owner supplied materials shall be handled, transported, and stored in
accordance with TMEP-MP3120 Pipeline Construction Specification.
3.3 Pipeline Installation
3.3.1 The pipeline can be introduced into the tunnel via Burnaby and/or
Westridge tunnel portal.
3.3.2 The Contractor shall handle pipe in accordance with TMEP-MP3120

Pipeline Construction Specifications.
3.3.3 The Contractor shall verify that pipe segments can be transported to their
required location without interference or damage to pipe or initial tunnel
support systems.
3.3.4 The Contractor shall make all field bends necessary for construction of the
pipeline in accordance with TMEP-MP3120 Pipeline Construction.
3.3.5 The Contractor shall complete all pipeline welding in accordance with
TMEP-MP3904 - SMAW and Mechanized Welding Specification.
3.3.6 The Owner shall supply a Contractor to complete all non-destructive weld
testing in accordance with TMEP-MP3903 Non Destructive Testing.
3.3.7 The Contractor shall sandblast, pre-heat, and coat all girth welds in
accordance with TMEP- GC3300 FBE Field Applied Coating Specification
3.3.8 The Contractor shall install necessary supports and devices for aligning
and positioning each pipe segment to the required line and grade.
3.3.9 The Contractor shall install necessary pipe supports and restraints to
eliminate pipe flotation and buckling and to prevent other movement
during backfill placement.
3.3.10 The Contractor shall complete a minimum 4 hour hydrostatic strength pre-
test for the NPS 30 pipelines within the tunnel prior to backfilling, in
accordance with TMEP-MP4121 Mainline Hydrostatic Test Specification.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all aspects of the hydrotest,
including filling, pressurizing, and dewatering.
3.3.11 After backfill is complete, the full length of the NPS 30 pipelines shall be
subject to a final hydrostatic test as per the Drawings and in accordance
with TMEP-MP4121 Mainline Hydrostatic Test Specification. The
Contractor shall be responsible for all aspects of the hydrotest, including
filling, pressurizing, and dewatering.
334890-TU-210-S0-0041
3.3.12 The Contractor shall complete Pipeline Cleaning as per TMEP-MP4500

Pipeline Cleaning Specification and Pipeline Drying as per TMEP-MP4501
Pipeline Drying Specification.
3.3.13 The Owner shall supply a Caliper Pig Vendor to complete an inline
inspection of the pipelines. The Contractor shall provide support including
supplying air compressors and general labour as required. The caliper pig
shall be run before the hydrostatic pre-test (prior to backfill) as well as
after the final hydrostatic test (after backfill).
3.3.14 The Owner shall supply a Cathodic Protection subcontractor. The

Contractor is responsible for coordinating construction activities with the
subcontractor.
(END OF SECTION)
334890-TU-210-S0-0041
31 73 14 TUNNEL BACKFILL
TMEP-TU-2500, Revision C, June 1, 2016
REVISION INDEX
Ben DiFiore Daniel Jezek Dave Young 2015-

2015-05-04 2015-05-04 2015-05-04 05-04
Ben DiFiore Daniel Jezek Dave Young
B 2015-12-11 2015-12-11 2015-12-11 Issued for RFP
Dave Young
Daniel Jezek Adam Neale
C Rick Dinning Issued for 90% Design
2016-06-01 2016-06-01
2016-06-01
334890-TU-210-S0-0026
31 73 14 Tunnel Backfill
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 2
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 2
1.2 Scope of Work ........................................................................................... 4
1.7 Submittals ................................................................................................ 12
2.0 PRODUCTS ....................................................................................................... 16

2.1 Materials .................................................................................................. 16
2.2 Mixes ....................................................................................................... 19
2.3 Equipment................................................................................................ 19
3.0 EXECUTION....................................................................................................... 21

3.1 General .................................................................................................... 21
3.2 Preparation .............................................................................................. 22
3.3 Placement ................................................................................................ 23
3.4 Field Testing ............................................................................................ 23
3.5 Clean-Up.................................................................................................. 23
334890-TU-210-S0-0026
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 This specification was prepared in collaboration with McNally Construction

PC-001.

as part of the ECI Phase 1. This Specifications forms part of the Contract
Documents and is to be read, interpreted and coordinated with all other
parts, including the following:


Trans Mountain


334890-TU-210-S0-0026
H. 1620 Shotcrete
334890-TU-210-S0-0026
Plan.
1.2 Scope of Work
1.2.1 The Work in this Section includes:
1.2.1.1 The requirements for developing and preparing mix designs,

testing and verifying mixes, and batching, transporting, and
placing backfill concrete between the NPS 30 pipelines and
segmental lining in the tunnel, as indicated on the Drawings.
1.2.1.2 Construction of tunnel seals as indicated on the Drawings.
1.2.2 Backfilling operations may commence only after passing hydrostatic test
results on all pipelines within tunnel and tunnel portal areas as indicated
on the Drawings and approval by the Owner.
334890-TU-210-S0-0026
1.3.2 23 11 00 Pipeline Installation in Tunnel
1.3.3 MP4124 Main Line Hydrostatic Test Standard
1.4.1 Backfill Concrete: Approved material for backfilling the annular space
between the pipelines and the concrete segmental lining in the tunnel.
Backfill concrete may be Low Density Cellular Concrete or Self-
Consolidating Concrete.
1.4.2 Low Density Cellular Concrete (LDCC): Also known as foam concrete, is a
lightweight cementitious material that contains stable air or gas cells as a
pre-formed foam into a cement based slurry.
1.4.3 NPS: Nominal Pipe Size.
1.4.4 Pipelines: Three NPS 30 pipes installed in the tunnel.
1.4.5 Self-Consolidating Concrete (SCC): Self-Consolidating Concrete is a

highly fluid and flowable concrete that moves under its weight to spread
into place. With no need for vibration or other types of finishing labour, this
type of concrete easily pours past congested reinforcement and rebar as a
result of superplasticizers, all the while still upholding standard durability
requirements and strength characteristics common to traditional concrete
designs.
1.5.1 The Work shall be carried out in strict accordance with, but not limited to,
the requirements of the Acts, Standards and Regulations listed herein.
1.5.2 American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1.5.2.1 ACI 229R-13, Report on Controlled Low Strength Materials.
1.5.2.2 ACI 232.1R-12, Report on the Use of Raw or Processed Natural

Pozzolans in Concrete.
1.5.2.3 ACI 232.2R-03, Use of Fly Ash in Concrete.
334890-TU-210-S0-0026
1.5.2.4 ACI 232.3R-14, Report on High-Volume Fly Ash Concrete for

Structural Applications.
1.5.2.5 ACI 523.1R-06, Guide for Cast-in-Place Low-Density Concrete.
1.5.2.6 ACI 523.3R-14, Guide for Cellular Concretes above 50 pcf.
1.5.3.1 ASTM C31/C31M-12, Standard Practice for Making and Curing

Concrete Test Specimens in the Field.
1.5.3.2 ASTM C33/C33M-13, Standard Specification for Concrete

Aggregates.
1.5.3.3 ASTM C39/39M-15a, Standard Test Method for Compressive

Strength of Cylindrical Specimens.
1.5.3.4 ASTM C42/C42M-13, Standard Test Method for Obtaining and

Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete.
1.5.3.5 ASTM C94/C94M-15, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed

Concrete.

Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in or [50 mm]
Cube Specimens).
1.5.3.7 ASTM C138/C138M-14, Standard Test Method for Density (Unit

Weight), Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete.
1.5.3.8 ASTM C150/C150M-12, Standard Specification for Portland

Cement.
1.5.3.9 ASTM C157, Standard Test Method for Length Change of

Hardened Hydraulic-Cement Mortar and Concrete
1.5.3.10 ASTM C186-15a, Standard Test Method for Heat of Hydration of

Hydraulic Cement.
1.5.3.11 ASTM C260/C260M-10a, Standard Specification for Air-

Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
334890-TU-210-S0-0026
1.5.3.12 ASTM C311/C311M-13, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and

Testing Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolans for Use in Portland Cement
Concrete.
1.5.3.13 ASTM C403/C403M-08, Standard Test Method for Time of

Setting of Concrete Mixtures by Penetration Resistance.
1.5.3.14 ASTM C494/C494M-13, Standard Specification for Chemical

Admixtures for Concrete.

Strength of Lightweight Insulating Concrete.
1.5.3.16 ASTM C567/C567M-14, Standard Test Method for Determining

Density of Structural Lightweight Concrete.
1.5.3.17 ASTM C618-12a, Standard Specifications for Coal Fly Ash and
Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.
1.5.3.18 ASTM C796/C796M-12, Standard Test Method for Foaming

Agents for Use in Producing Cellular Concrete Using Preformed
Foam.
1.5.3.19 ASTM C869/C869M-11, Standard Specification for Foaming

Agents Used in Making Preformed Foam for Cellular Concrete.
1.5.3.20 ASTM C1090-10, Standard Test Method for Measuring Changes

in Height of Cylindrical Specimens of Hydraulic-Cement Grout.
1.5.3.21 ASTM D6527-00(2008), Standard Test Method for Determining

Unsaturated Hydraulic Conductivity in Porous Media by Steady-
State Centrifugation.
1.5.4 American National Standards Institute
1.5.4.1 ANSI B40.1 (2013), Pressure Indicating Dial Type – Elastic

Element Gauges
1.5.5.1 A23.1-14/A23.2-14, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete

Construction/Methods of Test and Standards Practices for
Concrete.
1.5.5.2 CSA A3000-13 Cementitious Materials Compendium
334890-TU-210-S0-0026
1.5.6 Worksafe BC, OHS Regulations.

1.6.1.1 The Contractor or Sub-Contractor supplying and placing the

backfill concrete shall be capable of developing mix designs, and
the batching, mixing, handling and placement of the proposed
backfill concrete under tunnel conditions; shall have a minimum of
five years of recent, successful experience in batching, pumping,
and placing the proposed backfill concrete for at least three tunnel
projects of similar magnitude and complexity to the Work;.
1.6.1.2 The contractor and manufacturer's representative shall be

capable of complying with the qualifications specified for the
contractor and shall be acceptable to the Owner.
1.6.2.1 Concreting Supervisor: Experienced in similar tunnel conditions

and knowledgeable in the formulation and adjustment of backfill
concrete mix designs, with a minimum of five years of experience.
The Concreting Supervisor shall be certified by the foaming agent
manufacturer.
1.6.2.2 Field Sampling and Testing Personnel: Qualified employees of a

certified testing laboratory.
1.6.3 Field Services:
1.6.3.1 The Foaming Agent Material Manufacturer shall provide

engineering field services to review the project, backfill concrete
mix, placing equipment and procedures, and the qualifications of
the contractor responsible for the backfill concrete prior to any
work. The Foaming Agent Representative is to approve the
materials, equipment, procedures to be used and the setup before
production of backfill concrete; and to observe operations during
the initial application. The Foaming Agent Representative shall
submit, in writing, approvals of personnel, materials, mix design,
equipment, placement procedures, and setup prior to mixing or
placing any backfill concrete.
334890-TU-210-S0-0026
1.6.4 Review of mix design, inspection and testing by the Owner shall not
relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the quality of backfill concrete.
1.6.5 LDCC Testing
1.6.5.1 Pre-construction Testing:
A. Notify the Owner at least one week prior to carrying out the trial
batches.
B. The testing program of the LDCC shall be performed by an

independent laboratory as approved by the Owner.
C. Make trial batches for each proposed LDCC mix.
D. A minimum of three cylinders, one for each three, seven, and

28 day compressive strength tests, shall be produced for each
trial batch.
E. Unconfined compressive strength tests shall be supplied for all

cylinders produced.
F. Heat of hydration temperature development curves: A

minimum of one heat of hydration temperature test shall be
supplied for each of the mix designs. Temperature testing shall
be conducted in an insulated enclosure to mimic conditions
within the tunnel, and in accordance with ASTM C186.
G. Shrinkage Tests: Two sets of test prisms (100 mm by 100 mm

by 300 mm), consisting of three prisms per set, shall be made
from each proposed LDCC mix. Test prisms shall be prepared,
cured, stored, and measured in accordance with ASTM C157.
H. Determine initial set time and final set time of three samples of
each proposed LDCC mix in accordance with ASTM C403.
I. Determine the maximum lift height for each proposed LDCC

mix.
1.6.5.2 Field Testing
A. Provide delivery and measurement of materials from batching

equipment to within the accuracies specified in ASTM C94M.
Test scales periodically in a manner and at intervals set forth in
the approved Quality Management Plan.
334890-TU-210-S0-0026
B. Test fine aggregate, when used, in accordance with ASTM

C33M and at the frequency specified in the approved Quality
Management Plan.
C. Test fly ash in accordance with ASTM C311 at least once daily.
D. Test and calibrate equipment to generate foam for LDCC each

day for density and volume output.
E. Test Wet Density of LDCC per ASTM C796 prior to introduction

of the foaming agent and noting the time and temperature:
every 30 minutes, for each batch mixed, and for each
compression test cylinder produced.
F. Test Wet Density of LDCC at the point of placement. Wet

Density shall be within ± 80 kg/m³ of the unit weight established
for the mix design being placed.
G. Compressive Strength Tests: Standard tests for strength will be

conducted at a frequency of not less than one strength test for
each pour, and for each 500 m³ of LDCC, for each LDCC mix
produced in any one day.
i. A minimum of three cylinders, one for each three, seven,

and 28 day compressive strength tests, shall be produced.
ii. Unconfined compressive strength tests shall be supplied

for all cylinders produced.
1.6.6 SCC Testing
1.6.6.1 Pre-Construction Testing
A. Notify the Owner at least one week prior to carrying out the trial
batches.
B. The testing program on the SCC shall be performed by an

independent laboratory as approved by the Owner.
C. Make trial batches for each proposed SCC mix.
D. A minimum of three cylinders, one for each three, seven, and

28 day compressive strength tests, shall be produced.
334890-TU-210-S0-0026
E. Unconfined compressive strength tests shall be supplied for all

cylinders produced.
F. Heat of hydration temperature development curves: A

minimum of one heat of hydration temperature tests shall be
supplied for each of the SCC mix designs. Temperature testing
shall be conducted in an insulated enclosure to mimic
conditions within the tunnel, and in accordance with ASTM
C186.
G. Shrinkage Tests: Two sets of test prisms (100 mm by 100 mm

by 300 mm), consisting of three prisms per set, shall be made
from each proposed SCC mix. Test prisms shall be prepared,
cured, stored, and measured in accordance with ASTM C157.
H. Air content, slump and temperature of each SCC mix design

shall be tested in accordance with CSA-A23.2.
I. If the requirements for the concrete class are not met, perform
additional trial batches until it can be demonstrated that the
specified requirements have been met.
1.6.6.2 Field Testing
A. Provide delivery and measurement of materials from batching

equipment to within the accuracies specified in ASTM C94M.
Test scales periodically in a manner and at intervals set forth in
the approved Quality Management Plan.
B. Inspection and testing of concrete and concrete materials will

be carried out by a CSA Certified Testing Laboratory approved
by the Owner in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1. The testing
laboratory will perform concrete plant checks and quality
assurance sampling and testing for slump, air content, air
voids, and compressive strength.
C. Slump Tests: Slump tests are to be taken between the 10

percent and 90 percent points of discharge of a concrete load
with every strength test, and as required by the Owner.
D. Air Content Tests: Air content tests are to be taken between

the 10 percent and 90 percent points of discharge of a concrete
load with every strength test, and as required by the Owner.
334890-TU-210-S0-0026
E. For each air content test, determine the density of the concrete
in accordance with CSA A23.2-6C.
F. Compressive Strength Tests: Standard tests for strength will be

conducted at a frequency of no less than one strength test for
each pour and for each 500 m³ of concrete, of each SCC mix
produced in any one day.
G. A minimum of three cylinders, one for each three, seven, and

28 day compressive strength tests, shall be produced.
H. Unconfined compressive strength tests shall be supplied for all

cylinders produced.
1.7 Submittals
1.7.1 General
1.7.1.1 All submittals shall be provided to the Owner for review in

1.7.2 Qualifications: Submit the Contractor’s and personnel qualifications

including the following at least 30 days in advance of pre-construction
testing:
1.7.2.1 Proposed speciality subcontractor or backfill concrete

manufacturer's representative for batching and placing tunnel
backfill.
1.7.2.2 Individual providing engineering field services on behalf of

foaming agent material manufacturer.
1.7.2.3 Qualifications of Concrete Supervisor responsible for developing

the mix designs and overseeing the tunnel backfill operations.
1.7.2.4 Field sampling and testing personnel.
1.7.3 Testing:
334890-TU-210-S0-0026
1.7.3.1 Submit proposed backfill concrete mix design(s) including the

following at least 90 days in advance of pre-construction testing:
A. Each proposed mix design by weight and volume of all

ingredients.
1.7.3.2 Submit the pre-construction test results at least 30 days prior to

commencement of tunnel backfill operations.
1.7.4 Mix Design:
1.7.4.1 Submit the following at least 30 days prior to commencement of

tunnel backfill operations
A. Each mix design by weight and volume of all ingredients.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's information, including

specifications, handling and storage recommendations,
personal protective equipment requirements, and Material
Safety Data Sheets for the following:
C. Cement and Fly Ash: Source, brand, and type.
D. Foaming Agent: Brand, content, expansion ratio, dilution ratio,

optimum density, and allowable generation temperatures.
E. Water: Source and temperature.
F. Aggregate: Source, brand, type, and sieve test results.
G. Admixtures: Brand, content, batching methods, and time of

introduction.
1.7.5 Quality Control: Submit a Quality Control Program including the following
at least 30 days prior to commencement tunnel backfill operations:
1.7.5.1 Non-conformance tracking and remediation for all tunnel backfill

operations.
1.7.6 Shop Drawings and Methods Statements: Submit Shop Drawings and
detailed Methods including the following at least 30 days prior to
commencement tunnel backfill operations:
1.7.6.1 Means and methods for proportioning, mixing, batching, and

delivering backfill concrete, including the storage of raw materials.
334890-TU-210-S0-0026
Include procedures for verifying mix proportioning, mix ingredient

quality, and procedures for sampling, testing, and record keeping.
1.7.6.2 Details for transporting and placing backfill concrete including

methods for assuring that the annular space between the
pipelines and the concrete segments are completely filled during
backfill placement.
1.7.6.3 Proposed sequencing, methods, and equipment for mixing,

conveying and placing backfill concrete. Include information on all
equipment for placing backfill including batch plant details, mixing
equipment, foam generating system, pumping equipment, delivery
system, flow meters and calibration certificates, pressure relief
valves, pressure gauges and calibration certificates, construction
water control and management, and real-time monitoring
systems. Include manufacturer’s specifications and operation
instructions.
1.7.6.4 Lift drawings showing details of the three NPS 30 pipelines,

injection ports, lift heights, temporary bulkheads, and other
materials.
1.7.6.5 Tunnel backfill conveyance provisions; equipment arrangements;

venting details; pump line location; provisions for moving and
breaking pump line; mix and placement monitoring methods;
communication systems; and clean-up methods and procedures.
1.7.6.6 Descriptions of labour, equipment and supplies required to

perform the Work.
1.7.6.7 Cross-sections and profiles showing the arrangement of

transportation, handling, and placing equipment including passing
clearances
1.7.6.8 Layout of surface facilities and details for transporting backfill

concrete to placement areas
1.7.6.9 Methods for controlling the heat of hydration induced temperature

rise.
1.7.6.10 Details of pumping pressures and rates, placement sequences

volumes, and lift thicknesses. Include the theoretical quantity for
each lift. Include procedures for assuring that backfill pressures
do not damage the pipelines, pipelines structural support or
adjacent work.
334890-TU-210-S0-0026
1.7.6.11 Methods for monitoring and controlling lift heights.
1.7.6.12 Methods for diverting construction water and

groundwater;protecting backfill concrete from washing out or
dilution.
1.7.7 Other Submittals: Submit the following at least 30 days prior to the
commencement tunnel backfill operations:
1.7.7.1 Organization Chart: To include responsibilities of those directly

involved with the tunnel backfill operations.
1.7.7.2 Certifications:
A. Certification that plant, equipment, and materials to be used in

concrete comply with requirements of CAN/CSA-A23.1
B. Cement mill test reports.
C. Certificates of compliance for materials incorporated into the

Work.
D. Calibration certificates for gauges, scales, and meters in

accordance with ANSI B40.1
E. Calibration procedures for gauges and meters to be used in

tunnel backfill operations.
F. Written certification from the manufacturer of the foaming agent

material confirming that:
i. Cement and fly-ash proposed for use is compatible with

the proposed foaming agent.
ii. Proposed admixtures are compatible with the proposed

foaming agent.
iii. Proposed mix designs in conjunction with batching,

transporting, and placing means and methods are
compatible with the foaming agent
iv. Acceptability of the method whereby the foaming agent is

introduced to the batching system.
334890-TU-210-S0-0026
1.7.9 Recordkeeping: Submit daily records to the Owner no later than the end of
each working day for the following:
1.7.9.1 Delivery Record: A delivery ticket showing the batch plant

location, the Supplier’s name, ticket and truck numbers,
electronically recorded date and time of initial plant mixing, class
and mix design designation, cement type and aggregate sizes,
type of admixtures, volume of water added, volume of concrete,
site arrival time, discharge time, and other information requested
by the Owner.
1.7.9.2 Batch tickets.
1.7.9.3 Daily reports and records of tunnel backfill placement including

the following:
A. Crew information, size and equipment used.
B. Beginning and ending stations and elevations of placements,

beginning and ending time for each specific placement, type of
mix and quantity of SCC placed and wasted.
C. Description and cause of down time or interruption to

production.
D. Test information, including time, location, and results of tests.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Self-Consolidating Concrete (SCC)
2.1.1.1 Portland cement: to CSA-A3000, Type GU, or Type LH or Type

LHL when Low Heat of Hydration is required. A single brand of
cement, acceptable to the Owner, shall be used throughout the
Work.
2.1.1.2 Supplementary cementing materials: to CSA-A3000.
334890-TU-210-S0-0026
2.1.1.3 Condensed silica fume: to CSA-A3000, Type U with a SiO2

content of at least %, maximum ignition loss of 6%, and no more
than 1% SiO3 content.
2.1.1.4 Fly Ash: to CSA-A3000.
2.1.1.5 Aggregates: to CSA-A23.1.
A. Coarse aggregates are to be of normal density.
B. A minimum of 50% of coarse aggregate particles shall have at

least one broken face.
C. The maximum combination of flat and elongated particles, as

defined in CSA A23.2, shall not exceed 10% of the mass of
coarse aggregate.
2.1.1.6 Admixtures: to ASTM C494M. All admixtures shall be provided by

a single manufacturer and used in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations. In addition:
A. The use of calcium chloride is not permitted.
B. Admixtures shall be certified by manufacturer to contain no

more than 0.1% water-soluble chloride ions by mass of
cementitious material and are to be compatible with other
admixtures and cementitious materials.
C. Concrete shall not contain more than one water-reducing

admixture.
D. Admixtures shall be added and mixed in full accordance with

manufacturers’ recommendations. Accelerating or set retarding
admixtures proposed for use during cold and hot weather
placing must be approved by the Owner prior to use.
E. Admixture content, batching method, and time of introduction to

the mix shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and for compliance with these
Specifications.
2.1.1.7 Curing Compound: Clear, waterborne, membrane-forming curing

and sealing compound.
2.1.2 Low Density Cellular Concrete (LDCC)
334890-TU-210-S0-0026
2.1.2.1 Foaming Agent:
A. Conforming to ASTM C869 when tested in accordance with

ASTM C796.
B. Capable of generating foam, which maintains stability until the

cement sets to form a self-supporting matrix comprising closed
cells and low water absorptive characteristics.
2.1.2.2 Preformed foam shall be generated by combining controlled

quantities of air, water, and foaming agent under pressure. Foam
shall retain its stability until the cement sets to form a self-
supporting matrix.
2.1.2.3 Admixtures:
A. Do not use admixtures containing chlorides, that promote

corrosion, or that have not been certified for use with foaming
agent by foaming agent manufacturer.
B. Admixtures may be used to reduce water, to control set time,

and to reduce washout, segregation and bleeding. Admixtures
that promote steel corrosion will not be permitted. Admixtures
shall be specifically approved by foaming agent material
manufacturer and shall be in accordance with their
recommendations. If used, anti-washout agents shall be
verified for suitability by means of a submerged demonstration.
C. Retarder/Water Reducer: Conforming to ASTM C494M, Type

D.
D. Plasticizer/Water Reducer: Conforming to ASTM C494M, Type

A.
2.1.3 Water: To CSA-A23.1, clear, free from oil, acid, alkali, organic matter,
sediment, or other substances harmful to the mixing and curing of
concrete.
2.1.4 Curing Compound: Clear, waterborne, membrane-forming curing and

sealing compound such as Aqua-Cure by Euclid Chemical Company;
Masterkure-W by Master Builders, or approved equal.
2.1.5 Annular sealing, as shown on the Drawings, shall consist of manufactured

rectangular or trapezoidal strip such as Hydrotite CJ-3030 or equivalent.
334890-TU-210-S0-0026
Hydrotite Leakmaster or equivalent shall be used as adhesive for bonding

to concrete and external pipe coatings.
2.2 Mixes
2.2.1 Backfill Concrete Type 1 (Tunnel Backfill)
2.2.1.1 Backfill concrete, used where indicated on the Drawings, shall

comply with the following minimum requirements:
A. Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 5 MPa (Min)
B. Drying shrinkage: 0.05% (Max)
C. Wet Density: 1,500 kg/m³ (Min)
D. Maximum temperature of the pipe (measured at the skin during

the hydration of the backfill) 25 degrees Celsius.
E. Maximum temperature from heat of hydration of placed backfill

concrete not to exceed 72 degrees Celsius.
2.2.2 Backfill Concrete Type 2 (Tunnel Seal)
A. Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 5 MPa (Min)
B. Drying shrinkage: 0.05% (Max)
C. Wet Density: 1,500 kg/m³ (Min)
D. Aggregate Size: Nominal Maximum 19 mm
E. Maximum temperature of the pipe (measured at the skin during

the hydration of the backfill) 25 °C.
F. Maximum temperature from heat of hydration of placed backfill

concrete not to exceed 72 °C.
G. Maximum Hydraulic Conductivity: 1 x 10^-9 m/s as tested in

accordance with ASTM D6527.
2.3 Equipment
2.3.1 General:
334890-TU-210-S0-0026
2.3.1.1 Furnish equipment of sufficient size to batch and pump the

required volume of backfill concrete over the distance required,
through injection ports at a uniform flow rate and under the
required constant pressure in an underground environment.
2.3.1.2 Configure equipment to flush system with intake valves closed,

with water supply valve open, and with pump running at full
speed.
2.3.1.3 Provide a system capable of generating backfill concrete that

meets the specified acceptance criteria.
2.3.1.4 Maintain equipment in good operating condition and provide an

adequate inventory of spare parts and backup equipment on site
to assure that the equipment is available at all times that
backfilling is to occur.
2.3.2 Batching:
2.3.2.1 Batching equipment shall utilize mechanical systems to ensure

consistency of the mix.
2.3.2.2 Equipment shall provide digital printout record of batch scale

readings, accurate to 0.5 kg of dry mix ingredients before delivery
to the mixer.
2.3.3 Foam Generator:
2.3.3.1 Generate foam by combining controlled quantities of air, water,

and foaming agent under pressure in accordance with the
foaming agent manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.3.3.2 Maintain the temperature of water used in generating the foam

below 27 degrees Celsius, or as recommended by the foaming
agent manufacturer.
2.3.3.3 Provide timer controls to discharge repetitively a pre-selected

quantity, or to discharge continuously at a fixed rate.
2.3.3.4 Discharge foam into the mixer and blend with the cement slurry.
2.3.4 Mixing:
2.3.4.1 Configure the mixer to be compatible with the pump to assure

continuous and uniform flow at the point of placement.
334890-TU-210-S0-0026
A. Provide a mixer capable of providing a super-wetted,

homogenized mix.
B. Equip the mixer with a water meter with an accuracy of ±5 litres

for measuring the amount of mixing water to be added to the
dry mix ingredients.
2.3.5 Pumping:
2.3.5.1 Provide equipment capable of pumping the amounts of backfill

concrete to be conveyed without pulsation or segregation.
2.3.5.2 Operate the pump to uniformly convey a continuous stream of

backfill concrete, without unintentional air pockets.
2.3.5.3 Equip pump with pressure limit device to restrict pumping

pressure as required to prevent damage to the pipelines, the pipe
supports and the adjacent works.
2.3.6 Other devices / Instruments / Communications:
2.3.6.1 Pressure gauges shall be suited for the appropriate pressure

ranges and shall be subject to approval of the Owner. Gauges
shall be selected such that the measured backfill pressures are
not less than 25 percent of the maximum gauge pressure.
2.3.6.2 The Contractor shall have on hand multiple Bourdon type,

glycerine-filled pressure gauges to accurately monitor backfilling
pressures at all expected pressures.
2.3.6.3 All glycol filled pressure gauges are to be fitted with a gauge
saver device.
2.3.6.4 Provide audio system for communications between the surface,

concrete pump, and the point of placement.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 General
3.1.1 Inform the Owner at least 24 hours in advance of the times and places at
which backfill concrete is intended to be placed.
334890-TU-210-S0-0026
3.1.2 Backfilling shall not commence until the Owner approves in writing that
tunnel preparation, clean-up, and groundwater control measures have
been properly completed.
3.1.3 Limit lift heights to prevent pipe flotation and to maintain backfill concrete
parameters within specified limits.
3.1.4 Use method(s) that completely and uniformly fill the annular space
between the precast segmental lining and the outside surface of the
pipelines.
3.1.5 The qualified contractor or backfill concrete manufacturer's representative

shall supervise all tunnel backfill operations including training the
Contractor's personnel and placement of backfill concrete in the tunnel,
and have the authority to direct the work and this individual shall be on site
full-time during the placement of backfill concrete.
3.1.6
3.2 Preparation
3.2.1 Verify that the locations where backfill concrete is to be placed are clean
and free of standing or running water.
3.2.2 Control groundwater prior to installing the tunnel backfill. Control and
isolate water from the tunnel by erecting panning, and diverting the water
with invert drain pipes, by pumping from sumps, or a combination thereof.
Install sheeting, panning, and invert drains as needed to control
groundwater inflows into the tunnel that may be detrimental to the pipe
fabrication and installation operations and later to the tunnel backfilling
operations. Coordinate with the requirements of 23 11 00 Pipe Installation
in Tunnel.
3.2.3 Sections of temporary tunnel track and other temporary utilities and
equipment may be abandoned in place if all spilled tunnel spoil and other
debris is removed and washed clean so as to avoid a possible future
seepage path, as approved by the Owner.
3.2.4 Bulkheads: Bulkheads may be constructed so the annular space will be

completely filled. Bulkheads shall incorporate a vent pipe at the tunnel
crown to allow entrapped air to escape. Vent pipes shall be provided as
necessary to ensure no air is trapped in the annular space. For quality
control purposes, the maximum placement distance between bulkheads
shall be 150m unless otherwise approved by the owner.
334890-TU-210-S0-0026
3.3 Placement
3.3.1 Submit to the Owner the proposed pour schedule and procedure 24 hours
in advance of the pour.
3.3.2 Limits of each backfill concrete placement shall be predetermined by the

Contractor based on capacity of the batching equipment, initial set time of
the concrete, and a maximum lift height determined for each mix.
3.3.3 Discharge Time: Complete the discharge of concrete within 1.0 hours after
initial introduction of mixing water to the cement at the plant. In hot
weather, the discharge time may be reduced at the Owner’s discretion.
Additional admixtures such as retarders may be used to slow the
hydration process. In these circumstances the discharge time may be
revised, as approved by the Owner.
3.3.4 Pour backfill concrete as continuously and as rapidly as possible. Prevent

unbalanced lateral loading of the pipelines.
3.4 Field Testing
3.4.1 Refer to Section 1.6 herein.
3.5 Clean-Up
3.5.1 Equipment shall be maintained and cleaned thoroughly each day.

Hydrocarbons shall be prohibited from entering the pumping chamber.
3.5.2 Backfill concrete from line changing, clean-up, and spillage or waste shall
be discharged into approved containers and removed from the tunnel.
Discharge into the tunnel will not be permitted.
(END OF SECTION)
334890-TU-210-S0-0026
31 23 23 Site Restoration
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 2
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 2
1.2 Scope of Work ........................................................................................... 4
1.7 Submittals .................................................................................................. 7
2.0 PRODUCTS ......................................................................................................... 8

2.1 Materials .................................................................................................... 8
2.2 Equipment................................................................................................ 10
3.0 EXECUTION....................................................................................................... 11

3.1 General .................................................................................................... 11
3.2 Site Preparation ....................................................................................... 11
3.3 Stockpiling ............................................................................................... 12
3.4 Dewatering and Heave Prevention .......................................................... 12
3.5 Backfill Placement ................................................................................... 13
3.6 Compaction.............................................................................................. 14
3.7 Finishing and Tolerances ......................................................................... 15
3.8 Restoration .............................................................................................. 16
334890-TU-210-S0-0046
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction

PC-001.


following:


Trans Mountain


334890-TU-210-S0-0046
H. 1620 Shotcrete
334890-TU-210-S0-0046
Plan.
1.2 Scope of Work
1.2.1 This section includes:
1.2.1.1 Haulage, installation and compaction of granular backfill at

tunnel portals at the Burnaby and Westridge Terminal site.
1.2.1.2 Removal of temporary shoring and other miscellaneous

structures.
1.2.1.3 Restoration of original ground surface grades upon completion

of the Work.
334890-TU-210-S0-0046
1.2.1.4 Removal and disposal of all temporary drainage, sediment and

erosion control devices.
1.2.1.5 Restoration of the drainage systems to match the original or in

accordance with the Owner’s requirements.
1.2.1.6 Storage and installation of topsoil materials.
1.2.1.7 Supply, preparation and storage of pipe bedding materials.
1.2.1.8 Compaction and testing of the installed backfill materials.
1.2.2 Requirements for backfill material within 150mm and 300mm of the pipe
are specified in MP3120 - Pipeline Construction Specification, Section
20.0 Backfilling.
1.4.1 Backfill: Type 1, 2 and 3 backfill materials as indicated on the Drawings.
1.4.2 Borrow Material: Suitable material obtained from locations outside area
and required for construction of fill areas or for other portions of the Work.
1.4.3 Topsoil: Material capable of supporting good vegetative growth and

suitable for use in top dressing, landscaping and seeding.
1.4.4 Unsuitable Materials:
1.4.4.1 Weak and compressible materials under excavated areas.
1.4.4.2 Materials containing excessive organics as determined by the

Owner.
1.4.4.3 Frost-susceptible materials under excavated areas.
1.4.5 Waste Material: Excavated material unsuitable for use in the Work or
surplus to requirements.
1.5.1 American Society for Testing of Materials (ASTM)
334890-TU-210-S0-0046
1.5.1.1 ASTM D421-85 (2007), Standard Practice for Dry Preparation of

Soil Samples for Particle-Size Analysis and Determination of
Soil Constants.
1.5.1.2 ASTM D422-63 (2007)e2, Standard Test Method for Particle-

Size Analysis of Soils.
1.5.1.3 ASTM D1557-12, Standard Test Method for Laboratory

Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort.
1.5.1.4 ASTM D2216-10, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory

Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by
Mass.
1.5.1.5 ASTM D6938-15, Standard Test Method for In-Place Density

and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth).
1.5.2 City of Burnaby Bylaw No. 10482 – Burnaby Tree Bylaw 1996.

1.6.1 Field Personnel: During the installation or compaction of backfill, provide

on-site at all times a supervisor with previous experience installing similar
backfill on at least two projects.
1.6.2 Employ and pay for the services of a commercial testing laboratory,
acceptable to the Owner, to prepare and test the proposed backfill .
Particle size gradation curves shall be provided to the Owner for approval.
1.6.3 Failure to achieve the specified backfill density will be just cause for
rejection of any or all portions of the excavation section tested. Cost of
retesting backfill not meeting specified densities shall be paid by
Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.6.4 Construction Phase Testing: Employ and pay for the services of a
commercial testing laboratory, acceptable to the Owner to perform in-situ
density tests of each installed backfill lift. Tests shall be performed to
ASTM D6938. Tests shall for each fill type be performed at a minimum
frequency of once per every 200 m³, and no less than once per each day
that fill is placed.
334890-TU-210-S0-0046
1.6.5 Quality Assurance:
1.6.5.1 The Owner, at his/her discretion, may complete random quality

assurance testing on all materials incorporated into the Work.
The Contractor shall allow the Owner unhindered access to the
materials and shall assist the Owner in carrying out any
sampling or testing, including the provision for necessary traffic
control, suitable access and storage.
1.6.5.2 Sampling and testing methods used by the Owner to determine

the performance of backfill materials shall not relieve the
Contractor from his responsibilities for compliance with the
Contract Documents.
1.7 Submittals
1.7.1 General

1.7.2 At least 60 days prior to the commencement of surface backfill works,

submit the following:
1.7.2.1 Details of procedures and equipment to be used during

placement and compaction of backfill.
1.7.2.2 Details of source materials, material gradation, haul route,

hauling hours, planned trucks per day and dust mitigation
strategy.
1.7.2.3 Details of testing procedures to be followed to ensure material

placement, gradation and compaction specifications are met.
1.7.2.4 Pre-excavation surveys to confirm original topography and

surveys of the portal excavation subject to backfilling and
restoration.
334890-TU-210-S0-0046
1.7.2.5 Equipment manufacturer’s data giving all dimensions, weights

and complete technical data, including descriptions and
calculations of applied forces.
1.7.2.6 Field Personnel: Qualifications of the proposed backfill

installation supervisor.
1.7.2.7 Procedures for temporary shoring and other temporary

equipment and structures removal and disposal.
1.7.2.8 Procedures for the detensioning of ground anchors including

equipment and procedures for various stages of execution of
backfill placement and anchor detensioning.
1.7.2.9 Site restoration plans for each portal site including final grading,
drainage and erosion control provisions, hydroseeding and re-
vegetation in accordance with all permits and the Owner’s
requirements.
1.7.2.10 Submit for the Owner's review details of any proposed

temporary dewatering or heave prevention methods.
1.7.3 Submit the following information at least 60 days prior to the

commencement of restoration Works related to the stream channel at the
Westridge Portal Area: Detailed plan outlining the restoration of the
stream flow from its diverted path via temporary open channel and culvert
into a permanent excavated channel and culvert.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Backfill shall be free from detrimental quantities of debris, muck, peat,
roots, grass, leaves, organic materials, clods, lumps, balls of clay, frozen
materials, rocks in excess of 75mm, heavy metals, hydrocarbons, salts,
and other materials which may cause water contamination. The Owner
may, at his discretion, conduct random testing of imported materials to
check for contaminants.
334890-TU-210-S0-0046
2.1.2 Granular materials shall be composed of sound, hard, uncoated particles,

free from injurious quantities of clay, flaky particles, soft shale, friable
materials, roots, wood, bark, and all other vegetable and organic matter,
and from frozen lumps.
2.1.3 Gradation envelope limits for backfill may be revised to incorporate the
use / reuse of other materials (i.e. native soil) subject to approval by the
Owner. Any approved modifications to the gradation envelope may also
result in revisions to the allowable lift thickness, compaction equipment to
be used, and compaction requirements. Any required changes to the
prescribed gradation limits shown below shall be submitted to the Owner
for approval prior to commencement of related Works.
2.1.4 Backfill material shall be classified into the following gradation types:
2.1.4.1 Type 1 Backfill (e.g. Native Soil or Screened, Pit-Run Gravel)

granular material with the following gradation limits:
Particle Size Percentage Passing

ASTM Sieve Designation
mm / (Sieve No.) Coarse Limit Fine Limit
75 mm 100 -
50 mm 75 -
19 mm 40 100
4.75 mm / (No. 4) 15 50
0.075 mm / (No. 200) - 5
2.1.4.2 Type 2 Backfill (e.g. Native Soil or Un-screened, Pit-Run Gravel)

granular material with the following gradation limits:
Particle Size Percentage Passing

ASTM Sieve Designation
mm / (Sieve No.) Coarse Limit Fine Limit
75 mm 100 -
50 mm 75 -
19 mm 40 100
4.75 mm / (No. 4) 15 50
0.075 mm / (No. 200) - 5
2.1.4.3 Type 3 Backfill (Pipe Backfill Material)
A. Follow MP3120 - Pipeline Construction Specification, Section
334890-TU-210-S0-0046
20.0 Backfilling for requirements for backfill material within

150mm of Pipe and for backfill material 150mm to 300mm
above Pipe.
2.2 Equipment
2.2.1 Equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Owner. All equipment
shall be maintained in proper working order.
2.2.2 Provide sufficient compaction equipment of the types and sizes specified
herein as is necessary for compaction of the backfill materials.
2.2.3 If the Contractor wishes to use alternative equipment, it shall submit to the
Owner for approval complete details of such equipment and the methods
proposed for its use. The Owner’s approval of the use of alternative
equipment will be dependent upon the Contractor demonstrating, by
constructing suitable test fills, to the satisfaction of the Owner that such
alternative equipment will compact the backfill materials to a density not
less than that which would be produced by the equipment and number of
coverage’s specified herein.
2.2.4 Compaction equipment shall have sufficient power for the most adverse
conditions to be encountered during compaction of the fill and when the
compaction equipment is ballasted to the weight specified for compaction
of the backfill.
2.2.5 Compaction equipment shall be maintained in good condition at all times

to ensure the achieved amount of compaction as per the specifications.
2.2.6 Hand guided vibratory compactors shall be used to compact materials

which cannot be compacted by the specified vibratory rollers because of
location nearby pipes, valves, instrumentation, structures or accessibility
restrictions.
2.2.7 Take every precaution, when operating compaction equipment, to avoid

damage to adjacent structures and instrumentation devices. Any such
damage or disturbance shall be repaired or remedied by the Contractor at
no additional cost to the Owner.
2.2.7.1 Hand-Guided Vibratory Compactors
A. Adopt special compaction measures consisting of hand guided

vibratory compactors to compact fill around structures and in
other confined areas which are not accessible to the larger
vibratory roller.
334890-TU-210-S0-0046
B. Such measures shall be capable of compacting the material to

the same density as that achieved by the larger vibratory roller.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 General
3.1.1 All temporary portal and site infrastructure shall be dismantled and
removed from the Contractor’s Work Site once the Work is completed.
3.1.2 Earth structures such as groundwater control systems, access roads, and
graded areas shall be removed from the site. The original grade of the site
shall be re-established and disturbed areas restored.
3.1.3 All trailers, utilities, drainage facilities, and other temporary site
development facilities provided by the Contractor shall be removed from
the site. All waste materials and contract related surplus shall be removed
from the portal areas unless otherwise permitted by the Owner.
3.1.4 Chain link fences and gates around the perimeter of the contractor’s work
sites shall be removed unless otherwise directed by the Owner.
3.1.5 Allow the Owner unrestricted access to the excavation and backfill
placement areas to facilitate inspection of the excavated or placed
material.
3.1.6 The Owner may direct the Contractor to exclude particular volumes of
backfill for use as backfill material.
3.1.7 The Owner may direct the Contractor to segregate volumes of material
within the designated disposal area in order to facilitate a thorough
sampling and testing program to be carried out by the Owner.
3.1.8 Dust and noise control shall be provided in accordance with permit
requirements.
3.1.9 Take all precautions necessary to prevent a dust nuisance to adjacent

properties. Provide drainage, erosion and sediment control and prevent
transportation of soil to adjacent properties. Any damage caused by dust,
erosion, or haulage of soil or excavated materials and muck shall be
corrected or repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.2 Site Preparation
3.2.1 All portions of temporary shoring and other miscellaneous structures
334890-TU-210-S0-0046
except of the pipe supports which are within two meters of finished grade
shall be removed and disposed, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings
or directed by the Owner.
3.2.2 Ground anchors decommissioning and abandonment: All the temporary

ground anchors shall be completely de-stressed and released, as directed
by the Engineer. The tendons are to be left in place, unless any portion of
the tendon that is within two meters of finished grade which shall be cut
out and removed.
3.2.3 Remove obstructions, deleterious materials, ice and snow from surfaces
to be backfilled within limits indicated.
3.2.4 Construct and maintain whatever temporary access roads, including

culverts that the Contractor considers necessary to carry out the Work.
Temporary access roads must be constructed by using Type 1 backfill as
shown on the Drawings or as approved by the Owner.
3.2.5 Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, all materials used in constructing
temporary access roads, or laydown grading including temporary culverts,
swales and ditches shall be removed from the Work Site and the area
restored to the satisfaction of the Owner.
3.2.6 Excavations shall be dewatered and made dry prior to the placement of
backfill.
3.2.7 Protect portal or site slopes from erosion due to precipitation and surface
runoff, during granular backfill installation as required.
3.2.8 Hand trim, make firm and remove loose material and debris from
excavations. Where granular material at bottom of the excavation is
disturbed, compact the foundation soil to a density at least equal to
undisturbed soil.
3.3 Stockpiling
3.3.1 Stockpile granular backfill materials in a manner to prevent segregation.
3.3.2 Protect stockpiled granular backfill materials from contamination and

erosion.
3.4 Dewatering and Heave Prevention
3.4.1 Keep excavations free of water while the Work is in progress.
334890-TU-210-S0-0046
3.4.2 Protect open excavations against flooding, erosion and damage due to
surface runoff. Provide suitable temporary ditches or other approved
means of handling drainage in accordance with 01 57 23 Diversion and
Care of Water.
3.4.3 Dispose of water in accordance with 01 57 23 Diversion and Care of

Water.
3.5 Backfill Placement
3.5.1 Do not proceed with backfilling operations until the Owner has inspected
and approved installations and the prepared foundation surface.
3.5.2 Areas to be backfilled are to be free from debris, snow, ice, water and
frozen ground.
3.5.3 Backfill material shall not be placed when the ambient or ground
temperatures is below five degrees Celsius.
3.5.4 Do not use backfill material which is frozen, or contains ice, snow or other
deleterious debris.
3.5.5 Any material placed which does not meet the specified requirements shall
be removed or remixed, blended, disked, or otherwise reworked by and at
the expense of the Contractor to produce a material which does satisfy the
specified requirements.
3.5.6 Except as otherwise specified, backfill shall be discharged and spread in

such a manner that no gaps are left between adjacent discharged loads of
materials. Each load of fill shall be spread immediately as it is discharged.
The backfill shall be levelled prior to compaction to obtain a smooth
surface free from depressions.
3.5.7 Maintain a crowned surface on the backfill slopes during construction to

ensure ready runoff of surface water. Do not place material in free-
standing water.
3.5.8 Place backfill material in controlled, uniform layers not exceeding

maximum allowable lift thickness up to grades indicated below. Compact
each layer to the specified densities before placing the succeeding layer.
3.5.9 All oversize material shall be removed from the backfill material either
prior to its placement or after it is discharged and spread, but before
compaction operations are started.
334890-TU-210-S0-0046
3.5.10 Backfill adjacent to existing TMEP Pipelines and other Pipelines: All Work
shall be performed in accordance with the TMEP Pipeline Construction
Damage Prevention Plan.
3.5.11 Backfill around Installations and Structures:
3.5.11.1 Do not place backfill around or over cast-in-place concrete

sooner than 72 hours following the placement of the concrete or
until the concrete has attained the full seven day strength
specified, whichever comes later; unless approved by the
Owner.
3.5.11.2 Place backfill layers simultaneously on both sides of installed

works to equalize loading. Backfill elevation differences between
sides shall not exceed 300 mm. Lift heights can be increased
away from structures where larger compaction equipment is
permitted.
3.5.11.3 Control moisture content of the backfill material by either adding

water or drying out the material in order to assist in attaining the
required compaction. Moisture conditioning of backfill shall be
done at the Contractor's expense.
3.5.11.4 Keep heavy equipment at least 1.5 meters away from structures
unless permitted by the Owner.
3.6 Compaction
3.6.1 All backfill material, after placing, spreading and levelling to the
appropriate layer thickness, shall be compacted in accordance with the
requirements of this Specification.
3.6.2 Different compaction requirements are required for each of the different
backfill types. Compaction specifications consist of the required
percentage of Modified Proctor maximum dry density.
3.6.3 Where loading or spatial constraints preclude the use of large compaction
equipment, lift thicknesses shall be reduced by the Owner to ensure
adequate compaction is attained. Lift thicknesses may also be reduced by
the Owner depending on location of backfill, material type and compaction
method used..
3.6.4 Unless otherwise stated or directed, compaction and lift thicknesses for
the different backfill types are as follows:
334890-TU-210-S0-0046
Backfill
Material Lift Thickness Compaction Requirement
Type
Imported material
1 150 mm 95 percent Modified Proctor
or native soil
Imported material
or native soil
Screened / Crushed
Pipe Bedding Sand
3.6.5 Compaction of each lift of backfill shall proceed in a systematic, orderly

and continuous manner such as to ensure that the entirety of each lift
receives the compaction specified.
3.6.6 Follow MP3120 - Pipeline Construction Specification, Section 20.7

Compaction for pipeline construction specific requirements.
3.6.7 Moisture content of soil shall be controlled such that it is maintained at the
level required to achieve the specified compaction. Add water or aerate as
required.
3.6.8 The rolling pattern at all material type boundaries shall be such that the full
number of roller passes required in one of the adjacent zones or on one
side of the construction joint extends completely across the boundary or
joint.
3.6.9 Should the surface of the backfill become rutted or uneven subsequent to
compaction, it shall be re-graded and re-compacted, by and at the
expense of the Contractor, before the next layer of backfill is placed.
3.6.10 All particles of dimension that interferes with compaction in the layer
thicknesses specified, shall be removed, either prior to or during
compaction.
3.7 Finishing and Tolerances
3.7.1 Shape and compact fills and soils to within 20 mm of design elevations,
but not uniformly high or low.
3.7.2 Finish back and side slopes of common material to neat condition suitable
for seeding, true to line and grade.
3.7.3 Hand-finish slopes that cannot be finished satisfactorily by machine.
334890-TU-210-S0-0046
3.8 Restoration
3.8.1 All surplus fill material shall be transported to the designated disposal site.
3.8.2 Sufficient topsoil shall be placed to restore all areas within the Contractor’s
Limit of Construction.
3.8.3 Remove surface stones, roots and other debris and leave surface in
uniform condition.
3.8.4 Clean and reinstate areas affected by the Work as directed by the Owner.
3.8.5 Restore of the drainage systems and stream flows to match the original or
in accordance with the Owner’s requirements.
3.8.6 Final restoration of all vegetation that was removed with the approval of
the Owner will be restored by the Contractor, including the replanting of
trees as required by the Burnaby Tree Bylaw 1996.
(END OF SECTION)
334890-TU-210-S0-0046
31 57 00 Secant Pile Wall
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 2
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 2
1.2 Scope of Work ........................................................................................... 4
1.7 Submittals ................................................................................................ 10
1.8 Tolerances ............................................................................................... 14
2.0 PRODUCTS ....................................................................................................... 16

2.1 Equipment................................................................................................ 16
2.2 Materials .................................................................................................. 18
3.0 EXECUTION....................................................................................................... 20

3.1 General .................................................................................................... 20
3.2 Secant Pile Installation............................................................................. 20
3.3 Reinforcement Cage Placement .............................................................. 22
3.4 Secant Pile Concrete Placement ............................................................. 23
3.5 Secant Pile Field Inspection..................................................................... 23
3.6 Finishing .................................................................................................. 24
3.7 Repair of Defects ..................................................................................... 24
334890-TU-210-S0-0048
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction

PC-001.


following:


Trans Mountain


334890-TU-210-S0-0048
H. 1620 Shotcrete
334890-TU-210-S0-0048
Plan.
1.2 Scope of Work
1.2.1 This Specification includes construction of overlapping drilled shafts to

form an anchored secant pile wall for temporary shoring of tunnel portal
excavation and tunnel portal headwall. See 31 51 00 Ground Anchors for
drilling, installation and testing of ground anchors.
1.2.2 The work shall be performed in accordance with the Drawings and these
Specifications.
334890-TU-210-S0-0048
1.3.2 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.3.3 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement
1.3.5 31 51 00 Ground Anchors
1.4.1 Casing: Temporary steel cylinders used during drilled shaft construction to
resist earth and groundwater pressures, to serve as a concrete form, and
for personnel protection.
1.4.2 Cut Off Level: The elevation on the top of the secant pile where the
concrete pour ends.
1.4.3 Drilled Shaft: A wall element extending downward installed by drilling

through earth materials and groundwater to a specified design depth and
filled with steel/FRP reinforcing bars and structural concrete. Also referred
to as a pile.
1.4.4 Fiber-Reinforced Polymer (FRP) bars: Structural reinforcing bars made

from a composite material consisting of continuous fibers impregnated
with a fiber-binding polymer then molded and hardened in the intended
shape
1.4.5 Guide Wall Beam: A reinforced concrete template that is formed in the
ground prior to the start of the construction of the secant or tangent pile
walls. The Guide Wall Beam provides restraint to the position and
verticality of the secant/tangent piles, and aids in the support of the
reinforcing steel, casing extractors, etc. during the placement of concrete.
1.4.6 Primary Pile: The initial vertical pile, usually unreinforced (but can be
reinforced for some applications), typically constructed using rotary drilling
methods (including oscillator methods), which serves as soil support
between the secondary, reinforced piles.
1.4.7 Secant Pile Walls: Concrete walls that are formed with overlapping drilled
shafts that are reinforced with steel reinforcing bar cages. The concrete is
334890-TU-210-S0-0048
placed using the tremie method, below existing grade in fluid-filled and
cased bored holes stabilized with bentonite slurry.
1.4.8 Secondary Pile: A vertical reinforced concrete pile, typically constructed

using rotary drilling methods (including oscillator methods), which serves
as the support for the proposed earth retention system and can be used
for vertical loading (e.g., when the secant wall is used as an abutment, as
support for the superstructure, etc.).
1.4.9 TBM: Tunnel Boring Machine.
1.4.10 Tremie Method: A method used to place concrete by gravity into the
borehole where water and/or slurry are typically present. Concrete is
placed through a conduit (i.e., steel pipe or tube) into the bottom of the
borehole, and the concreting operation continues until the borehole is
completely filled from the bottom up.
1.4.11 Waler Beam: Steel wide flange or HP section that is used to transmit all
loads from the soil through the retaining wall to the steel tie-backs and to
align and brace the wall in its position.
1.5.2.1 ACI 211.1-91 (R2009), Standard Practice for Selecting

Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete.
1.5.2.2 ACI 301-10, Specifications for Structural Concrete.
1.5.2.3 ACI 304R-00, Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and

Placing Concrete.
1.5.2.4 ACI 305.1-14R, Specification for Hot Weather Concreting.
1.5.2.5 ACI 306.1-90 (R2002), Standard Specification for Cold Weather

Concreting.
1.5.2.6 ACI 336.1-01, Specification for the Construction of Drilled Piers.
1.5.2.7 ACI 336.3R-14, Report on Design and Construction of Drilled

Piers.
334890-TU-210-S0-0048
1.5.2.8 ACI 440.5M-08, Specification for Construction with Fiber-

Reinforced Polymer Reinforcing Bars
1.5.3 American Petroleum Institute (API)
1.5.3.1 API Specification 13A (18th Edition – 2010), Specification for

Drilling Fluid Materials.
1.5.3.2 API Recommended Practice 13B-1 (4th Edition – 2009),

Recommended Practice for Field Testing Water-Based Drilling
Fluids.
1.5.4 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1.5.4.1 ASTM A36/A36M-14, Standard Specification for Carbon

Structural Steel.
1.5.4.2 ASTM A283/A283M-13, Standard Specification for Low and

Intermediate Strength Carbon Steel Plates.
1.5.4.3 ASTM A416/A416M-16, Standard Specification for Steel Strand,

Uncoated Seven-Wire for Prestressed Concrete.
1.5.4.4 ASTM A536-84 (R2014), Standard Specification for Ductile Iron

Castings.
1.5.4.5 ASTM A615/A615M-15, Standard Specification for Deformed

and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
1.5.4.6 ASTM C109/C109M-16a, Standard Test Method for

Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars.

Cement.
1.5.4.8 ASTM C494/C494M-15a, Standard Specification for Chemical

1.5.4.9 ASTM D1785-15, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride

(PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
1.5.4.10 Where standards identify conflicting requirements, the more

stringent requirement shall apply unless otherwise specified
herein.
334890-TU-210-S0-0048
1.5.5.1 CSA W59-13, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).
1.5.5.2 CSA G40.20 / 40.21-13, General Requirements for Rolled or

Welded Structural Quality Steel / Structural Quality Steel.
1.6.1.1 The proposed work shall be accomplished by Contractors and

skilled workers thoroughly experienced in the necessary crafts
and having relevant experience with the anticipated subsurface
materials, water conditions, installation equipment, drilled shaft
dimensions, installation of ground anchors and any special
techniques required.
1.6.1.2 The Contractor shall have not less than three successfully
completed and documented projects within the past five years
where the Contractor performing the work has successfully
installed a secant or tangent wall system with drilled shafts
similar to the size, length, and type to be installed on the project.
The Contractor shall provide relevant details describing the
equipment and methods used, details pertaining to any
difficulties encountered, and how the difficulties were overcome.
The Contractor shall include the complete contact information
for at least one reference for each project cited.
1.6.1.3 Submit the name and experience record for the Contractor’s on-
site Drilling Supervisor for this work. The experience record
shall include, at a minimum, a record of successful installation of
a secant or tangent pile wall system and installing ground
anchors on at least two projects in last five years.
1.6.1.4 Submit the name and experience record for the Contractor’s
Drilling Operator for this work. The experience record shall
include, at a minimum, two years of experience installing ground
anchors, secant pile wall systems, or drilled shaft foundations
with similar diameters and lengths, and in similar ground
conditions using a technology similar to that proposed for this
work. The experience record shall include a record of successful
installation of a secant pile wall system on at least two projects
in the last five years.
334890-TU-210-S0-0048
1.6.1.5 Work shall not be started on any secant pile until the
Contractor's qualifications and field personnel qualifications are
approved by the Owner.
1.6.1.6 The Contractor is to submit to the Owner as-built installation

reports for each drilled shaft as outlined in this Specification.
1.6.2 Bentonite Slurry
1.6.2.1 Control Testing of Bentonite Slurry: Use suitable apparatus to

control testing of bentonite slurry to determine the density and
Marsh Cone viscosity of freshly mixed slurry as a check on the
quality of slurry being formed.
1.6.2.2 Calibrate density measuring devices monthly, or more often if

directed by the Owner, to an accuracy of plus 2 Pa.
1.6.2.3 pH: Test pH using Glass Electrode, pH Meter, or pH Paper.
1.6.2.4 Test Equipment and Methods: Provide test equipment and

methods that conform to the requirements of API RP 13B-1.
Alternative equipment may be employed subject to the Owner’s
prior approval.
1.6.2.5 Bentonite Slurry Inside Pile Borehole During Excavation:

Perform tests specified below to verify that properties of slurry
inside pile boreholes are within the specified limits. Take
samples from the top and bottom of the holes, and perform tests
every four hours, unless otherwise specified.
A. Test density, by Mud Density Balance
B. Test viscosity, by Marsh Cone Method
C. Measure fluid loss, by Filter Press. (Perform at least every two

days, or as directed by the Owner)
D. pH
E. Sand content
1.6.2.6 Bentonite Slurry in Pile Borehole Prior to Placing Concrete:

Immediately before placing concrete in any pile borehole, take a
sample of the slurry 300 mm from the bottom of the hole, and
test it for density and sand content. Modify or replace the slurry
334890-TU-210-S0-0048
in the hole if the density of the sample is found to exceed the

limit specified. Do not place any concrete in the hole until the
density of the slurry is correct and the sand content has been
found to be five percent or lower. Perform additional tests, such
as measurement of fluid loss, if requested by the Owner.
1.6.3 Quality Assurance


the performance or lack of performance shall not relieve the
contract documents.
1.7 Submittals
1.7.1 General:

1.7.2 Qualifications: At least 60 days prior to commencing portal excavation

1.7.2.1 Qualifications of Contractor and relevant subcontractors

performing the Work.
1.7.2.2 Name and experience resume of the Drilling Superintendent in

charge of secant pile wall construction operations.
1.7.2.3 Name and experience resume of the Drilling Operator.
334890-TU-210-S0-0048
1.7.3 Secant Pile Walls Details: at least 60 days prior to commencing portal
excavation activities, submit the following:
1.7.3.1 For any Contractor-modified secant pile wall or associated

details not shown on the Drawings, provide engineering
calculations and design assumptions per the Contract
Documents for loads, stresses and deformations of the secant
pile wall during intermediate construction stages as well as the
final stage. All design calculations are to be prepared, sealed,
and signed by a registered Professional Engineer in British
Columbia.
1.7.3.2 The Contractor shall design guide wall beams to meet the
requirements of their proposed construction method that takes
into account shaft size, ground conditions, and equipment used
to ensure stability and control tolerances.
1.7.3.3 For concrete, reinforcing steel and FRP bars that are part of the
Work of this Specification, submit mix designs, samples, and
other submittals specified in the 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place
Concrete and in the 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing.
1.7.3.4 Shop Drawings and narrative work plan shall show configuration
and details of completed secant pile wall shaft, and proposed
equipment and method of construction, including the following:
A. Reinforcing steel/FRP bars, including provision for lifting,

stiffening, splicing, and centralizing fabricated cages with
respect to the secant pile.
B. Details of reinforcing steel/FRP bar lap splices.
C. Details of plates, sleeves, pipes, and other embedded items,

including drainage or grout pipes, and requirements for
instruments and utilities to be installed in or through the wall.
D. Details of each utility service penetration, temporary relocation,

type and duration of interruption of service, provisions for non-
interruptible services, sequence of construction, and necessary
permits.
E. Details of block out material and block out locations.
F. Details of FRP bars in “soft-eye” zone for TBM penetration.
334890-TU-210-S0-0048
G. Manufacturer's product data.
H. Sequence of construction of the various secant piles forming

the shaft walls.
I. Details of guide wall beams to be used for positioning, surface

collaring, and verticality control during boring of secant piles.
J. Methods of casing advancement and excavation.
K. Method and locations of bentonite slurry preparation, site

distribution, reclamation, and disposal.
L. Slurry mix composition and methods of monitoring and testing

to comply with requirements specified herein.
M. Method of monitoring and maintaining slurry level in excavation

left open overnight, or over an extended period of time.
N. Method of monitoring deviation from vertical of bored holes

during excavation, and details of proposed corrective measures
to be implemented if necessary.
O. Equipment and method of checking and proving the cleanliness

of excavated borehole bottoms and soundness of foundation
material, before concreting.
P. Method of cleaning boreholes.
Q. Method of installing and securing steel/FRP reinforcing bars.
R. Method of placing concrete, including proposed operational

procedures for tremie and pumping methods, and treating
displaced slurry.
S. Measures and repair methods to protect the public and

surrounding property from hazards inherent in the operations,
including leakage and slurry spillage.
T. Locations of truck cleaning stations and methods of ensuring

that haul trucks are clean and that excavated material does not
spill from haul trucks on streets.
U. Method of handling leakage between adjoining secant piles.
334890-TU-210-S0-0048
V. Details of settling basin used for slurry operations.
W. Refer to 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete for other submittal

requirements.
1.7.4 Other Construction Submittals:
1.7.4.1 Work Records: A copy of the work record of all activities

performed during each work day shall be submitted to the
Owner within 24 hours of that day’s work being completed. All
unanticipated drilling and/or installation conditions encountered
shall be included in the Work Record. The Work Record shall
include:
A. Pile identification
B. Date and time of pile excavation
C. Plan dimensions of the excavation and elevations of pile top

and bottom
D. Descriptions of soils encountered, obstructions, and excavation

problems, if any.
1.7.4.2 Verticality As-Built Report: After each pile borehole has been
completed, submit to Owner the following:
B. Date and time of pile verticality testing
C. Type of instrument used to test pile verticality
D. Profile of pile verticality test results that shows pile deviation

from vertical as a function of depth
E. Maximum pile drift
F. After completion of all pile verticality tests, at the pile top and
bottom, submit a drafted plan showing the drift of each pile
from designed plan location and minimum inscribed ring that
accounts for as-built pile location and drift.
1.7.4.3 Bentonite Slurry Report: Daily submit to the Owner the

following:
334890-TU-210-S0-0048
B. Date and time of slurry testing
C. Type of instrument used to test slurry
D. Results of slurry testing and monitoring in accordance with the

requirements specified elsewhere in this Specification
1.7.4.4 Reinforcement Placement As-Built Report: After each pile is

completed, submit to the Owner the following:
B. Date and time or reinforcing steel/FRP placement
C. Reference to shop drawing details
D. Any deviation or variation from shop drawings
E. Details of geotechnical/structural instrumentation installed in

the pile, if any
1.7.4.5 Concrete Placement As-Built Report: After concrete has been

placed in each pile, submit to the Owner the following:
B. Date and time of tremie concrete placement
C. Indicate volume of excavation, theoretical volume of concrete

to be placed, and actual concrete volume placed
1.8 Tolerances
1.8.1 Secant Pile Wall
1.8.1.1 Pile Diameter: The allowable tolerance for the minimum

diameter of the drilled shaft is 25 mm smaller than the diameter
shown on the Drawings. The allowable tolerance for the
maximum diameter of the drilled shaft is 150 mm larger than the
diameter shown on the Drawings.
334890-TU-210-S0-0048
1.8.1.2 Horizontal Positioning: At cut-off level, the maximum permitted

deviation from the center of shaft shown on the Drawings shall
be 25 mm in any direction.
1.8.1.3 Verticality:
A. The maximum permitted deviation of the finished drilled shaft

from the vertical at any level is one in 200 (0.5%). The
Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of Owner the
pile verticality is within the allowable tolerance.
B. During drilling or excavation of the borehole, the Contractor

shall make frequent checks on the plumbness, alignment, and
dimensions of the borehole. Any deviation exceeding the
allowable tolerances shall be corrected with a procedure
1.8.1.4 Remove any protrusions, bulges, or cavities that compromise

the wall design, interfere with the means and methods or
interfere with the final structure.
1.8.1.5 Repair secant pile concrete in accordance with 03 30 00 Cast-

in-Place Concrete.
1.8.1.6 Formed Recesses: Position formed recesses and other devices

necessary for the temporary support system and other
appurtenant structures indicated within 75 mm of the indicated
location.
1.8.1.7 Steel Reinforcement and FRP Reinforcement Placement:
A. Normal to wall: Plus or minus 25 mm, except maintain

minimum of 50 mm of cover.
B. Longitudinal to wall: Plus or minus 75 mm.
C. Vertical: Plus or minus 25 mm.
D. Top of steel and bottom of steel elevations: As stated for

vertical tolerance, except maintain minimum of 75 mm of cover.
1.8.1.8
1.8.2 Full-Depth Temporary Casing
334890-TU-210-S0-0048
1.8.2.1 Handle and protect casing to maintain a diameter within plus or

minus two percent of specified diameter.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Equipment
2.1.1 Secant Pile Boring Equipment
2.1.1.1 Equipment used for secant pile excavation, drilling, and cleaning
operations shall be designed and intended to be used in
conjunction with a full-depth temporary casing for drilled shaft
installation. The equipment shall have adequate capacity,
including power, torque, and down thrust, to install and extract a
full-depth temporary casing and excavate a borehole to a depth
equal to the maximum depth shown on the Drawings plus an
additional 20 percent of the maximum depth. Anticipate and
make available at the work site all equipment necessary and
essential to penetrate soft and hard soils, as well as cobbles,
boulders, and man-made obstructions during drilled shaft
construction.
2.1.1.2 The equipment shall include overhead rotary drive components

that are capable of installing and extracting the full-depth
temporary casing by means of rotational or oscillatory motion.
Installation or removal of temporary casing by impact driving or
vibration is not permitted.
2.1.1.3 The equipment must be capable of advancing the temporary

casing a minimum of 1.5 meters ahead of the excavation inside
the casing until the shaft tip design elevation is reached.
Excavation ahead of the casing is not permitted without the
Owner’s approval.
2.1.1.4 Where hard soils or other materials, including natural or man-

made obstructions, are encountered and cannot be drilled using
conventional earth or rock augers, drilling buckets, and/or over
reaming tools, provide drilling equipment including, but not
limited to, rock core barrels, rock tools, down the hole hammer,
chisels, air tools, or any other equipment necessary to advance
the drilled shaft excavation to the depth and size as shown on
the plans.
334890-TU-210-S0-0048
2.1.1.5 Secant pile equipment shall have the capability for installing full-
depth temporary casing meeting the following requirements:
A. Temporary casing shall be steel, rigid, smooth, clean,

watertight, and of sufficient strength to withstand handling and
installation stresses, and pressure of concrete and surrounding
earth and groundwater.
B. Temporary casing must be of sufficient length to provide

temporary casing the full-depth of excavation for all drilled
shafts.
C. Segmented casing, if used, must be segmented using flush

bolted casing joints. Telescopic casing is not permitted. The
casing inside must be smooth to facilitate removal during
concrete placement.
D. The casing diameter shall not be less than the specified pile
size shown on the Drawings. All casing diameters shown on
the Drawings refer to outside diameter.
2.1.1.6 Secant pile equipment shall include bentonite slurry capability

as meeting the following requirements:
A. Use equipment with capability to remove all material of

whatever nature from the excavation, so arranged as to permit
the free vertical passage of slurry within the excavation and to
prevent development of suction or pressure, and such that
excavations do not exceed specified tolerances.
B. Slurry Mixing: Use equipment that produces a stable

suspension of bentonite and water along with necessary
mechanical agitation. Transport slurry by means of a temporary
pipeline or other methods approved by the Owner.
C. Slurry Reclaiming: Use equipment that separates the bentonite

from the excavated material in a matter to clean the bentonite
of soil particles before recirculation.
2.1.1.7 Provide equipment for checking the dimensions and alignment

of each pile borehole excavation.
2.1.2 Guide Wall Beams
2.1.2.1 Reinforced concrete guide wall beams are required.
334890-TU-210-S0-0048
2.1.2.2 Use equipment that aids in the control of secant pile surface
collaring, positioning, and verticality during boring to meet the
tolerances specified in this Specification.
2.1.2.3 Provide concrete, reinforcement, and formwork for guide wall

beams that meet requirements established elsewhere in the
Contract Documents.
2.1.2.4 Guide wall beams shall be a minimum depth of 0.5 meters and
have a minimum shoulder thickness of 0.3 meters.
2.2 Materials
2.2.1 General
2.2.1.1 The Contractor shall protect the materials from the elements by
appropriate means.
2.2.2 Concrete
2.2.2.1 Concrete for cast-in-place secant piles shall be Concrete Type 3

(Primary Piles) and Concrete Type 4 (Secondary Piles and Pile
Wall Capping Beam), refer to 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2.2.3 Slurry
2.2.3.1 Bentonite Drilling-Fluid Material: Selected from the substances

described in API RP 13A as determined by the Contractor to
produce slurry having the properties and meeting the
performance criteria specified below.
2.2.3.2 Mix Design: Unless otherwise approved by the Owner, obtain

slurry (mud) design from a specialized drilling fluid designer.
Hydration time for bentonite slurry is dependent on methods
used for mixing, agitation, and storage, but a minimum of six
hours before use.
2.2.3.3 Ingredients: Additives and chemicals may be added to the

slurry, upon the approval of the Owner, to maintain the
necessary properties. Restrict the use of polymers and
additives, and their disposal to all applicable laws, rules, and
regulations.
2.2.3.4 Lost Circulation Material (LCM): As necessary to prevent loss of

slurry through walls and bottoms of borings.
334890-TU-210-S0-0048
2.2.3.5 Water: Clean, potable, and free of impurities detrimental to

slurry, and compatible with the slurry mix design.
2.2.3.6 Proportions: As determined to produce slurry meeting the

performance criteria specified below.
2.2.3.7 Performance Criteria:
A. Hydrostatic Head Produced: Sufficient to prevent water and soil

inflow to the excavation. Maintain maximum head in pile
excavations at all times.
B. Gel Strength: Sufficient to seal weak and open soil formations.
C. Stability and Flow: Ensure that the slurry will remain stable and
fluid during excavation and until concreting is completed and
flows without gelling under displacement by concrete.
2.2.3.8 Slurry Properties:
A. Density: 1,050 kg/m³ minimum and 1,450 kg/m³ maximum.

Densities that will prevent excessive caking, provide adequate
pile borehole support, and are readily displaced by the tremie
concrete.
B. Viscosity: 70 seconds maximum by Marsh Cone Method.
C. pH: 8 to 11
D. Fluid loss: 25 mL maximum in 30 minutes, using a filter press.
E. Dwell time in the mixer: Minimum of 10 minutes.
F. Storage time: 6 hours minimum hydration time prior to pile

borehole use.
G. Sand Content: Maximum five percent measured 300 mm from

the bottom of the pile, prior to concreting.
2.2.4 Reinforcing Bars:
2.2.4.1 Bar reinforcement shall be in accordance with 03 20 00

Concrete Reinforcement. Non-corrosive spacers and boots shall
be used to properly position the reinforcing steel/FRP bars.
334890-TU-210-S0-0048
2.2.4.2 All vertical reinforcing steel shall be spliced using full strength
lap splices.
2.2.4.3 All vertical FRP reinforcing bars shall be spliced using lap
splices with wire tied between 100% of vertical reinforcement
and ties. Mechanical splices are not permitted for FRP bars
according to ACI 440.5. The reinforcing cage may need
additional support to reinforce the cage during handling and
placement operations.
2.2.5 Waler Beams:
2.2.5.1 Waler beams for secant piles shall be to CSA G40.21, Grade
350 MPa.
2.2.5.2 Welding materials to: CSA W59.
2.2.6 Water: to CSA A23.1, clear, free from oil, acid, alkali, organic matter,
sediment, or other substances harmful to the mixing and curing of
concrete.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 General
3.1.1 Perform construction that will allow a minimum elevation of slurry 600 mm
below ground level.
3.1.2 Conduct Work of this Specification so as not to damage facilities or

improvements that are to remain in place.
3.1.3 Do not start secant pile wall excavation until geotechnical instrumentation
for monitoring of the existing pipelines in the vicinity of the tunnel portal is
in place as shown on the Drawings.
3.1.4 Test the drilling fluid for compliance with the requirements specified
elsewhere in this Specification.
3.2 Secant Pile Installation
3.2.1 Carry out the Work in accordance with the accepted shop drawings and
submittals. Work shall be executed to produce a sound and durable
secant pile wall free of defects.
334890-TU-210-S0-0048
3.2.2 Advance secant piles though a guide wall beam to maintain horizontal
positioning and vertical tolerance as specified elsewhere in this
Specification.
3.2.3 Use excavation and boring equipment having adequate capacity as

described elsewhere in this Specification. The equipment shall further be
capable of meeting the specified pile verticality tolerances.
3.2.4 Support the secant pile excavation using full-depth temporary casing by
using overhead rotary drive equipment as specified elsewhere in this
Specification. Excavation ahead of the casing is not permitted. Maintain
the casing at least 1.5 meters ahead of the excavation within the casing.
3.2.5 In addition to using full-depth temporary casing, the secant piles must be
installed and excavated with bentonite slurry to maintain stability against
heave or blow-in in the bottom of the secant pile excavation. All drilling
operations shall be accomplished while maintaining a positive fluid head to
within 600 mm of the ground surface.
3.2.6 Perform borings continuously from ground surface to the required depth.
Excavate in a manner that does not cause movement or loss of ground.
3.2.7 Anticipate that boulders and other obstructions as indicated in the

Contract Geotechnical Documents may be encountered in excavating
secant piles. Employ special tools and procedures as necessary. Drilling
tools that are lost in the excavation shall not be considered obstructions
and shall be promptly removed. All costs due to removal of lost tools shall
be borne by the Contractor, including costs associated with borehole
degradation during removal operations or time while the borehole remains
open.
3.2.8 Take all reasonable precautions to prevent damage to existing structures

and utilities. These measures shall include, but are not limited to,
subsidence control during temporary casing installation and extraction or
excavation inside temporary casings.
3.2.9 Use boring methods that will minimize over-excavation and loosening and
caving of material outside designed pile diameter. Contain excavated
spoil. Pump contaminated slurry to a central processing plant.
3.2.10 Dispose of all excavated materials in accordance with applicable permits

and regulatory requirements established elsewhere in the Contract
Documents.
334890-TU-210-S0-0048
3.2.11 Do not advance borings until concrete in adjacent secant pile has cured
for a minimum of 72 hours and as approved by the Owner. Ensure that
damage does not occur to the completed shafts as a result of work on
adjacent shafts.
3.2.12 Limit tip elevation differences between the bottoms of adjacent piles to
300 mm, unless otherwise approved by the Owner to accommodate field
conditions.
3.3 Reinforcement Cage Placement
3.3.1 Before placing reinforcing steel and FRP reinforcement in the pile
borehole, clean the bottom of the hole of all loose material, and inspect
hole to determine that the required depth and diameter has been
achieved.
3.3.2 Do not place reinforcing steel assemblies that are distorted. Accurately
locate and secure in place the reinforcing steel assemblies prior to and
during the concrete placement. Use suitable guides and spacers to
maintain at least the minimum required cover between reinforcing steel
and the walls of the pile excavation, as shown on the drawings, as the
reinforcing steel assembly is lowered into the slurry-filled pile borehole.
Protect and maintain the alignment of block out panels, brace plates, and
other specified connections during placement of the cage.
3.3.3 Install geotechnical instrumentation inclinometer casings and grout pipes

in secondary secant piles as required by the drawings and in accordance
with 31 09 13 Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring.
3.3.4 Place reinforcing steel and FRP reinforcement in accordance with the
requirements for Concrete Reinforcement, established in 03 20 00
Concrete Reinforcing, and the following requirements specified in this
Specification.
3.3.5 Completely assemble and place the reinforcing steel cage consisting of
longitudinal bars, ties, caps, stiffener bars, spacers, and other necessary
appurtenances as a unit immediately after the pile borehole excavation is
inspected and accepted by the Owner before concrete placement.
3.3.6 If the bottom of the drilled pile borehole elevation is lower than the bottom
of the design elevation, extend all the longitudinal bars required in the
upper portion of the hole to the additional length. Continue ties and
stiffener bars for the extra depth.
334890-TU-210-S0-0048
3.3.7 Use concrete spacers or other approved spacing devices at sufficient

intervals to ensure concentric spacing for the reinforcing cage. A
minimum of three spacers shall be spaced evenly around the
circumference of any shaft with a maximum spacing of 2000 mm between
any two spacers. The first spacers shall be placed 500 mm from the shaft
bottom, with successive spacers at maximum intervals of two meters
along the secant pile height.
3.3.8 Provide approved cylindrical concrete feet (bottom supports) to ensure

that the bottom of the cage is maintained at the proper distance above the
base.
3.4 Secant Pile Concrete Placement
3.4.1 Refer to 03 30 00 Cast In Place Concrete
3.5 Secant Pile Field Inspection
3.5.1 Excavation Inspection: Perform inspection as boring for pile borehole

progresses. Immediately inform Owner of over-excavation, obstructions,
boulders, or boring that is out of tolerance.
3.5.2 Use inspection devices in the presence of the Owner before tremie
concreting, to demonstrate that the pile hole has been excavated to the
specified diameter, depth and verticality, the cleanliness of hole bottom;
and to insure that overlapping of piles is maintained.
3.5.3 After each pile is bored to required depth, verify exact X, Y, Z location of
pile. Correct piles exceeding the permissible tolerances by backfilling with
lean concrete or cement stabilized sand, and re-excavating them to the
required tolerance before placement of reinforcement and final concreting
proceeds.
3.5.4 Bentonite Slurry in Pile Hole Prior to Placing Concrete: Immediately prior
to placing concrete in any shaft wall pile borehole, take a sample of the
slurry 300 mm from the bottom of the hole, and test it for density and sand
content. Modify or replace the slurry in the hole if the density of the sample
is found to exceed limit specified. Do not place any concrete in the pile
hole until the density of the slurry in the pile borehole is correct and the
sand content has been found to be five percent or lower. Perform
additional tests, such as measurement of fluid loss, if requested by the
Owner.
334890-TU-210-S0-0048
3.6 Finishing
3.6.1 Remove all bentonite-contaminated concrete from areas where other

construction is to join the secant pile wall construction. Clean the exposed
wall face to remove bentonite caking and film materials and expose a
clean concrete surface.
3.7 Repair of Defects
3.7.1 Refer to 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete.
(END OF SECTION)
334890-TU-210-S0-0048
03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 2
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 2
1.2 Scope of Work ........................................................................................... 4
1.4 Glossary and Abbreviations – Not Used .................................................... 4
1.7 Submittals .................................................................................................. 6
2.0 PRODUCTS ......................................................................................................... 6

2.1 Materials .................................................................................................... 6
2.2 Fabrication ................................................................................................. 7
2.3 Source Quality Control ............................................................................... 7
3.0 EXECUTION......................................................................................................... 8
3.1 Field Bending ............................................................................................. 8
3.2 Placing Reinforcement ............................................................................... 8
334890-TU-210-S0-0049
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction

PC-001.


following:


Trans Mountain


334890-TU-210-S0-0049
H. 1620 Shotcrete
334890-TU-210-S0-0049
Plan.
1.2 Scope of Work
1.2.1 The Work specified in this section includes concrete reinforcing materials,
their fabrication and placing.
1.3.1 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.4 Glossary and Abbreviations – Not Used
334890-TU-210-S0-0049
1.5.1 Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada
1.5.1.1 Manual of Standard Practice.
1.5.2.1 ACI 315R-80, Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for

Reinforced Concrete Structure.
1.5.2.2 ACI 440R-15, Report on Fiber-Reinforced Polymer (FRP)

Reinforcement for Concrete Structures.
1.5.2.3 ACI 440.1R-15, Guide for the Design and Construction of

Structural Concrete Reinforced with Fiber-Reinforced Polymer
(FRP) Bars.
1.5.2.4 ACI 440.3R-12, Guide Test Methods for Fiber-Reinforced

Polymer (FRP) Composites for Reinforcing or Strengthening
Concrete and Masonry Structures.
1.5.2.5 ACI 440.5M-08, Specification for Construction with Fiber-

Reinforced Polymer Reinforcing Bars.
1.5.3.1 ASTM D7205/D7205M-06, Standard Test Method for Tensile

Properties of Fiber Reinforced Polymer Matrix Composite Bars.
1.5.4 Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
1.5.4.1 CSA A23.1-14, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete

Construction.
1.5.4.2 CSA G30.18-09 (R2014), Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement.
1.5.4.3 CSA G30.3-M1983 (R1998) Cold-drawn Steel Wire for Concrete

Structures.
1.5.4.4 CSA G30.5-M1983 (R1991), Welded Steel Wire Fabric for

Concrete Reinforcement.
1.5.4.5 CSA G40.21-13 Structural Quality Steels.
1.5.4.6 CSA W186-M1990 (R2012), Welding of Reinforcing Bars in

Reinforced Concrete Construction.
334890-TU-210-S0-0049

1.6.1 Upon request, provide the Owner with certified copy of mill test report of
reinforcing steel, showing physical and chemical analysis, at a minimum 4
weeks prior to commencing reinforcing work.
1.6.1.1 FRP tests shall be conducted in conformance with ACI 440.3 and
ASTM D7205.
1.6.2 All reinforcement shall be protected from the weather prior to installation.
1.7 Submittals
1.7.1 General

1.7.2 Submit shop drawings indicating bar bending details, lists, quantities of
reinforcement, sizes, spacings and locations of reinforcement with
identifying code marks to permit correct placement without reference to
structural drawings at least 30 days in advance of construction. Indicate
sizes, spacings and locations of chairs, spacers and hangers.
1.7.3 Prepare reinforcement drawings in accordance with Reinforcing Steel

Manual of Standard Practice – by Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada.
1.7.5 Detail lap lengths and bar development lengths to CSA A23.3, unless
otherwise indicated. Provide type C tension lap splices unless otherwise
indicated.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Reinforcing steel: billet steel, grade 400R, deformed bars to CSA G30.18,
unless indicated otherwise.
334890-TU-210-S0-0049
2.1.2 Cold-drawn annealed steel wire ties: to CSA G30.3.
2.1.3 Welded steel wire fabric: to CSA G30.5. Provide in flat sheets only.
2.1.4 Chairs, bolsters, bar supports, spacers: to CSA A23.1.
2.1.5 Plain round bars: to CSA G40.21.
2.1.6 Fiber-reinforced polymer reinforcing bars
2.1.6.1 FRP reinforcing bars shall be glass-fiber reinforced polymer

fibers embedded in a resing matrix, as specified in ACI 440R.
2.1.6.2 FRP reinforcing bars shall be ribbed along the entire bar length.
2.1.6.3 FRP reinforcing bars shall meet the requirements of ACI 440.3
and ASTM D7205, Grade F60.
2.2 Fabrication
2.2.1 Fabricate reinforcing steel in accordance with CSA A23.1, ACI 315, and
Reinforcing Steel Manual of Standard Practice by the Reinforcing Steel
Institute of Canada unless indicated otherwise.
2.2.2 Obtain the Owner's agreement for locations of reinforcement splices other
than those shown on shop drawings.
2.2.3 Welding of reinforcement will not be permitted except as approved by the

Owner. Welding of reinforcement shall be in accordance with CSA W186
where approved.
2.2.4 Ship bundles of bar reinforcement clearly identified in accordance with bar
bending details and lists.
2.3 Source Quality Control
2.3.1 Inform Owner of proposed source of material to be supplied and provide

Owner with certified copy of mill test report of reinforcing steel, showing
physical and chemical analysis, a minimum of 30 days prior to
commencing reinforcing Work.
334890-TU-210-S0-0049
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Field Bending
3.1.1 Do not field bend or field weld reinforcement except where indicated or
authorized by the Owner. When field bending is authorized, bend without
heat, applying a slow and steady pressure. Replace any bars, which have
cracks or splits.
3.1.2 Bending of FRP reinforcing bars can only be performed by the

manufacturer. Field bending of FRP reinforcing bars is prohibited.
3.2 Placing Reinforcement
3.2.1 Do not place reinforcing steel until Shop Drawings have been reviewed.
Fix reinforcing steel as indicated on reviewed shop drawings and in
accordance with CSA A23.1.
3.2.2 Ensure concrete cover to reinforcement is maintained.
3.2.3 Completed reinforcement shall be inspected by the Owner prior to placing

concrete.
(END OF SECTION)
334890-TU-210-S0-0049
31 51 00 Ground Anchors
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 2
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 2
1.2 Scope of Work ........................................................................................... 4
1.7 Submittals ................................................................................................ 17
1.8 Tolerances ............................................................................................... 20
2.0 PRODUCTS ....................................................................................................... 20

2.1 Equipment................................................................................................ 20
2.2 Materials .................................................................................................. 22
3.0 EXECUTION....................................................................................................... 25

3.1 Tendon Storage and Handling ................................................................. 25
3.2 Anchor Fabrication ................................................................................... 25
3.3 Drilling ...................................................................................................... 25
3.4 Grouting ................................................................................................... 26
3.5 Anchorage Installation ............................................................................. 27
3.6 Anchor Testing ......................................................................................... 28
3.7 Ground Anchors Decommissioning and Abandonment ........................... 28
3.8 Finishing .................................................................................................. 28
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction

PC-001.


following:


Trans Mountain


334890-TU-210-S0-0050
H. 1620 Shotcrete
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
Plan.
1.2 Scope of Work
1.2.1 This section provides technical requirements for constructing temporary

ground anchors as part of the secant pile retaining and the anchored
shotcrete retaining walls to support portal excavations as specified herein
and as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall provide all labour,
materials, and equipment required to complete the work.
1.2.2 The Work shall be performed in accordance with the Drawings and
Specifications. The work consists of drilling ground anchors drill holes to
the minimum diameter and minimum length required; grouting of minimum
bonded length, supplying and installing the specified drainage features;
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
supplying and installing anchor plates, wedge plates, wedges and other
required hardware and miscellaneous materials, and testing.
1.2.3 This Specification assumes that a specialty contractor will perform the
ground anchor work.
1.3.1 31 71 03 - Portal Area Development
1.3.2 31 57 00 - Secant Pile Wall
1.3.3 31 74 19 - Shotcrete
1.3.4 31 09 13 - Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring
1.4.1 Alignment Load (AL): A nominal minimum load applied to an anchor

during testing to keep the testing equipment correctly positioned.
1.4.2 Anchor: A system, used to transfer tensile loads to the ground (soil or
rock), which includes the prestressing steel, anchorage, corrosion
protection, sheathings, spacers, centralizers, and grout.
1.4.3 Anchor Head: The means by which the prestressing force is permanently
transmitted from the prestressing steel to the bearing plate. The anchor
head includes wedges and a wedge plate for strand tendons or an anchor
nut for bar tendons.
1.4.4 Anchor Nut: The threaded device that transfers the prestressing force in a
bar to a bearing plate.
1.4.5 Anchorage: The combined system of anchor head and bearing plate that
is capable of transmitting the prestressing force from the prestressing
steel to the surface of the ground or the supported structure.
1.4.6 Anchor Grout or Primary Grout: Portland cement grout that is injected into
the anchor hole prior to or after the installation of the anchor tendon to
provide for the force transfer to the surrounding ground along the bond
length of the tendon. Primary grout is also known as anchor grout.
1.4.7 Apparent Free Tendon Length: The length of tendon which is apparently
not bonded to the surrounding grout or ground, as calculated from the
elastic load extension data during testing.
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
1.4.8 Bearing Plate: A steel plate under the anchor head that distributes the
prestressing force to the anchored structure.
1.4.9 Bond Length: The length of the tendon that is bonded to the primary grout
and capable of transmitting the applied tensile load to the surrounding soil
or rock.
1.4.10 Bondbreaker: A sleeve placed over the anchor tendon in the free stressing
length to ensure unobstructed elongation of the tendon during stressing.
1.4.11 Centralizer: A device to support and position the tendon in the drill hole so
that a minimum grout cover is provided.

1.4.13 Coupler: The means by which the prestressing force can be transmitted
from one partial-length of a prestressing tendon to another (mainly for
bars).
1.4.14 Creep Movement: The movement that occurs during the creep test of an
anchor under a constant load.
1.4.15 Creep Test: A test to determine the movement of the ground anchor at a
constant load.
1.4.16 Design Load (DL): Anticipated final maximum effective load in the anchor
after allowance for time dependent losses or gains. The design load
includes appropriate load factors to ensure that the overall structure has
adequate capacity for its intended use.
1.4.17 Free Stressing (Unbonded) Length: The designed length of the tendon
that is not bonded to the surrounding ground or grout during stressing.
1.4.18 FPU: Specified minimum tensile strength of the tendon as defined in the
pertinent ASTM Specification.
1.4.19 Lift-Off: The load (lift-off load) in the tendon which can be checked at any
specified time with the use of a hydraulic jack, by lifting the anchor head
off the bearing plate.
1.4.20 Lock-Off Load: The prestressing force in an anchor immediately after

transferring the load from the jack to the stressing anchorage.
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
1.4.21 Performance Test: Incremental cyclic test loading of a prestressed anchor

in which the total movement of the anchor is recorded at each increment.
1.4.22 Proof Test: Incremental loading of a prestressed anchor recording the total
movement of the anchor at each increment.
1.4.23 Tendon: The complete anchor assembly (excluding grout) consisting of

prestressing steel, corrosion protection, sheathings, and coating when
required, as well as spacers and centralizers.
1.4.24 Test Load (TL): The maximum load to which the anchor is subjected
during testing.
1.4.25 Waler Beam: Steel wide flange or HP section that is used to transmit all
loads from the soil through the retaining wall to the steel tie bars and to
align and brace the wall in its position.

1.5.3 Reference: Ground Anchors and Anchored Systems, Publication No.

FHWA-IF-99-015.
1.5.4 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
1.5.4.1 AASHTO M183 (1998), Standard Specification for Structural

Steel
1.5.4.2 AASHTO M222 (1996), Standard Specification for High-

Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel
1.5.5.1 ASTM A283/A283M-13, Standard Specification for Low and

Intermediate Strength Carbon Steel Plates.
1.5.5.2 ASTM A416/A416M-16, Standard Specification for Steel Strand,

Uncoated Seven-Wire for Prestressed Concrete.
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
1.5.5.3 ASTM A981-11, Standard Test Method for Evaluating Bond

Strength for 15.2 mm (0.6 in.) Diameter Prestressing Steel
Strand, Grade 270, Uncoated, used in Prestressed Ground
Anchors.
1.5.5.4 ASTM A536-84 (R2014), Standard Specification for Ductile Iron

Castings
1.5.5.5 ASTM A615/A615M-15, Standard Specification for Deformed

and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
1.5.5.6 ASTM C109/C109M-16a, Standard Test Method for

Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars.

Cement.

1.5.5.9 ASTM D1785-15, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride

(PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
1.5.6.1 CSA W59-13, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).
1.5.6.2 CSA-G40.20 / 40.21-13, General Requirements for Rolled or

Welded Structural Quality Steel / Structural Quality Steel.
1.6.1.1 The Contractor performing the work described in this

Specification shall have installed temporary or permanent
ground anchors for a minimum of three (3) years.
1.6.1.2 The Contractor shall assign a Field Engineer to supervise the

work with at least three (3) years of experience in the design
and construction of permanent anchored structures. The
Contractor may not use consultants or manufacturer's
representatives in order to meet the requirements of this
section. Drill operators and on-site supervisors shall have a
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
minimum of one (1) year experience installing permanent

ground anchors with the Contractor's organization.
1.6.1.3 The Contractor shall assign a Drilling Supervisor to supervise

the work with at least three (3) years’ experience installing
similar ground support systems. The contractor shall name and
provide an experience record for the Contractor’s on-site Drilling
Supervisor. The experience record shall include, at a minimum,
a record of successful installation of a secant or tangent pile
wall system, a record of successful installation of anchored
shotcrete wall, and installing ground anchors on at least two
projects in last five years.
1.6.1.4 The Contractor shall assign a Drill Operator to supervise the

work with at least three (3) years’ experience installing similar
ground support systems. The Contractor shall name and
provide an experience record for the Contractor’s Drill Operator.
The experience record shall include, at a minimum, two years of
experience installing ground anchors, secant pile wall systems,
or drilled shaft foundations with similar diameters and lengths,
constructing anchored shotcrete wall, and in similar ground
conditions using a technology similar to that proposed for this
work. The experience record shall include a record of successful
installation of a secant pile wall system and shotcrete anchor
wall on at least two projects in the last five years.
1.6.2 Construction Quality Assurance
1.6.2.1 The Construction Quality Assurance (CQA) Inspector will

monitor all aspects of anchored wall construction. The CQA
Inspector will perform material conformance testing as required.
The Contractor shall be aware of the activities required by the
CQA Inspector and shall account for these activities in the
construction schedule. The Contractor shall correct all
deficiencies and nonconformities identified by the CQA
Inspector at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.6.3 Ground Anchors Testing
1.6.3.1 General
A. Each ground anchor shall be tested. No load greater than ten

(10) percent of the design load can be applied to the ground
anchor prior to testing.
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
B. No load greater than five (5) percent of the design load can be
applied to the ground anchor prior to initial testing.
C. The maximum test load shall be 120 percent of the Design

Load and shall not exceed 65 percent of the specified minimum
ultimate tensile strength of the pre-stressing steel of the tendon
and shall not exceed 90 percent of the specified ultimate
tensile strength of the tendon at which there is a permanent
strain of 0.1 percent. The test load shall be simultaneously
applied to the entire tendon. Stressing of single elements of
multi-element tendons shall not be permitted.
D. Do not perform testing unless tieback anchors have sufficiently

cured, to develop the strength necessary to support the test
load unless otherwise accepted by the Owner.
E. Test all tiebacks in the presence of the Owner. Tieback tests

will provide a basis for acceptance.
1.6.3.2 Testing Equipment shall consist of:
A. Furnish dial gauge, dial gauge support, load cell, hydraulic jack
and pump, stressing anchorage, pressure gauges.
B. A dial gauge or Vernier scale capable of measuring to 0.025

mm shall be used to measure the ground anchor movement.
The movement-measuring device shall have a minimum travel
equal to the theoretical elastic elongation of the total anchor
length at the maximum test load and it shall have adequate
travel so the ground anchor movement can be measured
without resetting the device at an interim point.
C. A hydraulic jack and pump shall be used to apply the test load.
The jack and a calibrated primary pressure gauge shall be
used to measure the applied load. The jack and primary
pressure gauge shall be calibrated by an independent firm as a
unit. The calibration shall have been performed within 45
working days of the date when the calibration submittals are
provided to the Owner. Testing cannot commence until the
Owner has approved the calibration. The primary pressure
gauge shall be graduated in 0.69 MPa increments or less. The
ram travel shall be at least 152 mm and preferably not be less
than theoretical elongation of the tendon at the maximum test
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
load. If elongations greater than 152 mm are required,

restroking can be allowed.
D. A calibrated reference pressure gauge shall also be kept at the

site to periodically check the production (primary pressure)
gauge. The reference gauge shall be calibrated with the test
jack and primary pressure gauge. The reference pressure
gauge shall be stored indoors and not subjected to rough
treatment.
E. The stressing equipment shall be placed over the ground

anchor tendon in such a manner that the jack, bearing plates,
and stressing anchorage are axially aligned with the tendon
and the tendon is cantered within the equipment.
1.6.3.3 Dial gauges shall be capable of measuring to 0.025 mm and

aligned perpendicular to the end of the tendon, or other plane of
measurement. Dial gauges with travels greater than 100 mm
are not recommended.
1.6.3.4 Stressing Equipment
A. The stressing equipment, the sequence of stressing and the

procedure to be used for each stressing operation shall be
determined at the planning stage of the project. The equipment
shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
operating instructions.
B. Stressing equipment shall preferably be capable of stressing

the whole tendon in one stroke to the specified Test Load and
the equipment shall be capable of stressing the tendon to the
maximum specified Test Load within 75 percent of the rated
capacity. The pump shall be capable of applying each load
increment in less than 60 seconds.
C. The equipment shall permit the tendon to be stressed in

increments so that the load in the tendon can be raised or
lowered in accordance with the test specifications, and allow
the anchor to be lift-off tested to confirm the lock-off load.
D. Stressing equipment shall be recently calibrated within an

accuracy of plus or minus two percent prior to use. The
calibration certificate and graph shall be available on site at all
times.
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
1.6.3.5 Load Testing Setup
A. Dial gauges shall bear on the pulling head of the jack and their
stems shall be coaxial with the tendon direction. The gauges
shall be supported on an independent, fixed frame, such as a
tripod, which will not move as a result of stressing or other
construction activities during the operation.
B. Prior to setting the dial gauges, the Alignment Load (AL) shall
be accurately placed on the tendon. The magnitude of AL
depends on type and length of the tendon.
C. Regripping of strands, which would cause overlapping wedge

bites, or wedge bites on the tendon below the anchor head,
shall be avoided.
D. Stressing and testing of multiple element tendons with single

element jacks is not permitted.
E. Stressing shall not begin before the grout has reached

minimum of 70 percent of 28 day strength.
1.6.3.6 Performance Testing of Ground Anchors
A. Five (5) percent of the ground anchors or a minimum of three

(3) ground anchors, whichever is greater, shall be performance
tested in accordance with the procedures described below. The
Owner shall select the ground anchors to be performance
tested. The remaining ground anchors shall be tested in
accordance with the proof test procedures (see Section
1.6.3.7).
B. The performance test shall be performed by incrementally

loading and unloading the ground anchor to a maximum test
load of 120 percent of the Design Load (DL) in accordance with
the loading schedule indicated in Table 1-1.
TABLE 1-1 PERFORMANCE TEST LOAD SCHEDULE
Step Loading Test Load Increment
1 0.05 DL max (AL)

2 Cycle 1 0.25 DL, AL
3 Cycle 2 0.25 DL, 0.50 DL, AL
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
4 Cycle 3 0.25 DL, 0.50 DL, 0.75 DL, AL
5 Cycle 4 0.25 DL, 0.50 DL, 0.75 DL, 1.00 DL, AL
6 Cycle 5 0.25 DL, 0.50 DL, 0.75 DL, 1.00 DL,1.20 DL

7 0.05 DL max (AL)
C. The load shall be raised from one increment to another

immediately after recording the ground anchor movement.
D. The ground anchor movement shall be measured and recorded

to the nearest 0.025 mm with respect to an independent fixed
reference point at the alignment load and at each increment of
load.
E. The load shall be monitored with the primary pressure gauge.

The reference pressure gauge shall be placed in series with
the primary pressure gauge during each performance test. If
the load determined by the reference pressure gauge and the
load determined by the primary pressure gauge differ by more
than ten percent, the jack, primary gauge and reference
pressure gauge shall be recalibrated.
F. At load increments other than the maximum test load, the load
shall be held just long enough to obtain the movement reading.
G. The maximum test load in a performance test shall be held for

ten minutes. A load cell shall be used to monitor small changes
in load during constant load-hold periods.
H. The jack shall be adjusted as necessary in order to maintain a

constant load. The load-hold period shall start as soon as the
maximum test load is applied and the ground anchor
movement, with respect to a fixed reference, shall be measured
and recorded at one minute, two, three, four, five, six and ten
minutes. If the ground anchor movement between one minute
and ten minutes exceeds one mm, the maximum test load shall
be held for an additional 50 minutes. If the load hold is
extended, the ground anchor movement shall be recorded at
156 minutes, 20, 30, 40, 50 and 60 minutes.
1.6.3.7 Proof Testing of ground anchors
A. The proof test shall be performed by incrementally loading the

ground anchors to a maximum test load of 120 percent of the
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
Design Load (DL) in accordance with the loading schedule

indicated in Table 1-2.
TABLE 1-2 PROOF TEST LOAD SCHEDULE
Test Load Increment

0.05 DL max (AL)
0.25 DL
0.50 DL
0.75 DL
1.00 DL
1.20 DL
Reduce to lock-off load
AL (optional)
Adjust to lock-off load
B. The load shall be raised from one increment to the next

immediately after recording the ground anchor movement.
C. The ground anchor movement shall be measured and recorded

to the nearest 0.025 mm with respect to an independent fixed
reference point at the alignment load and at each increment of
load.
D. The load shall be monitored with the primary pressure gauge.
E. At load increments other than the maximum test load, the load
shall be held just long enough to obtain the movement reading.
F. The maximum test load in proof test shall be held for 10

minutes. The jack shall be adjusted as necessary in order to
maintain a constant load. The load-hold period shall start as
soon as the maximum test load is applied and the ground
anchor movement with respect to a fixed reference shall be
measured and recorded at one minute, two, three, four, five, six
and ten minutes. If the ground anchor movement between one
minute and ten minutes exceeds one mm, the maximum test
load shall be held for an additional 50 minutes. If the load hold
is extended, the ground anchor movements shall be recorded
at 15 minutes, 20, 30, 40, 50 and 60 minutes.
1.6.3.8 Anchor Lift-Off Test
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
A. Perform lift-off tests on all anchors. The lift-off tests shall

comprise an initial test following transfer of the stressing load to
the tieback anchor assembly and prior to removal of the jack,
and a second lift-off test if directed by the Owner.
B. Loading of the anchors shall be increased until elongation of

the tieback anchor occurs. At the point elongation occurs, the
load shall be held long enough for the load cell and jack
pressure gauge to be read.
C. Tieback anchor protrusions shall not be cut off until the Owner
has determined no further lift-off tests shall be performed.
1.6.3.9 Acceptance Criteria
A. A performance-tested or proof-tested ground anchor with a 10

minute load hold shall be acceptable if:
i. The ground anchor resists the maximum test load with less
than one mm of movement between one minute and 10
minutes;
ii. Total elastic movement at the maximum test load exceeds

80 percent of the theoretical elastic elongation of the
unbonded length.
B. A performance-tested or proof-tested ground anchor with a 60

minute load hold shall be acceptable if:
i. The ground anchor resists the maximum test load with a

creep rate that does not exceed two mm in the last log
cycle of time;
ii. Total elastic movement at the maximum test load exceeds

80 percent of the theoretical elastic elongation of the
unbonded length.
C. The initial lift-off reading shall be within plus or minus five

percent of the designed lock-off load. If this criterion is not met,
the tendon load shall be adjusted accordingly and the initial lift-
off reading repeated.
1.6.3.10 Procedures for anchors failing acceptance criteria
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
A. Anchors that do not satisfy the minimum apparent free length

criteria shall be either rejected and replaced at no additional
cost to the Owner or locked off at no more than 50 percent of
the maximum acceptable load attained. In this event, no further
acceptance criteria are applied.
B. Regroutable anchors which satisfy the minimum apparent free

length criteria but which fail the extended creep test at the test
load may be postgrouted and subjected to an enhanced creep
criterion. This enhanced criterion requires a creep movement of
not more than one mm between one and 60 minutes at test
load. Anchors which satisfy the enhanced creep criterion shall
be locked off at the design lock-off load. Anchors which cannot
be postgrouted or regroutable anchors that do not satisfy the
enhanced creep criterion shall be either rejected or locked off
at 50 percent of the maximum acceptable test load attained as
directed by the Engineer. In this event, no further acceptance
criteria are applied. The maximum acceptable test load with
respect to creep shall correspond to that where acceptable
creep movements are measured over the final log cycle of time.
C. If the anchor fails the Owner shall modify the design and/or the
Contractor shall modify the construction procedures. These
modifications may include, but are not limited to, installing
additional anchors, modifying the installation methods,
reducing the anchor design load by increasing the number of
anchors, increasing the anchor length, or changing the anchor
type. Any modification of design or construction procedures
shall be at no charge to the Owner. A description of any
proposed modifications must be submitted to the Owner in
writing. Proposed modifications shall not be implemented until
the Contractor receives written approval from the Owner.
1.6.3.11 Anchor Lock-Off
A. After testing has been completed, the load in the tendon shall
be such that after seating losses (i.e. wedge seating), the
specified lock-off load has been applied to the anchor tendon.
B. The magnitude of the lock-off load shall be specified by the

Owner and shall not exceed 70 percent of ultimate strength of
anchor (Fpu).
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
C. The wedges shall be seated at a minimum load of 50 percent

of Fpu. If the lock-off load is less than 50 percent of Fpu, shims
shall be used under the wedge plate and the wedges seated at
50 percent of Fpu. The shims shall then be removed to reduce
the load in the tendon to the desired lock-off load.
1.6.3.12 Quality Assurance
A. The Owner, at his/her discretion, may complete random quality

B. Sampling and testing methods used by the Owner to determine

contract documents.
1.7 Submittals
1.7.1 General:

1.7.2 Qualifications: At least 60 days prior to commencing portal excavation

1.7.2.1 The Contractor shall submit a list containing at least five (5)
projects completed within the last five (5) years. For each
project, the Contractor shall include with this submittal, at a
minimum: (1) name of client contact, address, and telephone
number; (2) location of project; (3) contract value; and (4)
scheduled completion date and actual completion date for the
project.
1.7.2.2 Resumes of the Contractor’s staff. Only those individuals

designated as meeting the qualification requirements shall be
used for the project. The Contractor cannot substitute for any of
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
these individuals without written approval of the Owner. The

Owner shall approve or reject the Contractor's qualifications and
staff within fifteen (15) working days after receipt of the
submission. Work shall not be started on any anchored wall
system nor materials ordered until the Contractor's qualifications
have been approved by the Owner. The Owner may suspend
the work if the Contractor substitutes unqualified personnel for
approved personnel during construction. If work is suspended
due to the substitution of unqualified personnel, the Contractor
shall be fully liable for additional costs resulting from the
suspension of work and no adjustment in contract time resulting
from the suspension of work will be allowed.
1.7.2.3 The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Owner for
review and approval the ground anchor system or systems
intended for use. The submission shall include the following:
A. A drawing of the ground anchor system including details for the

following:
i. Spacers and their location;
ii. Centralizers and their location; and
iii. Anchorage and trumpet.
B. Certificates of Compliance for the following materials, if used.

The certificate shall state that the material or assemblies to be
provided will fully comply with the requirements of the contract.
i. Prestressing steel, strand or bar;
ii. Portland cement;
iii. Prestressing hardware; and
iv. Bearing plates.
1.7.2.4 Mill test reports for the prestressing steel and the bearing plate
steel. The Owner may require the Contractor to provide samples
of any ground anchor material intended for use on the project.
1.7.2.5 Identification number and calibration test results for each test
jack, pressure gauge, and load cell. Calibrate the test jack and
pressure gauge as one unit. Submit results from calibration
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
tests conducted by an independent testing laboratory within the

previous 90 days.
1.7.2.6 Manufacturer Certificates of Compliance for the tendon ultimate

strength, welded wire fabric steel, rebar steel, bearing plates.
1.7.2.7 Proposed retaining wall construction sequence. Include the

proposed method of excavating to ensure wall and slope
stability.
1.7.2.8 Drilling and grouting methods and equipment. Include drill hole
diameter to achieve the specified pullout resistance values and
any variation of drill hole diameter or specific pullout resistance
along the wall alignment.
1.7.2.9 Grout mix design, placement procedures, and equipment.

Include test results conducted according to ASTM C109/C109M
and supplied by a qualified testing lab verifying the specified
minimum 3-day and 28-day grout compressive strengths.
Previous test results for the same grout mix completed within
one year of grouting are acceptable.
1.7.2.10 Temporary shotcrete materials and methods, including mix and

anticipated strength meeting the minimum compressive
strengths in accordance with Section 31 74 19 Shotcrete.
1.7.2.11 Ground anchor testing methods and equipment setup.
1.7.3 The Contractor shall submit to the Owner within twenty (20) calendar days
after completion of the ground anchor work a report containing:
1.7.3.1 Prestressing steel manufacturer's mill test reports for the

tendons incorporated in the installation;
1.7.3.2 Grouting records indicating the cement type, quantity injected

and the grout pressures;
1.7.3.3 Ground anchor test results and graphs; and
1.7.3.4 As-built drawings showing the location and orientation of each

ground anchor, anchor capacity, tendon type, total anchor
length, bond length, unbonded length, and tendon bond length
as installed and locations of all instruments installed by the
Owner.
334890-TU-210-S0-0050


contract documents.
1.8 Tolerances
1.8.1 The drill hole centres shall be located within 75 mm of the set-out point for
each and every ground anchor at the location as shown on the Drawings.
1.8.2 The drill hole shall be located so the longitudinal axis of the drill hole and
the longitudinal axis of the tendon are parallel. In particular, the ground
anchor hole shall not be drilled in a location that requires the tendon to be
bent in order to enable the bearing plate to be connected to the supported
structure.
1.8.3 At the point of entry the ground anchor shall be installed within plus/minus
two (2) degrees of the inclination from horizontal shown on the Drawings.
1.8.4 At the point of entry the horizontal angle made by the ground anchor and
the structure shall be within plus/minus two (2) degrees of a line drawn
perpendicular to the plane of the structure unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings
1.8.5 Placement of the reinforcement shall be maximum plus or minus 15 mm.
1.8.6 The ground anchors shall not extend beyond the right-of-way or easement
limits shown on the Drawings.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Equipment
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
2.1.1 Ground anchor drilling and installation equipment shall be capable of

installing tie-backs in the anticipated conditions described in the Contract
Geotechnical Reports, including the capability for casing the drill hole to
cope with borehole stability.
2.1.2 Stressing Equipment
2.1.2.1 The testing equipment shall consist of:
A. A dial gauge or Vernier scale capable of measuring to the

nearest 0.025 mm shall be used to measure the ground anchor
movement. The movement-measuring device shall have a
minimum travel equal to the theoretical elastic elongation of the
total anchor length at the maximum test load and it shall have
adequate travel so the ground anchor movement can be
measured without resetting the device at an interim point.
B. A hydraulic jack and pump shall be used to apply the test load.
The jack and a calibrated primary pressure gauge shall be
used to measure the applied load. The jack and primary
pressure gauge shall be calibrated by an independent firm as a
unit. The calibration shall have been performed within forty-five
(45) working days of the date when the calibration submittals
are provided to the Owner. Testing cannot commence until the
Owner has approved the calibration. The primary pressure
gauge shall be graduated in 0.69 MPa increments or less. The
ram travel shall be at least 152 mm and preferably not be less
than the theoretical elongation of the tendon at the maximum
test load. If elongations greater than 152 mm are required,
restroking can be allowed.
C. A calibrated reference pressure gauge shall also be kept at the

site to periodically check the production (i.e., primary pressure)
gauge. The reference gauge shall be calibrated with the test
jack and primary pressure gauge. The reference pressure
gauge shall be stored indoors and not subjected to rough
treatment.
D. The stressing equipment shall be placed over the ground

anchor tendon in such a manner that the jack, bearing plates,
load cells and stressing anchorage are axially aligned with the
tendon and the tendon is centered within the equipment.
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
2.1.2.2 The stressing equipment, the sequence of stressing and the

procedure to be used for each stressing operation shall be
determined at the planning stage of the project. The equipment
shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
operating instructions.
2.1.2.3 Stressing equipment shall preferably be capable of stressing the

whole tendon in one stroke to the specified Test Load and the
equipment shall be capable of stressing the tendon to the
maximum specified Test Load within 75% of the rated capacity.
The pump shall be capable of applying each load increment in
less than 60 seconds.
2.1.2.4 The equipment shall permit the tendon to be stressed in

increments so that the load in the tendon can be raised or
lowered in accordance with the test specifications, and allow the
anchor to be lift-off tested to confirm the lock-off load.
2.1.2.5 Stressing equipment shall be recently calibrated within an

accuracy of plus or minus two (2) percent prior to use. The
calibration certificate and graph shall be available on site at all
times.
2.2 Materials
2.2.1 General
2.2.1.1 The Contractor shall protect the materials from the elements by
appropriate means. Prestressing steel strands and bars shall be
stored and handled in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and in such a manner that no damage to the
component parts occurs. All steel components shall be
protected from the elements at all times. Cement and additives
for grout shall be stored under cover and protected against
moisture.
2.2.2 Ground Anchor Tendons
2.2.2.1 Tendons used for secant pile wall as shown on the Drawings
shall consist of 15.2-mm diameter prestressing steel strands
Grade 270, and complying with ASTM A416.
2.2.2.2 Tendons used for anchored shotcrete wall as shown on the

Drawings shall consist of a self-drilling hollow core prestressing
steel bars in compliance with ASTM A615 standards.
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
2.2.3 Anchorage Devices
2.2.3.1 Stressing anchorages shall be a combination of either a steel

bearing plate with wedge plate and wedges, or a steel bearing
plate with a threaded anchor nut. The steel bearing and wedge
plate may also be combined into a single element. Anchorage
devices shall be capable of developing 95 percent of the
specified minimum ultimate tensile strength of the prestressing
steel tendon.
2.2.3.2 An anchor head shall be detensionable that permits the tendon
to be completely detensioned in a controlled way at any time

during the life of the structure.
2.2.3.3 The bearing plate shall be fabricated from steel conforming to

AASHTO M183 or M222 specifications, or equivalent, or may be
a ductile iron casting conforming to ASTM A536.
2.2.3.4 Anchorage covers shall be fabricated from steel or plastic with a

minimum thickness of 2.3 mm. The joint between the cover and
the bearing plate shall be watertight.
2.2.3.5 Prestressing steel bar couplers shall be capable of developing

100 percent of the minimum specified ultimate tensile strength
of the prestressing steel bar. Steel strands used for a soil or
rock anchor shall be continuous with no splices, unless
2.2.3.6 Centralizers shall be provided at maximum intervals of 3 m with

the deepest centralizer located 0.3 m from the end of the anchor
and the upper centralizer for the bond zone located no more
than 1.5 m from the top of the tendon bond length. Spacers
shall be used to separate the steel strands of strand tendons.
Spacers shall be provided at maximum intervals of 3 m and may
be combined with centralizers.
2.2.3.7 Spacers shall be used to separate elements of a multi-element

tendon and shall permit grout to freely flow around the tendon
and up the drill hole. Spacers shall be fabricated from plastic,
steel or material which is nondetrimental to the prestressing
steel. Wood shall not be used. A combination centralizer-spacer
may be used.
2.2.4 Bondbreaker
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
2.2.4.1 The bondbreaker shall be fabricated from a smooth plastic tube

or pipe having the following properties: (1) resistant to chemical
attack from aggressive environments, grout, or corrosion
inhibiting compound; (2) resistant to aging by ultra-violet light;
(3) fabricated from material nondetrimental to the tendon; (4)
capable of withstanding abrasion, impact, and bending during
handling and installation; (5) enable the tendon to elongate
during testing and stressing; and (6) allow the tendon to remain
unbonded after lock-off.
2.2.5 Grout
2.2.5.1 Grout shall be a non-shrink cementitious material. Grout shall

be made of Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150 Type I,
II, III, V or Type I/II and shall be the produce of one
manufacturer. If the brand or type of cement is changed during
the project, additional grout mix tests shall be conducted to
ensure consistency of quality and performance in situ.
2.2.5.2 The grout shall be a pumpable neat mixture of cement and

water and shall be stable (bleed less than 2 percent), fluid.
2.2.5.3 The minimum compressive strength for grout should be a

minimum 10 MPa at 3 days and a minimum 25 MPa at 28 days,
meeting the requirements of ASTM C109.
2.2.6 Grout Admixtures
2.2.6.1 Admixtures which control bleed, improve flowability, reduce

water content, and retard set may be used in the grout subject
to the approval of the Owner. Admixtures, if used, shall be
compatible with the prestressing steels and mixed in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Expansive admixtures may only be added to the grout used for
filling sealed encapsulations, trumpets, and anchorage covers.
Accelerators shall not be permitted.
2.2.6.2 Accelerators shall not be permitted.
2.2.7 Grouting tubes
2.2.7.1 Primary grouting tubes shall be minimum 12 mm diameter

Schedule 40 PVC tubing conforming to ASTM D1785.
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
2.2.7.2 Re-grouting or secondary grouting tubes shall be minimum 20

mm diameter Schedule 40 PVC sleeve-port pipe tubing
conforming to ASTM D1785 with valves at 1.5 meters center-to
center spacing within the tieback anchor bond length.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Tendon Storage and Handling
3.1.1 Tendons shall be handled and stored in such a manner as to avoid

damage or corrosion. Prestressing steel shall be protected from dirt, rust,
or deleterious substances. A light coating of rust on the steel is
acceptable. If heavy corrosion or pitting is noted, the Owner shall reject
the affected tendons.
3.2 Anchor Fabrication
3.2.1 Anchors shall be either shop or field fabricated from materials conforming
to Section 2.2 of the Specification.
3.2.2 Prestressing steel shall be cut with an abrasive saw or, with the approval
of the prestressing steel supplier, an oxyacetylene torch.
3.2.3 All of the tendon bond length, especially for strand, must be free of dirt,
manufacturers' lubricants, corrosion-inhibitive coatings, or other
deleterious substances that may significantly affect the grout-to-tendon
bond or the service life of the tendon.
3.3 Drilling
3.3.1 Drilling methods shall be left to the discretion of the Contractor, whenever
possible. The Contractor shall be responsible for using a drilling method to
establish a stable hole of adequate dimensions, within the tolerances
specified. Drilling methods may involve, amongst others, rotary,
percussion, rotary/percussive or auger drilling; or percussive or vibratory
driven casing.
3.3.2 Drilling procedures shall be subject to review and acceptance by the

Owner for compliance with and suitability for use in the ground conditions
and associated construction requirements as characterized and presented
in the Contract Geotechnical Reports.
3.3.3 Holes for anchors shall be drilled at the locations and to the length,
inclination and diameter shown on the Drawings and shall be in
accordance with tolerances described in Section 1.8.
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
3.3.4 The minimum drill hole diameter shall be 75mm for installation of anchors
consisting of the a self-drilling hollow core prestressing steel bars, and 150
mm for installation of anchors consisting of the 15.2-mm diameter
prestressing steel strands. Internal casing and associated drill hole
diameters shall be selected to successfully install fully-assembled tieback
anchors inside the temporary casing to the bottom of the drilled hole for
the full length of the ground anchor.
3.3.5 After drilling, each drill hole shall be thoroughly cleaned of all drill cuttings,
sludge and debris by flushing with clean water. Temporary casing is
necessary through fill, soil and shale bedrock to maintain a clean open
hole for the full length of the tieback anchor.
3.3.6 Drilled holes that are found to be collapsed or otherwise unstable such
that tieback anchors cannot be successfully installed shall be stabilized by
completely backfilling with cement grout by tremie grout placement. After
curing a minimum of 24 hours, the grouted hole shall be re-drilled to the
full design length.
3.3.7 Anchor assembly placement
3.3.8 Tendons shall be placed in accordance with the Drawings and details and
the recommendations of the tendon manufacturer or specialist anchor
contractor. The tendon shall be inserted into the drill hole to the desired
depth. When the tendon cannot be completely inserted, the Contractor
shall remove the tendon from the drill hole and clean or re-drill the hole to
permit insertion. Partially inserted tendons shall not be driven or forced
into the hole.
3.3.9 Each anchor tendon shall be inspected by field personnel during

installation into the drill hole or casing. Loose spacers or centralizers shall
be reconnected to prevent shifting during insertion.
3.4 Grouting
3.4.1 The Contractor shall use a neat cement grout or a sand-cement grout. The
cement shall not contain lumps or other indications of hydration.
Admixtures, if used, shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.4.2 The grouting equipment shall produce a grout free of lumps and
undispersed cement. A positive displacement grout pump shall be used.
The pump shall be equipped with a pressure gauge to monitor grout
pressures. The pressure gauge shall be capable of measuring pressures
of at least 1 MPa or twice the actual grout pressures used by the
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
Contractor, whichever is greater. The grouting equipment shall be sized to

enable the grout to be pumped in one continuous operation. The mixer
should be capable of continuously agitating the grout.
3.4.3 The grout shall be injected from the lowest point of the drill hole. The grout
may be pumped through grout tubes, casing, hollow-stem-augers, or drill
rods. The grout can be placed before or after insertion of the tendon. The
quantity of the grout and the grout pressures shall be recorded. The grout
pressures and grout takes shall be controlled to prevent excessive heave
or fracturing.
3.4.4 After the tendon is installed, the drill hole may be filled in one continuous
grouting operation except that pressure grouting shall not be used in the
free length zone. The grout at the top of the drill hole shall not contact the
back of the structure or the bottom of the trumpet.
3.4.5 If grout protected tendons are used for ground anchors anchored in rock,
then pressure grouting techniques shall be utilized. Pressure grouting
requires that the drill hole be sealed and that the grout be injected until a
minimum 0.35 MPa grout pressure (measured at the top of the drill hole)
can be maintained on the grout for at least five (5) minutes.
3.4.6 The grout tube may remain in the hole on completion of grouting if the
tube is filled with grout.
3.4.7 The ground anchor grout shall remain undisturbed after grouting for a
minimum of three days or until the grout has cured. Testing and stressing
of the anchors shall not be performed until strength tests on the grout
indicate sufficient curing has occurred.
3.4.8 After grouting, the tendon shall not be loaded for a minimum of three (3)
days.
3.4.9 During freezing weather conditions, grout shall not be allowed to freeze or
partially freeze until fully cured.
3.5 Anchorage Installation
3.5.1 The anchor bearing plate and the anchor head or nut shall be installed
perpendicular to the tendon, within plus/minus three (3) degrees and
centered on the bearing plate, without bending or kinking of the
prestressing steel elements. Wedge holes and wedges shall be free of
rust, grout, and dirt.
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
3.5.2 The stressing tail shall be cleaned and protected from damage until final
testing and lock-off. After the anchor has been accepted by the Owner, the
stress tail shall be cut to its final length according to the tendon
manufacturer's recommendations.
3.6 Anchor Testing
3.6.1 Complete ground anchor tests. For ground anchor testing, acceptance
criteria, anchor lift-off test, and procedures for anchors failing the
acceptance criteria, see Section 1.6.3
3.7 Ground Anchors Decommissioning and Abandonment
3.7.1 Refer to 31 23 23 Site Restoration.
3.8 Finishing
3.8.1 Remove all bentonite-contaminated concrete from areas where other

construction is to join the secant pile wall construction. Clean the exposed
wall face to remove bentonite caking and film materials and expose a
clean concrete surface.
(END OF SECTION)
334890-TU-210-S0-0050
03 15 00 PCTL CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

TMEP-TU-2900, Revision A, July 4, 2016
REVISION INDEX

A Issued for 90% Design
2016-07-04 2016-07-04 2016-07-04
334890-TU-210-S0-0051
TMEP-TU-2900 Revision A July 4, 2016 Page 1 of 13
03 15 00 PCTL Concrete Accessories
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 2
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 2
1.2 Scope of Work ........................................................................................... 4
1.6 Submittals .................................................................................................. 6
2.0 PRODUCTS ......................................................................................................... 7

2.1 Gaskets...................................................................................................... 7
2.2 Lifting/Grout Inserts ................................................................................. 10
2.3 Bolts and Bolt Anchorages....................................................................... 11
2.4 Dowels and Dowel Inserts ....................................................................... 11
2.5 Packers .................................................................................................... 11
2.6 Foam strips .............................................................................................. 12
2.7 Guide Rods .............................................................................................. 12
2.8 Dunnage .................................................................................................. 13
2.9 Adhesives ................................................................................................ 13
3.0 EXECUTION....................................................................................................... 13
334890-TU-210-S0-0051
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction

PC-001.


following:


Trans Mountain


334890-TU-210-S0-0051
H. 1620 Shotcrete
334890-TU-210-S0-0051
1.2 Scope of Work
1.2.1 The Work specified herein includes the furnishing of embedments in and
attachments to the precast concrete segmental lining (PCTL).
Not used
334890-TU-210-S0-0051
1.5.2.1 ASTM A153/A153M-16, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating

(Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
1.5.2.2 ASTM A449-14, Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws,

Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum
Tensile Strength General Use.
1.5.2.3 ASTM A490-14a, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts,

Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
1.5.2.4 ASTM C1166-06 (R2011), Standard Test Method for Flame

Propagation of Dense and Cellular Elastomeric Gaskets and
Accessories.
1.5.2.5 ASTM D395-16, Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property -

Compression Set.
1.5.2.6 ASTM D412-15a, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized

Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension.
1.5.2.7 ASTM D471-85 (R2007), Standard Test Methods for Rubber

Property - Effect of Liquids.
1.5.2.8 ASTM D573-04 (R2015), Standard Test Methods for Rubber -

Deterioration in an Air Oven.
1.5.2.9 ASTM D1149-16, Standard Test Methods for Rubber

Deterioration - Cracking in an Ozone Controlled Environment.
1.5.2.10 ASTM D2240-15, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property -

Durometer Hardness.
1.5.2.11 ASTM F2329/F2329M-15, Standard Specification for Zinc

Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for Application to Carbon and
Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special
Threaded Fasteners.
334890-TU-210-S0-0051
1.5.3.1 CSA S16.1-14, Limit States Design of Steel Structures
1.6 Submittals
1.6.1 General

1.6.2 At least 30 days prior to placement of concrete, submit the following

documentation for review by the Owner:
1.6.3 Submit shop drawings or manufacturer’s literature as appropriate:
A. Gaskets and gasket groove details
B. Partially-penetrated grout insert
C. Vacuum lifting shear pockets
1.6.3.2 Submit Samples of:
A. Gaskets with mitred corners
B. Threaded grout/lifting sockets
C. Bolts with hardware and bolt inserts
D. Dowels and dowel inserts
E. Packer material
F. Foam strips
G. Guide rods
1.6.3.3 Manufacturer’s certification, including certified tests performed

by a qualified independent laboratory, satisfactorily
demonstrating the capacities of individual assemblies as
follows:
A. Minimum 55 kN pullout capacity on the circumferential dowel

assemblies
334890-TU-210-S0-0051
B. Minimum 30 kN shear capacity on the circumferential dowel

assemblies
C. Minimum 140 kN pullout capacity on the radial joint bolt

assemblies in a restrained test
1.6.3.4 Test reports and other submittals as described in subsequent

sections.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Gaskets
2.1.1 All segments shall be supplied with a waterproofing gasket on all faces.
Gasket shall be similar to Datwyler M 385 98 gasket or equivalent
Trelleborg or other manufacturer as approved by the Owner.
2.1.2 The grooves shown on the Drawings are indicative only and the
Contractor can propose revised dimensions for review by the Owner.
2.1.3 The width of gasket base shall not exceed 26 mm.
2.1.4 The gaskets shall be designed to resist a minimum sustained hydrostatic

pressure of 7 bars above atmospheric pressure at a total gap of 6 mm
between bearing surfaces so that gasket deflection does not exceed the
deflection required to obtain the same gap in the tunnel lining. This is the
working pressure.
2.1.5 Maximum gasket compression force at full compression and full contact
between bearing faces shall be less than 65 kN per meter of gasket with a
2 mm compressed packer in the gap between segment faces.
2.1.6 The gaskets must be designed to be held fully compressed by the bolts
and dowels in the linings. The load required in the bolts or dowels to
ensure that the segment faces can be brought into contact shall be stated
in the submittal. The Contractor shall confirm that the bolts and dowels
proposed will provide the full compression force required.
2.1.7 The gaskets shall be shaped to render them inherently resistant to

mechanical damage during transport, handling and erection.
334890-TU-210-S0-0051
2.1.8 Finished gaskets shall be free from surface imperfections, porosity, voids,
inclusions or flow marks, and other defects which would impair satisfactory
performance. Joints in the gaskets shall be made with such accuracy as to
not impair satisfactory performance of the gaskets.
2.1.9 The bonding agent used to attach the gasket to the concrete segments
shall be compatible with both the gasket and the concrete, and shall
provide sufficient bond to hold the gasket secure during transportation,
storage and erection. The bonding agent shall be approved in writing by
the gasket manufacturer.
2.1.10 The gasket manufacturer shall specify the type of packaging to be used
for the gaskets and the conditions under which they are to be stored. The
gaskets shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendation.
2.1.11 The gasket manufacturer shall provide a detailed proposal for his method
of quality control to ensure and demonstrate consistency of material and
dimensions of the gaskets.
2.1.12 Before manufacturing gaskets in quantity, the Contractor shall make trial
units and fit them to actual segments so that the correct amount of stretch
can be ascertained to ensure a secure, snug fit to the segments.
2.1.13 Individual gaskets shall be custom fitted to match the dimensions of

individual segments within the ring.
2.1.14 All gasket corners shall be mitred to match angles of segment corners.
2.1.15 Gasket Material
2.1.15.1 Gasket Material shall conform to the following minimum

requirements:
A. Tensile Strength - ASTM D412, greater than 10 MPa
B. Ultimate Elongations - ASTM D412, greater than 300%
C. Hardness - ASTM D2240, Type A durometer, 65 ± 5
D. Compression Set - ASTM D395, Method B
i. Short Term Test - less than 25% compression set after

25% vertical compression for twenty-two (22) hours at
70°C.
334890-TU-210-S0-0051
ii. Long Term Test - less than 15% compression set after
25% vertical compression for seventy-two (72) hours at
20°C.
E. Aging - ASTM D573, seventy (70) hours at 100°C. Changes in

material properties shall comply with the following parameters:
i. Hardness - less than 6 units increase
ii. Tensile Strength - less than 15% decrease
iii. Ultimate Elongation - less than 30% decrease
F. Water Absorption - ASTM D471, forty-eight (48) hours at 70°C,

maximum 10% increase by weight. Use distilled water for the
standard test liquid
G. Oil Absorption - ASTM D471, seventy (70) hours at 70°C, in

ASTM Oil #3, maximum change in weight 110%
H. Ozone Resistance - ASTM D1149, with the stipulation that

there shall be no surface cracking when immersed in 200 parts
per hundred million (PPHM) ozone solution for one hundred
(100) hours at room temperature and 55% humidity.
I. Stress Relaxation - using two (2) steel plates, a minimum of

100 mm in length, with machined grooves, place two (2) full
gasket profiles, 100 mm in length, with no offset condition, and
compress to a minimum gap of 1.5 mm. Measure reaction
loads over a period of three (3) months at 70°C. After three
months, calculate by engineering analysis the stress relaxation
that accrues after two years. After two years the remaining
stress shall be more than 70%.
J. Material requirement tests shall be performed on specimens

prepared from fabricated gaskets rather than from stock
material
2.1.15.2 Gasket System
A. A metal test rig shall be used to carry out tests to prove the
watertightness of the gaskets. The gaskets shall be installed in
the manner to be used in the tunnels. Where gaps between
segment faces are stated in the test procedure below, these
shall be construed as the gaps required for testing components
334890-TU-210-S0-0051
of the least favourable dimensions within the allowable

tolerances, i.e. gaskets of the smallest permitted dimensions in
grooves of the largest permitted dimensions. The gaps used in
the tests shall be larger by an amount calculated from the
tolerances quoted and the actual size of the materials and
groove under test, so as to simulate tests on components of
the least favourable dimensions.
B. The gasketed joints shall resist a test pressure without leakage

under conditions commensurate with the specified working
pressure. The test pressure shall be related to the relaxation
and other properties of the gasket and shall not be less than
twice the working pressure. The gasketed joints shall resist a
test pressure without leakage under the conditions stated
below:
i. Straight gaskets with a gap of 6 mm between the segment

bearing faces (with packer installed) and the gaskets
displaced relative to each other in a direction normal to
their length by a distance of 15 mm
ii. T-joint representing the meeting of radial and

circumferential tunnel joints under each possible
combination of gaps of 1 mm and 6 mm between the
segment faces for the four legs of the cross joint and
relative displacement normal to the lengths of the gaskets
of zero and 15 mm
iii. In each test the water pressure shall be increased in

increments of 1.0 bar and held at each value for fifteen
(15) minutes. The final pressure shall be held for seventy-
two (72) hours during which no leakage shall occur
2.2 Lifting/Grout Inserts
2.2.1 Inserts shall be manufactured for purpose similar to Sofrasar TYPE I with
insert or equivalent as approved by the Owner.
2.2.2 Insert shall be cast from polypropylene. Other materials meeting

performance requirements may be submitted for review.
2.2.3 Lifting/grout insert length shall be no more than 180 mm. The insert
internal diameter shall be more than 40 mm and less than 100 mm.
334890-TU-210-S0-0051
2.2.4 Inside surface of insert shall be furnished with disposable plug to exclude
foreign matter until such time that segment is to be grouted.
2.2.5 Outside surface of insert shall be furnished with a cap.
2.2.6 Lifting/grout inserts shall be capable of accepting removable threaded

non-return valve adaptor to permit grouting from the inside while
preventing the inflow of grout when grouting through the tail seals of the
tunnel boring machine. Non-return valve to be capable of resisting an
external grout pressure of 9 bar. The manufacturer shall supply a quantity
of valves equal to 50% of the total number of grout inserts.
2.3 Bolts and Bolt Anchorages
2.3.1 The bolts in radial joints shall be in accordance with ASTM A490 or ASTM
A449.
2.3.2 The bolt anchorages shall be capable of developing the specified tensile
strength of the bolt-insert assemblies.
2.3.3 The anchorage shall be made of polyamide plastic similar to the system
manufactured by Sofrasar, or equivalent as approved by the Owner. Other
systems that meet design requirements may be submitted for review.
2.3.4 Anchorages shall not be within 35 mm of any concrete surface.
2.3.5 Provide the anchorages’ matching bolts with segmental lining.
2.3.6 Once production begins, inserts shall not be revised in any manner that
could affect the universal use of the recommended bolt.
2.4 Dowels and Dowel Inserts
2.4.1 Dowels and dowel inserts shall be manufactured for purpose.
2.4.2 All segments shall be supplied with dowel inserts at circumferential joints.
2.4.3 Dowels shall be push-in type, symmetrical and reversible, similar to

dowels and dowel inserts by Sofrasar SOF FIX ANIX 80 or equivalent as
2.4.4 The dowel assembly shall be capable of developing the specified tensile
and shear strength of the dowels.
2.5 Packers
334890-TU-210-S0-0051
2.5.1 All segments will be provided with APA marine grade plywood or approved
equal, free of knots with smooth surface, using water resistance adhesive,
having a compression secant modulus not less than 35 MPa and not more
than 100 MPa, when measured on a 75 mm by 75 mm specimen loaded
from zero to 10 MPa.
2.5.2 Packers will be 3 mm thick cut to shape and drilled to fit over the bolt,
guide rod and dowel holes as appropriate.
2.5.3 The packers will be the same width as the flat surface of the joint and
cover at least 95% of the flat length of the joint face.
2.5.4 The packers on both the radial and circumferential joint surfaces must not
consist of more than three (3) individual pieces of plywood per joint.
2.5.5 Packers shall be fixed to the joint faces at the Site prior to delivery to the
Delivery Site with an appropriate adhesive to ensure the packer remains
affixed for a minimum of two (2) years of exterior exposure.
2.5.6 Contractor shall submit proposed packer positioning for approval by the
Owner.
2.6 Foam strips
2.6.1 Foam strips shall be made from compressible closed cell material capable
of preventing grout from entering joints between segments.
2.6.2 All radial and circumferential joints shall have foam strips installed at the
Site prior to delivery to the Delivery Site.
2.6.3 Foam strips shall be glued to the precast concrete tunnel lining with a
compatible adhesive that shall keep the foam strips in place until the rings
are fully installed.
2.7 Guide Rods
2.7.1 Guide rods shall be manufactured for purpose, and shall be similar to
Sofrasar 40mm diameter guide rods or equivalent as approved by the
Owner.
2.7.2 All segments shall be provided with 35 mm diameter solid guide rod at
radial joints.
2.7.3 Guide rod shall be made of plastic material with a shear strength not less
than 1.0 MPa when sheared along a diameter.
334890-TU-210-S0-0051
2.7.4 Guide rod shall have a smooth surface allowing for easy sliding along the
guide rod groove.
2.7.5 Guide rod shall be glued to the segmental lining at the guide rod groove.
2.8 Dunnage
2.8.1 Dunnage shall be hardwood, specifically designed for supporting the

stacking loads.
2.9 Adhesives
2.9.1 For accessories that require fixation by adhesion, each adhesive shall be
per the accessory manufacturer’s recommendation, and approved by the
Owner.
3.0 EXECUTION
Not Used.
(END OF SECTION)
334890-TU-210-S0-0051
03 20 00.1 Concrete Reinforcement for PCTL

REVISION INDEX

2016-07-04 2016-07-04 2016-07-04
334890-TU-210-S0-0052
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 3
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 3
1.2 Scope of Work ........................................................................................... 5
1.6 Submittals .................................................................................................. 6
1.8 Delivery, Storage and Handling ................................................................. 8
2.0 PRODUCTS ......................................................................................................... 8

2.1 Materials .................................................................................................... 8
2.2 Fabrication ................................................................................................. 8
2.3 Splices and Laps ....................................................................................... 9
2.4 Placing ....................................................................................................... 9
2.5 Cleaning..................................................................................................... 9
3.0 EXECUTION....................................................................................................... 10
334890-TU-210-S0-0052
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction

PC-001.


following:


Trans Mountain


334890-TU-210-S0-0052
H. 1620 Shotcrete
334890-TU-210-S0-0052
1.2 Scope of Work
1.2.1 This specifications covers the labour, products, equipment and services
necessary for concrete reinforcement Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
Not used
334890-TU-210-S0-0052
1.5.2.1 ASTM A1064M-16a Standard Specification for Carbon Steel

Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for
Concrete Reinforcement.
1.5.3.1 CSA-A23.1/A23.2-14, Concrete Materials and Methods of

Concrete Construction/ Methods of Test and Standard Practices
for Concrete
1.5.3.2 CSA-A23.3-14, Design of Concrete Structures
1.5.3.3 CSA-G30.18 M09 (R2014), Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement
1.5.3.4 CSA W186-M1990 (R2012), Welding of Reinforcing Bars in

Reinforced Concrete Construction
1.5.4 RSIC, Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada, Manual of Standard Practice.
1.6 Submittals
1.6.1 General

1.6.1.2 All materials and equipment used in the Work shall be the
included as part of the above submittals or the subject of a
submittal to the Owner.
1.6.2 Shop drawings:
1.6.2.1 Submit placing drawings, bar lists, quantities and bar bending
details. Bar bending details to include details of standard bends.
Indicate name of bent bar fabricator, name of bulk steel supplier
and steel grade.
334890-TU-210-S0-0052
1.6.2.2 On placing drawings, indicate bar sizes, spacing, location and

quantities of reinforcement with identifying code marks to permit
correct placement. Indicate sequence of placing concrete.
Indicate type, sizes, spacings and locations of chairs, spacers
and hangers. Prepare reinforcing drawings in accordance with
Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada (RSIC) Manual of
Standard Practice.
1.6.2.3 All bars shall be provided full length. Laps or mechanical splices
shall not be accepted.
1.6.2.4 Show embedments, bolt pockets and other information that

could affect bar placements.
1.6.2.5 Substitution of different size bars shall be permitted only upon

written acceptance of the Owner.
1.6.3 Samples: Submit samples of reinforcement chairs.
1.7.1.1 Submit certified copies of mill test reports for reinforcing steel
and welded wire fabric, showing physical and chemical analysis,
a minimum of four (4) weeks prior to commencing production.
1.7.1.2 Submit test data proving that the welding procedures will
develop the full strength of the connected bars without reducing
the strength of any bars continuous through the joint.
1.7.2 Testing
1.7.2.1 A procedure for testing the strength of structural welded joints

shall be submitted by the Contractor before production begins.
1.7.2.2 The strength of each structural welded joint shall meet or

exceed that specified on the Drawings.
1.7.2.3 As a prerequisite to commencing production of any or all

components of a given segment bar assembly, the Contractor
shall perform a test on every weld of the complete segment bar
assembly and demonstrate to the Owner that every weld
passes.
334890-TU-210-S0-0052
1.7.2.4 During the segment production work, structural welded joints

shall be tested at a rate of two (2) tests per week. The tests
shall be carried out on test pieces taken from completed rebar
cages selected by the Owner.
1.7.2.5 The Contractor shall bear the costs of all testing.
1.8 Delivery, Storage and Handling
1.8.1.1 Reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground and shall be
kept free of mud, dirt, oil and any contaminants which may
adversely affect the performance of the bars. Comply with CSA-
A23.1.
1.8.1.2 Prefabricated sections shall be stored such that no deformation

takes place.
1.8.1.3 Reinforcing steel shall be stored and handled before, during and
after placement in a manner to prevent fouling with dust,
grease, form release agents and other bond-inhibiting coatings.
1.8.1.4 Protect Work of this Section from damage. Protect other work
from damage resulting from this Work. Replace damaged Work
which cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Weldable reinforcing steel: ASTM A1064M; deformed steel wires unless
indicated otherwise, Grade 485W.
2.1.2 Reinforcement chairs and spacers shall be constructed of concrete,

purpose made, and of equal or better strength to segment concrete. Rebar
chairs shall support the weight of the rebar cage and shall provide the
specified concrete cover.
2.2 Fabrication
2.2.1 Do not commence fabrication prior to review of placing drawings by

Engineer.
2.2.2 Fabricate and bend reinforcing steel in accordance with CSA-A23.1, RSIC
Manual of Standard Practice and in accordance with reviewed placing
drawings.
334890-TU-210-S0-0052
2.2.3 Bend bars cold (no heating will be permitted) and only where shown on
Drawings.
2.2.4 Cutting and bending tolerances shall be sufficiently accurate to comply

with placing tolerances specified.
2.2.5 Add stiffeners to the cage to prevent both general movement of the cage,
and movement of the cage in the mould during casting and during lifting.
2.2.6 The Manufacturer shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Owner that
the reinforcement cage can be lifted without damage or distortion.
2.2.7 Perform all welding in accordance with CSA W186-M.
2.3 Splices and Laps
2.3.1 Splices and laps shall not be permitted.
2.4 Placing
2.4.1 Prior to installation of reinforcing steel, carefully inspect the moulds,

recess formers and inserts and verify that such work is complete to the
point where the installation of reinforcing may commence.
2.4.2 Place reinforcing steel as shown on the approved placing drawings and in
accordance with CSA-A23.1. Additional bars added by the Contractor for
constructability shall be at no cost to the Owner.
2.4.3 Minimum cover to reinforcing steel shall be as shown on Drawings.
2.4.4 Place the reinforcing steel cage accurately and support it with spacers,
chairs or hangers in as close a spacing as possible to prevent
displacement of the reinforcement from the intended position.
2.4.5 Correct kinks and bends not called for on Drawings.
2.4.6 Do not eliminate or displace reinforcement to accommodate hardware to

be embedded in concrete. In case of interference, request direction from
Engineer.
2.5 Cleaning
2.5.1 Ensure that reinforcing steel is free from loose mill scale, excessive rust,
dirt, oil or paint.
334890-TU-210-S0-0052
2.5.2 Perform any required cleaning prior to placing reinforcing steel in the
segment mould.
3.0 EXECUTION
Not Used
(END OF SECTION)
334890-TU-210-S0-0052
03 30 00.1 CONCRETE FOR PCTL

REVISION INDEX

2016-07-04 2016-07-04 2016-07-04
334890-TU-210-S0-0053
03 30 00.1 Concrete for PCTL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 3
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 3
1.2 Scope of Work ........................................................................................... 5
1.6 Submittals .................................................................................................. 6
2.0 PRODUCTS ......................................................................................................... 9

2.1 Materials .................................................................................................. 10
2.2 Concrete Mixes ........................................................................................ 10
2.3 Admixtures ............................................................................................... 11
2.4 Source Quality Control ............................................................................. 12
2.5 Test Procedures and Requirements ........................................................ 12
2.6 Production of Concrete ............................................................................ 13
2.7 Defective Concrete .................................................................................. 13
3.0 EXECUTION....................................................................................................... 13
334890-TU-210-S0-0053
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction

PC-001.


following:


Trans Mountain


334890-TU-210-S0-0053
H. 1620 Shotcrete
334890-TU-210-S0-0053
1.2 Scope of Work
1.2.1 The Work specified in this specification includes labour, products,

equipment and services necessary for concrete Work including the
precast concrete tunnel lining (PCTL).
334890-TU-210-S0-0053
Not used
1.5.2.1 ASTM C260/260M-10a, Standard Specification for Air-

Entraining Admixtures for Concrete

Admixtures for Concrete
1.5.2.3 ASTM C666/C666M-15, Standard Test Method for Resistance

of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and Thawing
1.5.3.1 CSA A23.1-14, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete

Construction
1.5.3.2 CSA A23.2-14, Methods of Test and Standard Practices for

Concrete
1.5.3.3 CSA A23.4-16, Precast Concrete – Materials and Construction
1.5.3.4 CSA A283-06 (R2016), Qualification Code for Concrete Testing

Laboratories
1.5.3.5 CSA A864-00 (R2005), Guide to the Evaluation and

Management of Concrete Structures Affected by Alkalai-
Aggregate Reaction
1.5.3.6 CSA A3000-13, Cementitious Materials Compendium
1.6 Submittals
1.6.1 General

334890-TU-210-S0-0053
1.6.1.2 Do not place concrete before written approval of mix is received.
1.6.1.3 Do not vary the approved mix without written approval.
1.6.1.4 Submit mix design for patching material to the Owner for written
approval.
1.6.2 At least 30 days prior to placement of concrete, submit the following

documentation for review by the Owner:
1.6.2.1 Proposed pit and stockpile locations for aggregates and provide
access for sampling.
1.6.2.2 The name and source of all other concrete materials.
1.6.2.3 Samples of following materials proposed for use:
A. 10 kg of each type of Portland cement
B. 3 kg of each type of supplementary cementing material
C. 10 kg of each type of blended hydraulic cement (if used)
D. 5 L of each admixture
1.6.2.4 Certificates: Manufacturer’s test data and certification by the

concrete producer with material samples verified by a qualified
independent inspection and testing laboratory that the following
materials will meet the specified requirements of this Contract:
A. Portland cement
B. Blended hydraulic cement (if used)
C. Supplementary cementing materials
D. Admixtures
E. Aggregates
F. Water
1.6.2.5 Submit certification that plant, equipment, and materials to be

used in concrete work comply with requirements of the most
recent edition of CSA A23.1/A23.2, and that the mix is adjusted
to prevent alkali aggregate reactivity problems.
334890-TU-210-S0-0053
1.6.2.6 Mix design:
A. Submittal shall include the proposed testing schedule to prove

compliance with applicable requirements
B. Supplement initial mix design submission with test data as it

becomes available
C. Adjustments made to the design mixes may require additional

tests on the new mix
D. The Owner may perform independent testing of the mix or

materials
1.7.1 Inspection and Tests
1.7.1.1 Materials shall conform to CSA A23.1 and will be inspected and
tested by the Contractor for conformance to requirements of this
Standard and to the Specifications. The Owner may conduct
independent inspections or tests.
1.7.1.2 Tests shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
A. Obtaining certification of cement
B. Testing of aggregate
C. Testing for establishing mixes of concrete and design of mix
D. Concrete cylinder tests:
i. Three (3) cylinders from each day's pour and for each 75
m³ of concrete shall be cured and tested under standard
conditions.
ii. Weekly, three (3) additional cylinders shall be taken from

the same batch as above (Section 1.8.1.2.D.i) and cured
with the segments.
E. Air entrainment tests and slump tests will be taken as is

necessary for control checks and acceptance purposes at the
334890-TU-210-S0-0053
discretion of the Owner and always from the same batch of

concrete from which test cylinders are made.
1.7.1.3 Tests will be made in accordance with CSA A23.2 and other
procedures detailed in the contractor quality plan.
1.7.1.4 Cooperate with and assist the Owner during inspections and
tests.
1.7.1.5 Remove defective materials and completed Work which fails

tests and replace as directed by the Owner.
1.7.1.6 Where Work or materials fail to meet strength requirements as

indicated by test results, pay costs of additional inspection and
testing required for new replacement work or materials.
1.7.1.7 Inspection or testing by the Owner will not augment or replace

the Contractor's quality control nor relieve him of his contractual
responsibility.
1.7.2 Records
1.7.2.1 The Supplier shall furnish the Owner with a log on which is
printed, stamped or written the following information:
A. Date of batching
B. Serial number of each batch
C. Amount of concrete in cubic meters
D. Time of first mixing of cement and aggregate
E. Time that the discharge of load was started
F. Time that the discharge of load was completed
G. The air temperature when the concrete was placed
H. The test samples taken and the results of all test samples
1.7.2.2 Additional information designated by the Owner and required by

the specifications shall be furnished upon request.
2.0 PRODUCTS
334890-TU-210-S0-0053
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Use liquid admixtures for concrete from a single manufacturer unless the
compatibility of materials from two or more suppliers can be
demonstrated.
2.1.2 Use products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations unless

otherwise directed by the Owner.
2.1.3 Admixtures shall be used only with the written approval of the Owner and
shall be used without alteration to the cement content.
2.1.4 Portland cement, blended hydraulic cement, and Portland-limestone

cement, Supplementary Cementing Material: CSA A3001.
2.1.5 Coarse Aggregate:
2.1.5.1 CSA A23.1, and CSA A23.2, tested in accordance with the
current Petrographic Analysis Test, the Los Angeles Abrasion
Loss Specification and CSA Test Method CSA A23.2-15A.
2.1.5.2 The maximum petrographic number as defined by CSA A23.2-

15A for the coarse aggregate shall be 125.
2.1.5.3 Gradation of Coarse Aggregate: In accordance with CSA A23.1

Table 11, Group 1 or an alternate grading approved by the
Owner.
2.1.5.4 Maximum size: 20 mm.
2.1.6 Fine Aggregate: CSA A23.1, Clause 4.2
2.1.7 Water: CSA A23.1, Clause 4.2
2.1.8 Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A
2.1.9 Set Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type D
2.1.10 Set Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494, Type C
2.1.11 Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260
2.1.12 Superplasticizer: ASTM C494, Type F
2.2 Concrete Mixes
334890-TU-210-S0-0053
2.2.1 Produce concrete in accordance with the requirements listed below and
specified herein.
2.2.1.1 Compressive strength at twenty-eight (28) days: minimum 60

MPa
2.2.1.2 Cement content: minimum of 300 kg/m3
2.2.1.3 Cementitious material content: minimum 400 kg/m3, maximum

550 kg/m3
2.2.1.4 Cementitious hydraulic slag: maximum 45% of total

cementitious material content
2.2.1.5 Fly Ash: maximum 40% of total cementitious material content
2.2.1.6 Silica fume: maximum 10% of total cementitious material

content
2.2.1.7 Water total cementitious material ratio: maximum 0.35 by

weight
2.2.1.8 Slump: minimum 75 mm
2.2.1.9 Minimum total supplemental cementitious materials (slag, fly

ash and/or silica fume): 25%
2.2.1.10 Class of Exposure according to CSA A23.1: F-1
2.2.2 Design concrete so that material will not segregate and excessive
bleeding will not occur.
2.2.3 The acceptance of any concrete mix proportion or material, shall not
preclude its future rejection if it is subsequently found to lack uniformity, or
if it fails to conform to the requirements specified, or if its performance is
found to be unsatisfactory.
2.2.4 Concrete and concrete proportions shall be in accordance with CSA A23.1
2.2.5 Mix concrete in accordance with CSA A23.1
2.3 Admixtures
2.3.1 Add admixtures to concrete mix in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations. Have admixture manufacturer make available, at no
334890-TU-210-S0-0053
cost to the Owner, upon seventy-two (72) hours’ notice, the services of a
qualified, full-time field representative to assure proper use of admixtures.
2.3.2 The use of calcium chloride or additional admixtures, other than those
specified, is not acceptable.
2.4 Source Quality Control
2.4.1 All testing will be done by the Contractor, in accordance with CSA A23.2.
2.4.2 Strength test means the average compressive strength of two companion
compression test specimens tested at the same age. If a strength test
falls below the specified strength, the concrete will be considered
defective.
2.4.3 Provide a heated, enclosed and locked storage area not less than 6 m2 in
a central location for storing concrete samples. Maintain humidity at
100%. Maintain the temperature in the storage area at 23°C ± 2°C at all
times. Provide a shelf in the storage area, for writing tags.
2.4.4 Provide transportation for the samples from the point that the samples are
taken to the storage area. Forbid entry to storage area by unauthorized
personnel.
2.5 Test Procedures and Requirements
2.5.1 Propose test procedures for determining permeability, diffusion, in-place

strength testing and other proposed tests.
2.5.2 The determination of within-batch uniformity for air content and slump
shall be performed based on CSA A23.1 Table 13. The samples shall be
tested in accordance with methods listed in CSA A23.2 Methods of Test
for Concrete. Two (2) sets of tests for CSA uniformity (slump, air content)
shall be carried out prior to a decision on the acceptance of the equipment
under tests:
2.5.3 Where the range, in each set of tests, is equal to or less than the
acceptance limit, the concrete shall be considered uniform and accepted.
2.5.4 Where the range of any single set of tests is greater than the rejection
limit, the concrete shall be considered non-uniform and shall be rejected.
2.5.5 Where the range of any single set of tests falls between the acceptance
and rejection limits, additional tests shall be made on the next consecutive
batch or load delivered by that unit. If the range of any single set of tests
334890-TU-210-S0-0053
is then greater than the acceptance limit, the concrete shall be considered
non-uniform and shall be rejected.
2.6 Production of Concrete
2.6.1 Testing and Inspection Facilities: Provide the use of a reasonably

soundproof and dust-proof office for the Owner in the mixing plant with
working space, heat, light and telephone.
2.6.2 Batching and Delivery Facilities: Provide facilities which conform to the
requirements of CSA A23.1, Clause 5.
2.7 Defective Concrete
2.7.1 Concrete shall be considered potentially defective if the concrete cylinder

test for any group of segments fails to meet the specified strength,
permeability or ionic diffusion resistance. In such cases the concrete in
that section may be checked by the Owner by core specimens drilled and
tested in accordance with CSA Test Method A23.2-14c.
2.7.2 Concrete compressive strength adequacy shall be evaluated using CSA

A23.1 Clause 4.4.6.6. Strength adequacy of core tests shall be evaluated
using CSA A23.1 Clause 4.4.6.6.2 for normal-strength concrete. If any test
specimen does not meet the compressive strength requirements, the
Owner shall have the right to reject the defective group of segments. All
costs, including coring, testing, and replacing shall be borne by the
Contractor.
2.7.3 Concrete shall also be considered defective if it is structurally unsound,

not watertight, honeycombed or improperly finished, as determined by the
Owner. The Owner shall have the right to require replacement,
strengthening or correction of the defective group of segments, all such
Work shall be carried out under the Owner's direction. All costs for
strengthening, demolishing, correcting and replacing shall be borne by the
Contractor.
3.0 EXECUTION
Not Used
(END OF SECTION)
334890-TU-210-S0-0053
31 74 16.1 PCTL HANDLING, STORAGE AND

DELIVERY
TMEP-TU-3300, Revision A, March 28, 2016
REVISION INDEX

A
2016-03-28 2016-04-05 2016-04-13
334890-TU-210-S0-0055
TMEP-TU-3300 Revision A March 28, 2016 Page 1 of 3
31 74 16.1 PCTL HANDLING, STORAGE AND DELIVERY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL.................................................................................................. 2
1.1 Section Includes ........................................................................................ 2
1.2 RESPONSIBILITY ..................................................................................... 2
2.0 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................... 2
3.0 EXECUTION .............................................................................................. 2

3.1 Storage in Contractor’s Stockyard ............................................................. 2
3.2 Delivery to the Delivery Site ....................................................................... 2
3.3 Procedure of Manufacture and Delivery..................................................... 3
334890-TU-210-S0-0055
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Section Includes
1.1.1 Section includes Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary for
proper handling, delivery and storage of the precast concrete tunnel lining
segments from completion of fabrication to acceptance of segments at the
Delivery Site.
1.2 RESPONSIBILITY
1.2.1 The Contractor shall retain responsibility for all defects in the segments
associated with their manufacture and storage. The Contractor shall
transport, repair or replace such segments at no cost to the Owner.
2.0 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Storage in Contractor’s Stockyard
3.1.1 Provide a stockyard for the storage for completed and accepted segments
in units of complete rings.
3.1.2 Stockyard shall be prepared and maintained to be suitable for the storage
and handling of segments, including preparing subgrade and laying out
the stockpiles with due consideration to safety, accessibility, clearance for
handling equipment, drainage, snow removal, parking, lighting and
security.
3.1.3 Unless the Site and associated stockyard is within 150 km of the Delivery
Site, maintain an additional stockyard within 150 km of the delivery Site
with the capacity to store at least five hundred (500) complete rings.
3.1.4 Engineer to have access to stockyards at all times.
3.2 Delivery to the Delivery Site
3.2.1 Provide the Engineer with one (1) complete copy of all loading statements.
The loading statements shall show the number of segments, the date of
manufacture, the identification markings of each segment and individual
inspection certificates.
334890-TU-210-S0-0055
3.2.2 Segments shall have attained the specified design strength prior to
loading.
3.2.3 Prior to loading segments, inspect the prepared segments, remove

defective or damaged segments, and repair any minor damage, in
accordance with specified procedures reviewed.
3.2.4 Segments shall be shipped in units of complete rings, all properly

identified.
3.2.5 Arrange deliveries to the Delivery Site from either the plant or stockyards.
Conform with the requirements of the police authorities, rush hour
restrictions, local bylaws and instructions that may be given from time to
time by the Engineer.
3.2.6 The Contractor will be responsible for unloading of the segments at the
Delivery Site.
3.2.7 The shipping invoice shall contain the following information:
3.2.7.1 Name of tunnelling Contractor;
3.2.7.2 Delivery location;
3.2.7.3 Number and type of segments; and
3.3 Procedure of Manufacture and Delivery
3.3.1 Manufacture is to proceed in a manner that permits the delivery of

inspected and accepted production tunnel segment rings of all types to the
delivery Site on the milestone dates indicated in Division 01.
END OF SECTION
334890-TU-210-S0-0055
PIPE INSTALLATION SYSTEM CALCS
MCNALLY
KEE DRAWING NUMBER 1776005
CALCULATION REVISION LEVEL CALCS BY: BRIAN W. KELLEY, P.E. 12/1/2015
GIVEN
TUNNEL ALIGNMENT AS SHOWN BELOW
PIPE OD= 31.25 IN.

PIPE ID= 30 IN.
CURVE RADIUS= 1400 M
= 55118 IN.
= 4593 FT.
SUPPORT SPACING= 12 M
= 472 IN.
MODULUS OF ELASTICITY= 30000000 PSI
ANALYSIS
DETERMINE PIPE STRESSES BENDING AROUND CURVE
PIPE MOMENT OF INERTIA= 7053 IN^4
PIPE "C"= 15.625 IN.
AVERAGE PIPE STRAIN= 0.0002835 IN/IN
AVERAGE PIPE STRESS= 8504 PSI
APPORXIMATE MAXIMUM PIPE STRESS= 11339 PSI
APPROXIMATE MIN. PIPE STRESS= 5670 PSI
DETERMINE MAX MOMENT INDUCED ON PIPE

MOMENT (M)= 5118170 IN-LBS.
1 of 4
DETERMINE MAXIMUM FORCE INDUCED ON PIPE
FORCE INDUCED FROM EACH PIPE (F)= 10833 LBS.
FORCE INDUCED ON EACH DOLLEY= 32500 LBS.
CALCULATE DOLLEY WHEEL LOADS
FORCE HEIGHT 1= 26.9 IN.

FORCE HEIGHT 2= 68.7 IN.
FORCE HEIGTH 3= 110.5 IN.
R2 HEIGHT= 135.2 IN.
R2= 16515 LBS.
R1= 15986 LBS.
2 of 4
CALCULATE DOLLEY FRAME STRESS
MOMENT OF INERTIA PER SIDE= 32.25 IN^4

TOTAL MOMENT OF INERTIA= 64.5 IN^4
C= 2.36 IN.
MAXIMUM STRESS= 23600 KSI

N(A550B)= 1.95 WITH RESPECT TO YIELD
CALCULATE ROLLING RESISTANCE

R1400M CURVE LENGTH= 540 M
NO. OF DOLLIES THRU R1400M CURVE= 45
PIPE WEIGHT= 8040 LBS. PER 12M OF SINGLE PIPE
= 24119 LBS. PER 12M ALL 3 PIPES
APPROXIMATE DOLLEY WEIGHT= 2200 LBS.
TOTAL VERTICAL LOAD PER DOLLEY= 26319 LBS.
ROLLING RESISTANCE= 0.021
3 of 4
ROLLING RESITANCE FROM VERT LOAD= 553 LBS.
ROLLING RESISTANCE FROM LAT LOAD= 683 LBS.
TOTAL RESISTANCE= 1235
GRADE= 3.6% DOWN
GRAVITY INDUCED PULL IN TUNNEL/PIPE= 947 LBS.
NET LOAD REQUIRED= 288 LBS. PER DOLLY
TOTAL LOAD TO PUSH THROUGH R1400M= 12947 LBS.
NO. OF DOLLIES IN 1430M STRAIGHT= 120
NET HOLDBACK REQ'D/DOLLY IN STRAIGHT= 395 LBS.
TOTAL HOLD BACK REQUIRED IN STRAIGHT= 47374 LBS.
NET HOLDBACK REQ'D IN STRAIGHT= 34427 LBS. TAKING CURVE RESISTANCE INTO
CONSIDERATION
4 of 4
PIPE INSTALLATION SYSTEM BUDGETARY PROPOSAL
TRANS MOUNTAIN TUNNEL
R1
UPPER ROLLER GUIDE CHANNEL
IN 1400M CURVE ONLY
INVERT RAIL
GRIPPER GANTRY
CONNECTION STRUCTURE
GRIPPER/PROPEL GANTRY ASSEMBLY
5” CAM ROLLERS
RAIL WHEEL
20,000 LB. CAPACITY
REMOVABLE CAP SADDLE
REMOVABLE INTERMEDIATE SADDLES
VERTICAL TRACK ROLLER
LATERAL TRACK ROLLER
TITLE PIPE SUPPORT DOLLY ASSEMBLY

PROJECT 1776
NEXT ASSY - X/X 1/8
WEIGHT 2074 LBS. X.XX .03
TOLERANCES
SCALE 1:8 X.XXX .010
DATE 12/1/15 X 1
APPROVED DRAWING NUMBER SHT 1 REV
-
DRAWN BY ENGINEER/CHK
E.KOSMICKI B.KELLEY - 1776005 OF 2
137.6
TITLE PIPE SUPPORT DOLLY ASSEMBLY

PROJECT 1776
52.4 16.0 NEXT ASSY - X/X 1/8
WEIGHT 2074 LBS. X.XX .03
TOLERANCES
SCALE 1:9 X.XXX .010
DATE 12/1/15 X 1
APPROVED DRAWING NUMBER SHT 2 REV
-
DRAWN BY ENGINEER/CHK
E.KOSMICKI B.KELLEY - 1776005 OF 2

A81936-3 Trans Mountain Appendix A Part 2 of 7 Condition 26 - A5J1X3

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

A81936-3 Trans Mountain Appendix A Part 2 of 7 Condition 26 - A5J1X3

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Burnaby Mountain Tunnel Option

Trans Mountain Pipeline ULC Design, Construction, and Operation

Appendix 1: Specifications and Drawings:

Specification for Precast Concrete Tunnel Lining (PCTL) TMEP-TU-1500 – 31 74 16.

Specification for PCTL Concrete Accessories TMEP-TU-2900 – 03 15 00.

Specification for Concrete Reinforcement for PCTL TMEP-TU-3000 – 03-20-00.1

Specification Concrete for PCTL TMEP-TU-3100 – 03 30 00.1.

Specification for PCTL Handling, Storage and Delivery TMEP-TU-3300 – 31 74 16.1.

Specification for Tunnel Annular Grouting TMEP-TU-1600 – 31 73 13.

Specification for Tunnel Backfill TMEP-TU-2500 – 31 73 14

Specification for Site Preparation TMEP-TU-1000 – 31 10 00.

Specification for Diversion and Care of Water TMEP-TU-1100 – 01 57 23.

Specification for Portal Area Development TMEP-TU-1210 – 31-71-03.

Specification for Secant Pile Wall TMEP-TU-2600 – 31 57 00.

Specification for Concrete Reinforcement TMEP-TU-2700 – 03 20 00.

Specification for Ground Anchors TMEP-TU-2800 – 31 51 00

Specification for Site Restoration TMEP-TU-2510 - 31 23 23.

Specification for Tunneling By TBM TMEP-TU-1310 – 31 71 20.

Specification for Pipeline Installation in Tunnel TMEP-TU-2000 – 23 11 00

NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION

2.0 PRODUCTS ......................................................................................................... 7

1.1.1 This Specification was prepared in collaboration with McNally Construction

1.1.2 This Specification is customized to the Contractor’s construction plans and

1.1.3 This Specifications forms part of the Contract Documents and is to be

1.1.3.1 Bidding requirements, bid forms, pricing and baseline schedule

1.1.3.2 General Conditions by Trans Mountain

1.1.3.3 Special Conditions and/or Division 1 Technical Specifications by

1.1.3.4 Environmental and Permit Conditions by Trans Mountain

1.1.3.5 Construction Execution Work Plans prepared by McNally and

1.1.3.6 Contract Drawings

1.1.3.7 Contract Geotechnical Reports

1.1.3.8 Various other Trans Mountain and TMEP standards including

A. 1000 Site Preparation

B. 1100 Diversion and Care of Water

C. 1210 Portal Area Development

D. 1310 Tunnelling by TBM

E. 1500 Precast Concrete Tunnel Lining (PCTL)

F. 1600 Tunnel Annular Grouting

G. 1610 Pre-Excavation Grouting

I. 2000 Pipeline Installation in Tunnel

J. 2200 Probe Hole Drilling ahead of TBM

K. 2300 Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring

L. 2400 Cast-In-Place Concrete

M. 2500 Tunnel Backfill

N. 2510 Site Restoration

O. 2600 Secant Pile Wall

P. 2700 Concrete Reinforcement

Q. 2800 Ground Anchors

R. 2900 PCTL Concrete Accessories

S. 3000 Concrete Reinforcement for PCTL

T. 3100 Concrete for PCTL

U. TMEP-CIV102 Engineering Survey – B.C.

W. TMEP-CIV400 Clearing Specification for British Columbia

X. TMEP-GC3105 FBE Plant Applied Coating

Y. TMEP-GC3300 FBE Field Applied Coating

Z. TMEP-GC3302 Two-Part Liquid Field Applied Coating

AA. TMEP-GC3306 Two-Part Liquid Shop Applied Coating

BB. TMEP-MP1200 Steel Fittings

CC. TMEP-MP2212 Steel Flanges

DD. TMEP-MP2217 Bends

EE. TMEP-MP2300 Pipeline Valves

FF. TMEP-MP3120 Pipeline Construction

GG. TMEP-MP3903 Non Destructive Testing